WO2025199129A1 - Concurrent uplink transmission - Google Patents

Concurrent uplink transmission

Info

Publication number
WO2025199129A1
WO2025199129A1 PCT/US2025/020412 US2025020412W WO2025199129A1 WO 2025199129 A1 WO2025199129 A1 WO 2025199129A1 US 2025020412 W US2025020412 W US 2025020412W WO 2025199129 A1 WO2025199129 A1 WO 2025199129A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
uplink
band
transmission
antenna
dual
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/US2025/020412
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Nazanin Rastegardoost
Hyoungsuk Jeon
Esmael Hejazi Dinan
Ali Cagatay CIRIK
Mohammad Ghadir Khoshkholgh Dashtaki
Hsin-Hsi TSAI
Ryan Keating
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Ofinno LLC
Original Assignee
Ofinno LLC
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ofinno LLC filed Critical Ofinno LLC
Publication of WO2025199129A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025199129A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621Feedback content
    • H04B7/0628Diversity capabilities
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0404Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas the mobile station comprising multiple antennas, e.g. to provide uplink diversity
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0602Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using antenna switching
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A) or DMT
    • H04L5/001Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A) or DMT the frequencies being arranged in component carriers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • H04W8/22Processing or transfer of terminal data, e.g. status or physical capabilities
    • H04W8/24Transfer of terminal data

Definitions

  • FIG. 1 A and FIG. 1 B illustrate example mobile communication networks in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.
  • FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate a New Radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocol stack.
  • NR New Radio
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.
  • FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B respectively illustrate a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels for the downlink and uplink.
  • FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier.
  • FIG. 10A illustrates three carrier aggregation configurations with two component carriers.
  • FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups.
  • FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block structure and location.
  • FIG. 11B illustrates an example of CSI-RSs that are mapped in the time and frequency domains.
  • FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B respectively illustrate examples of three downlink and uplink beam management procedures.
  • FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13C respectively illustrate a four-step contention-based random access procedure, a two-step contention-free random access procedure, and another two-step random access procedure.
  • FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a COE-to-REG mapping for DOI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device in communication with a base station.
  • FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 160, and FIG. 16D illustrate example structures for uplink and downlink transmission.
  • FIG. 17 A shows an example application scenario of EN-DC deployment.
  • FIG. 17B shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in Area A and Area B according to FIG. 17A.
  • FIG. 18A shows an example application scenario of UL inter-band GA.
  • FIG. 18B shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in area A and area B according to FIG. 18A.
  • FIG. 19A shows an example of supplementary uplink coverage.
  • FIG. 19B shows an example application scenario of SUL.
  • FIG. 190 shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in Area A and Area B according to FIG. 19B.
  • FIG. 20 shows an example of wireless device transmitter antenna.
  • FIG. 21A shows an example of uplink Tx switching for a UE with 2Tx.
  • FIG. 21 B shows an example of transmission options for UL Tx switching as shown in FIG. 21 A.
  • FIG. 22A shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in EN-DC scenario.
  • FIG. 22B shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in inter-band CA scenario.
  • FIG. 220 shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in SUL scenario.
  • FIG. 23 shows an example of transmission options for UL Tx switching.
  • FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B show examples of UL Tx switching period location for UL Tx switching between pair of carriers/bands.
  • FIG. 25A illustrates a 2Tx UE architecture.
  • FIG. 25B illustrates a 3Tx UE architecture with 2 LOs.
  • FIG. 250 illustrates a 3Tx UE architecture with 3 LOs.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates an example of signaling of uplink transmit antenna switching capability as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates an example of dual uplink transmission based on uplink transmit antenna switching capability as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B show examples of transmission options for UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
  • FIG. 29 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 2 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
  • FIG. 30 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
  • FIG. 31 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
  • Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed.
  • the disclosed mechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example, in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like.
  • Example criteria may be based, at least in part, on for example, wireless device or network node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like. When the one or more criteria are met, various example embodiments may be applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement example embodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols.
  • a base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices.
  • Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/or multiple releases of the same technology.
  • Wireless devices may have some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/or capability(ies).
  • this disclosure refers to a base station communicating with a plurality of wireless devices, this disclosure may refer to a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area.
  • This disclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices of a given LTE or 5G release with a given capability and in a given sector of the base station.
  • the plurality of wireless devices in this disclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area which perform according to disclosed methods, and/or the like. There may be a plurality of base stations or a plurality of wireless devices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, for example, those wireless devices or base stations may perform based on older releases of LTE or 5G technology.
  • a and B are sets and every element of A is an element of B, A is called a subset of B.
  • A is called a subset of B.
  • possible subsets of B ⁇ cell! , cell2 ⁇ are: ⁇ cell! ⁇ , ⁇ cell2 ⁇ , and ⁇ celH , cell2 ⁇ .
  • the phrase “based on” is indicative that the phrase following the term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • phrases “in response to” is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • the phrase “depending on” is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “depending on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
  • the term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether the device is in an operational or non- operational state. Configured may refer to specific settings in a device that effect the operational characteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware, registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within a device, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state, to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “a control message to cause in a device” may mean that a control message has parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics or may be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state.
  • parameters may comprise one or more information objects, and an information object may comprise one or more other objects.
  • an information object may comprise one or more other objects.
  • parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M
  • parameter (IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K
  • parameter (IE) K comprises parameter (information element) J.
  • N comprises K
  • N comprises J.
  • one or more messages comprise a plurality of parameters
  • modules may be implemented as modules.
  • a module is defined here as an element that performs a defined function and has a defined interface to other elements.
  • the modules described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g. hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, which may be behaviorally equivalent.
  • modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, MATLAB or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Script, or LabVI EWMathScript.
  • modules may be possible to implement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware.
  • programmable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, applicationspecific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (OPLDs).
  • Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like.
  • FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device.
  • HDL hardware description languages
  • VHDL VHSIC hardware description language
  • Verilog Verilog
  • FIG. 1A illustrates an example of a mobile communication network 100 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.
  • the mobile communication network 100 may be, for example, a public land mobile network (PLMN) run by a network operator.
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the mobile communication network 100 includes a core network (CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and a wireless device 106.
  • CN core network
  • RAN radio access network
  • wireless device 106 wireless device
  • the CN 102 may provide the wireless device 106 with an interface to one or more data networks (DNs), such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs.
  • DNs data networks
  • the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wireless device 106, and provide charging functionality.
  • the RAN 104 may connect the CN 102 to the wireless device 106 through radio communications over an air interface. As part of the radio communications, the RAN 104 may provide scheduling, radio resource management, and retransmission protocols.
  • the communication direction from the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over the air interface is known as the downlink and the communication direction from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over the air interface is known as the uplink.
  • Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
  • FDD frequency division duplexing
  • TDD time-division duplexing
  • wireless device may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass any mobile device or fixed (non-mobile) device for which wireless communication is needed or usable.
  • a wireless device may be a telephone, smart phone, tablet, computer, laptop, sensor, meter, wearable device, Internet of Things (loT) device, vehicle road side unit (RSU), relay node, automobile, and/or any combination thereof.
  • the term wireless device encompasses other terminology, including user equipment (UE), user terminal (UT), access terminal (AT), mobile station, handset, wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), and/or wireless communication device.
  • the RAN 104 may include one or more base stations (not shown).
  • the term base station may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass a Node B (associated with UMTS and/or 3G standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB, associated with E-UTRA and/or 4G standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one or more RRHs, a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B (gNB, associated with NR and/or 5G standards), an access point (AP, associated with, for example, WiFi or any other suitable wireless communication standard), and/or any combination thereof.
  • a base station may comprise at least one gNB Central Unit (gNB-CU) and at least one a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU).
  • a base station included in the RAN 104 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 over the air interface.
  • one or more of the base stations may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors).
  • the size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver (e.g., a base station receiver) can successfully receive the transmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter) operating in the cell.
  • the cells of the base stations may provide radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area to support wireless device mobility.
  • one or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less than three sectors.
  • One or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as a baseband processing unit coupled to several remote radio heads (RRHs), and/or as a repeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node.
  • RRHs remote radio heads
  • a baseband processing unit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, where the baseband processing unit may be either centralized in a pool of baseband processing units or virtualized.
  • a repeater node may amplify and rebroadcast a radio signal received from a donor node.
  • a relay node may perform the same/similar functions as a repeater node but may decode the radio signal received from the donor node to remove noise before amplifying and rebroadcasting the radio signal.
  • the RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of macrocell base stations that have similar antenna patterns and similar high-level transmit powers.
  • the RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network.
  • small cell base stations may be used to provide small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap with the comparatively larger coverage areas provided by macrocell base stations.
  • the small coverage areas may be provided in areas with high data traffic (or so-called “hotspots”) or in areas with weak macrocell coverage.
  • Examples of small cell base stations include, in order of decreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations.
  • 3GPP The Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) was formed in 1998 to provide global standardization of specifications for mobile communication networks similar to the mobile communication network 100 in FIG. 1A.
  • 3GPP has produced specifications for three generations of mobile networks: a third generation (3G) network known as Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a fourth generation (4G) network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE), and a fifth generation (5G) network known as 5G System (5GS).
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • 4G fourth generation
  • LTE Long-Term Evolution
  • 5G 5G System
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure are described with reference to the RAN of a 3GPP 5G network, referred to as next-generation RAN (NG- RAN).
  • NG- RAN next-generation RAN
  • Embodiments may be applicable to RANs of other mobile communication networks, such as the RAN 104 in FIG.
  • NG-RAN implements 5G radio access technology known as New Radio (NR) and may be provisioned to implement 4G radio access technology or other radio access technologies, including non-3GPP radio access technologies.
  • NR New Radio
  • FIG. 1 B illustrates another example mobile communication network 150 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.
  • Mobile communication network 150 may be, for example, a PLMN run by a network operator.
  • mobile communication network 150 includes a 5G core network (5G-CN) 152, an NG-RAN 154, and UEs 156A and 156B (collectively UEs 156). These components may be implemented and operate in the same or similar manner as corresponding components described with respect to FIG. 1A.
  • 5G-CN 5G core network
  • NG-RAN 154 a 5G core network
  • UEs 156A and 156B collectively UEs 156
  • the 5G-CN 152 provides the UEs 156 with an interface to one or more DNs, such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs.
  • the 5G-CN 152 may set up end- to-end connections between the UEs 156 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the UEs 156, and provide charging functionality.
  • the basis of the 5G-CN 152 may be a service-based architecture. This means that the architecture of the nodes making up the 5G-CN 152 may be defined as network functions that offer services via interfaces to other network functions.
  • the network functions of the 5G-CN 152 may be implemented in several ways, including as network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instances running on dedicated or shared hardware, or as virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform).
  • the 5G-CN 152 includes an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) 158A and a User Plane Function (UPF) 158B, which are shown as one component AMF/UPF 158 in FIG. 1 B for ease of illustration.
  • the UPF 158B may serve as a gateway between the NG-RAN 154 and the one or more DNs.
  • the UPF 158B may perform functions such as packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink traffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and downlink data notification triggering.
  • QoS quality of service
  • the UPF 158B may serve as an anchor point for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an external protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homed PDU session.
  • the UEs 156 may be configured to receive services through a PDU session, which is a logical connection between a UE and a DN.
  • the AMF 158A may perform functions such as Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between 3GPP access networks, idle mode UE reachability (e.g., control and execution of paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, access authentication, access authorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility management control (subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF) selection.
  • NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a ON and a UE
  • AS may refer to the functionality operating between the UE and a RAN.
  • the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more additional network functions that are not shown in FIG. 1B for the sake of clarity.
  • the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more of a Session Management Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), and/or an Authentication Server Function (AUSF).
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • NRF Policy Control Function
  • NEF Network Exposure Function
  • UDM Unified Data Management
  • AF Application Function
  • AUSF Authentication Server Function
  • the NG-RAN 154 may connect the 5G-CN 152 to the UEs 156 through radio communications over the air interface.
  • the NG-RAN 154 may include one or more gNBs, illustrated as gNB 160A and gNB 160B (collectively gNBs 160) and/or one or more ng-eNBs, illustrated as ng-eNB 162A and ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng-eNBs 162).
  • the gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may be more generically referred to as base stations.
  • the gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the UEs 156 over an air interface.
  • one or more of the gNBs 160 and/or one or more of the ng-eNBs 162 may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). Together, the cells of the gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162 may provide radio coverage to the UEs 156 over a wide geographic area to support UE mobility.
  • the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the 5G-CN 152 by means of an NG interface and to other base stations by an Xn interface.
  • the NG and Xn interfaces may be established using direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlying transport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network.
  • IP internet protocol
  • the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the UEs 156 by means of a Uu interface.
  • gNB 160A may be connected to the UE 156A by means of a Uu interface.
  • the NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces are associated with a protocol stack.
  • the protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements in FIG. 1 B to exchange data and signaling messages and may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane.
  • the user plane may handle data of interest to a user.
  • the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
  • the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to one or more AMF/UPF functions of the 5G-CN 152, such as the AMF/UPF 158, by means of one or more NG interfaces.
  • the gNB 160A may be connected to the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface.
  • the NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g., non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane PDUs between the gNB 160A and the UPF 158B.
  • the gNB 160A may be connected to the AMF 158A by means of an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface.
  • the NG-0 interface may provide, for example, NG interface management, UE context management, UE mobility management, transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, and configuration transfer and/or warning message transmission.
  • the gNBs 160 may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over the Uu interface.
  • the gNB 160A may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward the UE 156A over a Uu interface associated with a first protocol stack.
  • the ng-eNBs 162 may provide Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over a Uu interface, where E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology.
  • E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology.
  • the ng-eNB 162B may provide E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UE 156B over a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack.
  • the 5G-CN 152 was described as being configured to handle NR and 4G radio accesses. It will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that it may be possible for NR to connect to a 4G core network in a mode known as “non-standalone operation.” In non-standalone operation, a 4G core network is used to provide (or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g., initial access, mobility, and paging). Although only oneAMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG. 1 B, one g N B or ng-eNB may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes to provide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes.
  • an interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and NG interfaces) between the network elements in FIG. 1 B may be associated with a protocol stack that the network elements use to exchange data and signaling messages.
  • a protocol stack may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user, and the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
  • FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate examples of NR user plane and NR control plane protocol stacks for the Uu interface that lies between a UE 210 and a gNB 220.
  • the protocol stacks illustrated in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B may be the same or similar to those used for the Uu interface between, for example, the UE 156A and the gNB 160A shown in FIG. 1B.
  • FIG. 2A illustrates a NR user plane protocol stack comprising five layers implemented in the UE 210 and the gNB 220.
  • PHYs physical layers
  • PHYs 211 and 221 may provide transport services to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model.
  • the next four protocols above PHYs 211 and 221 comprise media access control layers (MAGs) 212 and 222, radio link control layers (RLCs) 213 and 223, packet data convergence protocol layers (PDOPs) 214 and 224, and service data application protocol layers (SDAPs) 215 and 225. Together, these four protocols may make up layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model.
  • MAGs media access control layers
  • RLCs radio link control layers
  • PDOPs packet data convergence protocol layers
  • SDAPs service data application protocol layers
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack.
  • the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform QoS flow handling.
  • the UE 210 may receive services through a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between the UE 210 and a DN.
  • the PDU session may have one or more QoS flows.
  • a UPF of a CN e.g., the UPF 158B
  • the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows and one or more data radio bearers.
  • the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers may be determined by the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220.
  • the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers through reflective mapping or control signaling received from the gNB 220.
  • the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220 may mark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may be observed by the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers.
  • QFI QoS flow indicator
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform header compression/decompression to reduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted over the air interface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of data transmitted over the air interface, and integrity protection (to ensure control messages originate from intended sources.
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and removal of packets received in duplicate due to, for example, an intra-gNB handover.
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packet duplication to improve the likelihood of the packet being received and, at the receiver, remove any duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for services that require high reliability.
  • PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform mapping/de-mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels in a dual connectivity scenario.
  • Dual connectivity is a technique that allows a UE to connect to two cells or, more generally, two cell groups: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG).
  • MCG master cell group
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • a split bearer is when a single radio bearer, such as one of the radio bearers provided by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225, is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity.
  • the PDCPs 214 and 224 may map/de-map the split radio bearer between RLC channels belonging to cell groups.
  • the RLCs 213 and 223 may perform segmentation, retransmission through Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and removal of duplicate data units received from MACs 212 and 222, respectively.
  • the RLCs 213 and 223 may support three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM). Based on the transmission mode an RLC is operating, the RLC may perform one or more of the noted functions.
  • the RLC configuration may be per logical channel with no dependency on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. As shown in FIG. 3, the RLCs 213 and 223 may provide RLC channels as a service to PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively.
  • TTI Transmission Time Interval
  • the MACs 212 and 222 may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels.
  • the multiplexing/demultiplexing may include multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHYs
  • the MAC 222 may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting, and priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling. Scheduling may be performed in the g N B 220 (at the MAC 222) for downlink and uplink.
  • the MACs 212 and 222 may be configured to perform error correction through Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between logical channels of the UE 210 by means of logical channel prioritization, and/or padding.
  • HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request
  • CA Carrier Aggregation
  • mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channel may use.
  • the MACs 212 and 222 may provide logical channels as a service to the RLCs 213 and 223.
  • the PHYs 211 and 221 may perform mapping of transport channels to physical channels and digital and analog signal processing functions for sending and receiving information over the air interface. These digital and analog signal processing functions may include, for example, coding/decoding and modulation/demodulation.
  • the PHYs 211 and 221 may perform multi-antenna mapping. As shown in FIG. 3, the PHYs 211 and 221 may provide one or more transport channels as a service to the MAGs 212 and 222.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack.
  • FIG. 4A illustrates a downlink data flow of three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) through the NR user plane protocol stack to generate two TBs at the gNB 220.
  • An uplink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flow depicted in FIG. 4A.
  • the downlink data flow of FIG. 4A begins when SDAP 225 receives the three IP packets from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packets to radio bearers.
  • the SDAP 225 maps IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and maps IP packet m to a second radio bearer 404.
  • An SDAP header (labeled with an “H” in FIG. 4A) is added to an IP packet.
  • the data unit from/to a higher protocol layer is referred to as a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer and the data unit to/from a lower protocol layer is referred to as a protocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer.
  • SDU service data unit
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • the data unit from the SDAP 225 is an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 and is a PDU of the SDAP 225.
  • the remaining protocol layers in FIG. 4A may perform their associated functionality (e.g. , with respect to FIG. 3), add corresponding headers, and forward their respective outputs to the next lower layer.
  • the PDCP 224 may perform IP-header compression and ciphering and forward its output to the RLC 223.
  • the RLC 223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG. 4A) and forward its output to the MAC 222.
  • the MAC 222 may multiplex a number of RLC PDUs and may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU to form a transport block.
  • the MAC subheaders may be distributed across the MAC PDU, as illustrated in FIG. 4A.
  • the MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of the MAC PDU.
  • the NR MAC PDU structure may reduce processing time and associated latency because the MAC PDU subheaders may be computed before the full MAC PDU is assembled.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.
  • the MAC subheader includes: an SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifying the logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use.
  • SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds
  • LCID logical channel identifier
  • F flag
  • R reserved bit
  • FIG. 4B further illustrates MAC control elements (CEs) inserted into the MAC PDU by a MAC, such as MAC 212 or MAC 222.
  • a MAC such as MAC 212 or MAC 222.
  • FIG. 4B illustrates two MAC CEs inserted into the MAC PDU.
  • MAC CEs may be inserted at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (as shown in FIG. 4B) and at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions.
  • MAC CEs may be used for in-band control signaling.
  • Example MAC CEs include: scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and power headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs, such as those for activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel state information (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, and prior configured components; discontinuous reception (DRX) related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access related MAC CEs.
  • a MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similar format as described for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates the type of control information included in the MAC CE.
  • logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels are first described as well as a mapping between the channel types.
  • One or more of the channels may be used to carry out functions associated with the NR control plane protocol stack described later below.
  • FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B illustrate, for downlink and uplink respectively, a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels.
  • Information is passed through channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY of the NR protocol stack.
  • a logical channel may be used between the RLC and the MAC and may be classified as a control channel that carries control and configuration information in the NR control plane or as a traffic channel that carries data in the NR user plane.
  • a logical channel may be classified as a dedicated logical channel that is dedicated to a specific UE or as a common logical channel that may be used by more than one UE.
  • a logical channel may also be defined by the type of information it carries.
  • the set of logical channels defined by NR include, for example:
  • a paging control channel for carrying paging messages used to page a UE whose location is not known to the network on a cell level;
  • a broadcast control channel for carrying system information messages in the form of a master information block (MIB) and several system information blocks (SIBs), wherein the system information messages may be used by the UEs to obtain information about how a cell is configured and how to operate within the cell;
  • MIB master information block
  • SIBs system information blocks
  • COCH common control channel
  • a dedicated control channel for carrying control messages to/from a specific the UE to configure the UE
  • DTCH dedicated traffic channel
  • T ransport channels are used between the MAC and PHY layers and may be defined by how the information they carry is transmitted over the air interface.
  • the set of transport channels defined by NR include, for example: [0097] - a paging channel (PCH) for carrying paging messages that originated from the PCCH;
  • PCH paging channel
  • DL-SCH downlink shared channel
  • UL-SCH uplink shared channel
  • the PHY may use physical channels to pass information between processing levels of the PHY.
  • a physical channel may have an associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or more transport channels.
  • the PHY may generate control information to support the low-level operation of the PHY and provide the control information to the lower levels of the PHY via physical control channels, known as L1/L2 control channels.
  • the set of physical channels and physical control channels defined by NR include, for example:
  • PBOH physical broadcast channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • a physical downlink control channel for carrying downlink control information (DOI), which may include downlink scheduling commands, uplink scheduling grants, and uplink power control commands;
  • DOI downlink control information
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • UCI uplink control information
  • a physical uplink control channel for carrying UCI, which may include HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank indicators (Rl), and scheduling requests (SR); and
  • CQI channel quality indicators
  • PMI pre-coding matrix indicators
  • Rl rank indicators
  • SR scheduling requests
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • the physical layer Similar to the physical control channels, the physical layer generates physical signals to support the low-level operation of the physical layer.
  • the physical layer signals defined by NR include: primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), sounding reference signals (SRS), and phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS). These physical layer signals will be described in greater detail below.
  • FIG. 2B illustrates an example NR control plane protocol stack.
  • the NR control plane protocol stack may use the same/similar first four protocol layers as the example NR user plane protocol stack. These four protocol layers include the PHYs 211 and 221 , the MAGs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDOPs 214 and 224.
  • the NR control plane stack has radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top of the NR control plane protocol stack.
  • RRCs radio resource controls
  • the NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A) or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the ON.
  • the NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There is no direct path between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 through which the NAS messages can be transported.
  • the NAS messages may be transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces.
  • NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality such as authentication, security, connection setup, mobility management, and session management.
  • the RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the RAN.
  • the RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 via signaling messages, referred to as RRC messages.
  • RRC messages may be transmitted between the UE 210 and the RAN using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers.
  • the MAC may multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same transport block (TB).
  • the RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality such as: broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE 210 and the RAN; security functions including key management; establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radio bearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS management functions; the UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting; detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer.
  • RRCs 216 and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters for communication between the UE 210 and the RAN.
  • FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.
  • the UE may be the same or similar to the wireless device 106 depicted in FIG. 1A, the UE 210 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other wireless device described in the present disclosure.
  • a UE may be in at least one of three RRC states: RRC connected 602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 604 (e.g., RRC_I DLE), and RRC inactive 606 (e.g., RRCJNACTIVE).
  • RRC connected 602 e.g., RRC_CONNECTED
  • RRC idle 604 e.g., RRC_I DLE
  • RRC inactive 606 e.g., RRCJNACTIVE
  • the UE has an established RRC context and may have at least one RRC connection with a base station.
  • the base station may be similar to one of the one or more base stations included in the RAN 104 depicted in FIG. 1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 depicted in FIG. 1 B, the gNB 220 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other base station described in the present disclosure.
  • the base station with which the UE is connected may have the RRC context for the UE.
  • the RRC context referred to as the UE context, may comprise parameters for communication between the UE and the base station.
  • These parameters may include, for example: one or more AS contexts; one or more radio link configuration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session); security information; and/or PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information.
  • bearer configuration information e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session
  • security information e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session
  • PHY e.g., MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information
  • the RAN e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG-RAN 154
  • the UE may measure the signal levels (e.g., reference signal levels) from a serving cell
  • the UE’s serving base station may request a handover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations based on the reported measurements.
  • the RRC state may transition from RRC connected 602 to RRC idle 604 through a connection release procedure 608 or to RRC inactive 606 through a connection inactivation procedure 610.
  • RRC idle 604 an RRC context may not be established for the UE.
  • the UE may not have an RRC connection with the base station.
  • the UE While in RRC idle 604, the UE may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power).
  • the UE may wake up periodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception cycle) to monitor for paging messages from the RAN.
  • Mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through a procedure known as cell reselection.
  • the RRC state may transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602 through a connection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a random access procedure as discussed in greater detail below.
  • An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism.
  • RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 mobility is managed by the UE through cell reselection.
  • the purpose of mobility management in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 is to allow the network to be able to notify the UE of an event via a paging message without having to broadcast the paging message over the entire mobile communications network.
  • the mobility management mechanism used in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 may allow the network to track the UE on a cell-group level so that the paging message may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the UE currently resides within instead of the entire mobile communication network.
  • the mobility management mechanisms for RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 track the UE on a cell-group level. They may do so using different granularities of grouping. For example, there may be three levels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within a RAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within a group of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by a tracking area identifier (TAI).
  • RAI RAN area identifier
  • TAI tracking area and identified by a tracking area identifier
  • Tracking areas may be used to track the UE at the CN level.
  • the CN e.g., the CN 102 or the 5G-CN 152 may provide the UE with a list of TAIs associated with a UE registration area. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell associated with a TAI not included in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area, the UE may perform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the UE’s location and provide the UE with a new the UE registration area.
  • RAN areas may be used to track the UE at the RAN level.
  • the UE may be assigned a RAN notification area.
  • a RAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities, a list of RAIs, or a list of TAIs.
  • a base station may belong to one or more RAN notification areas.
  • a cell may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell not included in the RAN notification area assigned to the UE, the UE may perform a notification area update with the RAN to update the UE’s RAN notification area.
  • a base station storing an RRC context for a UE or a last serving base station of the UE may be referred to as an anchor base station.
  • An anchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the UE at least during a period of time that the UE stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the UE stays in RRC inactive 606.
  • a gNB such as gNBs 160 in FIG. 1 B, may be split in two parts: a central unit (gNB-CU), and one or more distributed units (gNB-DU).
  • a gNB-CU may be coupled to one or more gNB-DUs using an F1 interface.
  • the gNB-CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP.
  • a gNB-DU may comprise the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY.
  • the physical signals and physical channels (discussed with respect to FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) may be mapped onto orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols.
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing
  • OFDM is a multicarrier communication scheme that transmits data over F orthogonal subcarriers (or tones).
  • the data may be mapped to a series of complex symbols (e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols), referred to as source symbols, and divided into F parallel symbol streams.
  • M-QAM M-quadrature amplitude modulation
  • M-PSK M-phase shift keying
  • the F parallel symbol streams may be treated as though they are in the frequency domain and used as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) block that transforms them into the time domain.
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • the IFFT block may take in F source symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbol streams, and use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the F orthogonal subcarriers.
  • the output of the IFFT block may be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonal subcarriers.
  • the F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol.
  • an OFDM symbol provided by the IFFT block may be transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency.
  • the F parallel symbol streams may be mixed using an FFT block before being processed by the IFFT block.
  • This operation produces Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by UEs in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PAPR).
  • DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
  • PAPR peak to average power ratio
  • Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped.
  • An NR frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN).
  • the SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames.
  • one NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration and may include 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration.
  • a subframe may be divided into slots that include, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot.
  • the duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDM symbols of the slot.
  • a flexible numerology is supported to accommodate different cell deployments (e.g., cells with carrier frequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in the mm-wave range).
  • a numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration.
  • subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz
  • cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down by powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 ps.
  • NR defines numerologies with the following subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 ps; 30 kHz/2.3 ps; 60 kHz/1.2 ps; 120 kHz/0.59 ps; and 240 kHz/0.29 ps.
  • a slot may have a fixed number of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDM symbols).
  • a numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing has a shorter slot duration and, correspondingly, more slots per subframe.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates this numerology-dependent slot duration and slots-per-subframe transmission structure (the numerology with a subcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7 for ease of illustration).
  • a subframe in NR may be used as a numerologyindependent time reference, while a slot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlink transmissions are scheduled.
  • scheduling in NR may be decoupled from the slot duration and start at any OFDM symbol and last for as many symbols as needed for a transmission. These partial slot transmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or subslot transmissions.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier.
  • the slot includes resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs).
  • An RE is the smallest physical resource in NR.
  • An RE spans one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrier in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8.
  • An RB spans twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8.
  • Such a limitation may limit the NR carrier to 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively, where the 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a single numerology being used across the entire bandwidth of the NR carrier.
  • multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier.
  • NR may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., up to 400 MHz for a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all UEs may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g., due to hardware limitations). Also, receiving the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive in terms of UE power consumption. In an example, to reduce power consumption and/or for other purposes, a UE may adapt the size of the UE’s receive bandwidth based on the amount of traffic the UE is scheduled to receive. This is referred to as bandwidth adaptation.
  • NR defines bandwidth parts (BWPs) to support UEs not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth and to support bandwidth adaptation.
  • BWP bandwidth parts
  • a BMP may be defined by a subset of contiguous RBs on a carrier.
  • a UE may be configured (e.g., via RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs and one or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPs and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell).
  • one or more of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active. These one or more BWPs may be referred to as active BWPs of the serving cell.
  • the serving cell When a serving cell is configured with a secondary uplink carrier, the serving cell may have one or more first active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second active BWPs in the secondary uplink carrier.
  • a downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index of the uplink BWP are the same.
  • a UE may expect that a center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as a center frequency for an uplink BWP.
  • a base station may configure a UE with one or more control resource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space.
  • a search space is a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the UE may find control information.
  • the search space may be a UE-specific search space or a common search space (potentially usable by a plurality of UEs).
  • a base station may configure a UE with a common search space, on a POell or on a primary secondary cell (PSOell), in an active downlink BWP.
  • a BS may configure a UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCOH transmissions.
  • a UE may receive downlink receptions (e.g., PDCOH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP.
  • the UE may transmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCOH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).
  • One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided in Downlink Control Information (DCI).
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • a value of a BWP indicator field may indicate which BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one or more downlink receptions.
  • the value of the one or more BWP indicator fields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplink transmissions.
  • a base station may sem i-statically configure a UE with a default downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with a PCell. If the base station does not provide the default downlink BWP to the UE, the default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP. The UE may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.
  • a base station may configure a UE with a BWP inactivity timer value for a PCell.
  • the UE may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at any appropriate time.
  • the UE may start or restart the BWP inactivity timer (a) when the UE detects a DOI indicating an active downlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectra operation; or (b) when a UE detects a DOI indicating an active downlink BWP or active uplink BWP other than a default downlink BWP or uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation.
  • the UE may run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration (for example, increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero).
  • the UE may switch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP.
  • a base station may semi-statically configure a UE with one or more BWPs.
  • a UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP in response to receiving a DOI indicating the second BWP as an active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivity timer (e.g., if the second BWP is the default BWP).
  • Downlink and uplink BWP switching (where BWP switching refers to switching from a currently active BWP to a not currently active BWP) may be performed independently in paired spectra. In unpaired spectra, downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously. Switching between configured BWPs may occur based on RRC signaling, DOI, expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation of random access.
  • FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier.
  • a UE configured with the three BWPs may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point.
  • the BWPs include: a BWP 902 with a bandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 with a bandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 with a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz.
  • the BWP 902 may be an initial active BWP
  • the BWP 904 may be a default BWP.
  • the UE may switch between BWPs at switching points.
  • the UE may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908.
  • the switching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reason, for example, in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer (indicating switching to the default BWP) and/or in response to receiving a DOI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP.
  • the UE may switch at a switching point 910 from active BWP 904 to BWP 906 in response receiving a DOI indicating BWP 906 as the active BWP.
  • the UE may switch at a switching point 912 from active BWP 906 to BWP 904 in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer and/or in response receiving a DOI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP.
  • the UE may switch at a switching point 914 from active BWP 904 to BWP 902 in response receiving a DOI indicating BWP 902 as the active BWP.
  • UE procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as those on a primary cell. For example, the UE may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the UE would use these values for a primary cell.
  • two or more carriers can be aggregated and simultaneously transmitted to/from the same UE using carrier aggregation (GA).
  • the aggregated carriers in GA may be referred to as component carriers (CCs).
  • CCs component carriers
  • the CCs may have three configurations in the frequency domain.
  • FIG. 10A illustrates the three GA configurations with two CCs.
  • the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are located directly adjacent to each other within the frequency band.
  • the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are separated in the frequency band by a gap.
  • the two CCs are located in frequency bands (frequency band A and frequency band B).
  • up to 32 CCs may be aggregated.
  • the aggregated CCs may have the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD or FDD).
  • a serving cell for a UE using CA may have a downlink CC.
  • one or more uplink CCs may be optionally configured for a serving cell.
  • the ability to aggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, when the UE has more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink.
  • one of the aggregated cells for a UE may be referred to as a primary cell (PCell).
  • the PCell may be the serving cell that the UE initially connects to at RRC connection establishment, reestablishment, and/or handover.
  • the PCell may provide the UE with NAS mobility information and the security input.
  • UEs may have different PCells.
  • the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the downlink primary CC (DL PCC).
  • the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC (UL PCC).
  • SCells secondary cells
  • the SCells may be configured after the PCell is configured for the UE.
  • an SCell may be configured through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure.
  • the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as a downlink secondary CC (DL SCC).
  • DL SCC downlink secondary CC
  • UL SCC uplink secondary CC
  • Configured SCells for a UE may be activated and deactivated based on, for example, traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCell may mean that PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell is stopped and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell are stopped. Configured SCells may be activated and deactivated using a MAC CE with respect to FIG. 4B. For example, a MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells) for the UE are activated or deactivated.
  • a bitmap e.g., one bit per SCell
  • Configured SCells may be deactivated in response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer (e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell).
  • Downlink control information such as scheduling assignments and scheduling grants, for a cell may be transmitted on the cell corresponding to the assignments and grants, which is known as self-scheduling.
  • the DOI for the cell may be transmitted on another cell, which is known as cross-carrier scheduling.
  • Uplink control information e.g., HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback, such as CQI, PMI, and/or Rl
  • the PUCOH of the POell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided into multiple PUCOH groups.
  • FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCOH groups.
  • a PUCOH group 1010 and a PUCOH group 1050 may include one or more downlink COs, respectively.
  • the PUCOH group 1010 includes three downlink COs: a POell 1011, an SCell 1012, and an SCell 1013.
  • the PUCOH group 1050 includes three downlink COs in the present example: a POell 1051, an SCell 1052, and an SCell 1053.
  • One or more uplink COs may be configured as a POell 1021, an SCell 1022, and an SCell 1023.
  • One or more other uplink COs may be configured as a primary SCell (PSCell) 1061, an SCell 1062, and an SCell 1063.
  • Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink COs of the PUCOH group 1010 shown as UC1 1031, UC1 1032, and UC1 1033, may be transmitted in the uplink of the POell 1021.
  • Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink COs of the PUCOH group 1050, shown as UC1 1071, UC1 1072, and UC1 1073, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PSCell 1061.
  • a cell comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index.
  • the physical cell ID or the cell index may identify a downlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used.
  • a physical cell ID may be determined using a synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink component carrier.
  • a cell index may be determined using RRC messages.
  • a physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID
  • a cell index may be referred to as a carrier index.
  • the disclosure when the disclosure refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier, the disclosure may mean the first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier.
  • the same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrier activation.
  • the disclosure indicates that a first carrier is activated, the specification may mean that a cell comprising the first carrier is activated.
  • a multi-carrier nature of a PHY may be exposed to a MAC.
  • a HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell.
  • a transport block may be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell.
  • a transport block and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell.
  • a base station may transmit (e.g., unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast) one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to a UE (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DMRS, and/or PT-RS, as shown in FIG. 5A).
  • RSs Reference Signals
  • the UE may transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DMRS, PT-RS, and/or SRS, as shown in FIG. 5B).
  • the PSS and the SSS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to synchronize the UE to the base station.
  • the PSS and the SSS may be provided in a synchronization signal (SS) I physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block that includes the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH.
  • SS synchronization signal
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • the base station may periodically transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks.
  • FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block's structure and location.
  • a burst of SS/PBCH blocks may include one or more SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may be transmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames or 20 ms). A burst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a duration of 5 ms). It will be understood that FIG.
  • 11A is an example, and that these parameters (number of SS/PBCH blocks per burst, periodicity of bursts, position of burst within the frame) may be configured based on, for example: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block is transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; a configuration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); or any other suitable factor.
  • the UE may assume a subcarrier spacing for the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored, unless the radio network configured the UE to assume a different subcarrier spacing.
  • the SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain (e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in the example of FIG. 11A) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers).
  • the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common center frequency.
  • the PSS may be transmitted first and may span, for example, 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers.
  • the SSS may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers.
  • the PBCH may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers.
  • the location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains may not be known to the UE (e.g., if the UE is searching for the cell).
  • the UE may monitor a carrier for the PSS. For example, the UE may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. If the PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms), the UE may search for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier, as indicated by a synchronization raster. If the PSS is found at a location in the time and frequency domains, the UE may determine, based on a known structure of the SS/PBCH block, the locations of the SSS and the PBCH, respectively.
  • the SS/PBCH block may be a celldefining SS block (CD-SSB).
  • a primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB.
  • the CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster.
  • a cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD- SSB.
  • the SS/PBCH block may be used by the UE to determine one or more parameters of the cell. For example, the UE may determine a physical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell based on the sequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The UE may determine a location of a frame boundary of the cell based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. For example, the SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been transmitted in accordance with a transmission pattern, wherein a SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern is a known distance from the frame boundary.
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • the PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and may use forward error correction (FEC).
  • FEC forward error correction
  • the FEC may use polar coding.
  • One or more symbols spanned by the PBCH may carry one or more DMRSs for demodulation of the PBCH.
  • the PBCH may include an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters may facilitate time synchronization of the UE to the base station.
  • the PBCH may include a master information block (MIB) used to provide the UE with one or more parameters. The MIB may be used by the UE to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell.
  • MIB master information block
  • the RMSI may include a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1 ).
  • SIB1 may contain information needed by the UE to access the cell.
  • the UE may use one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor PDCOH, which may be used to schedule PDSCH.
  • the PDSCH may include the SIB1.
  • the SIB1 may be decoded using parameters provided in the MIB.
  • the PBCH may indicate an absence of SIB1. Based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1 , the UE may be pointed to a frequency.
  • the UE may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which the UE is pointed.
  • the UE may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with a same SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g. , having the same/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters).
  • QCL quasi co-located
  • SS/PBCH blocks may be transmitted in spatial directions (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of the cell).
  • a first SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a first spatial direction using a first beam
  • a second SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam.
  • a base station may transmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks.
  • a first PCI of a first SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks.
  • the PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks transmitted in different frequency locations may be different or the same.
  • the CSI-RS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to acquire channel state information (CSI).
  • the base station may configure the UE with one or more CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose.
  • the base station may configure a UE with one or more of the same/similar CSI-RSs.
  • the UE may measure the one or more CSI-RSs.
  • the UE may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSI report based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RSs.
  • the UE may provide the CSI report to the base station.
  • the base station may use feedback provided by the UE (e.g., the estimated downlink channel state) to perform link adaptation.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more CSI-RS resource sets.
  • a CSI-RS resource may be associated with a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity.
  • the base station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RS resource.
  • the base station may indicate to the UE that a CSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/or deactivated.
  • the base station may configure the UE to report CSI measurements.
  • the base station may configure the UE to provide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently.
  • periodic CSI reporting the UE may be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports.
  • the base station may request a CSI report.
  • the base station may command the UE to measure a configured CSI-RS resource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurements.
  • the base station may configure the UE to transmit periodically, and selectively activate or deactivate the periodic reporting.
  • the base station may configure the UE with a CSI-RS resource set and CSI reports using RRC signaling.
  • the CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating, for example, up to 32 antenna ports.
  • the UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a control resource set (CORESET) when the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially GCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET.
  • the UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks when the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.
  • Downlink DMRSs may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for channel estimation.
  • the downlink DMRS may be used for coherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH).
  • An NR network may support one or more variable and/or configurable DMRS patterns for data demodulation.
  • At least one downlink DMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern.
  • a front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols).
  • a base station may semi- statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. a maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for PDSCH.
  • a DMRS configuration may support one or more DMRS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to eight orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. For multiuser-MI MO, a DMRS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE.
  • a radio network may support (e.g., at least for CP-OFDM) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different.
  • the base station may transmit a downlink DMRS and a corresponding PDSCH using the same precoding matrix.
  • the UE may use the one or more downlink DMRSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimation of the PDSCH.
  • a transmitter may use a precoder matrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth.
  • the transmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precoder matrix for a second bandwidth.
  • the first precoder matrix and the second precoder matrix may be different based on the first bandwidth being different from the second bandwidth.
  • the UE may assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs.
  • the set of PRBs may be denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG).
  • PRG precoding resource block group
  • a PDSCH may comprise one or more layers.
  • the UE may assume that at least one symbol with DMRS is present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PDSCH.
  • a higher layer may configure up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH.
  • Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for phase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis using a combination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MOS.
  • An NR network may support a plurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequency domains.
  • a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth.
  • the UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port.
  • a number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource.
  • Downlink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.
  • Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted on symbols to facilitate phase tracking at the receiver.
  • the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS to a base station for channel estimation.
  • the base station may use the uplink DMRS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels.
  • the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH.
  • the uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to a range of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel.
  • the base station may configure the UE with one or more uplink DMRS configurations. At least one DMRS configuration may support a front- loaded DMRS pattern.
  • the front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols).
  • One or more uplink DMRSs may be configured to transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the UE may use to schedule a single-symbol DMRS and/or a double-symbol DMRS.
  • An NR network may support (e.g., for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM)) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DMRS may be the same or different.
  • CP-OFDM cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • a PUSCH may comprise one or more layers, and the UE may transmit at least one symbol with DMRS present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PUSCH.
  • a higher layer may configure up to three DMRSs for the PUSCH.
  • Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for phase tracking and/or phase-noise compensation) may or may not be present depending on an RRC configuration of the UE.
  • the presence and/or pattern of uplink PT- RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis by a combination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI.
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS.
  • a radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain.
  • a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth.
  • the UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port.
  • a number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource.
  • uplink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.
  • SRS may be transmitted by a UE to a base station for channel state estimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or link adaptation.
  • SRS transmitted by the UE may allow a base station to estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies.
  • a scheduler at the base station may employ the estimated uplink channel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission from the UE.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configure the UE with one or more SRS resources.
  • An SRS resource set applicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter.
  • an SRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets may be transmitted at a time instant (e.g., simultaneously).
  • the UE may transmit one or more SRS resources in SRS resource sets.
  • An NR network may support aperiodic, periodic and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions.
  • the UE may transmit SRS resources based on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or more trigger types may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DOI formats.
  • At least one DOI format may be employed for the UE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resource sets.
  • An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higher layer signaling.
  • An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or more DOI formats.
  • the UE when PUSCH and SRS are transmitted in a same slot, the UE may be configured to transmit SRS after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DMRS.
  • the base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, minislot, and/or subframe level periodicity; offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hopping bandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.
  • SRS resource configuration identifier e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS
  • slot, minislot, and/or subframe level periodicity e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS
  • An antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. If a first symbol and a second symbol are transmitted on the same antenna port, the receiver may infer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel for conveying the first symbol on the antenna port.
  • the channel e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like
  • a first antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasi colocated (QCLed) if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed.
  • the one or more large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an average gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.
  • Beam management may comprise beam measurement, beam selection, and beam indication.
  • a beam may be associated with one or more reference signals. For example, a beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals.
  • the UE may perform downlink beam measurement based on downlink reference signals (e.g., a channel state information reference signal (OS l-RS)) and generate a beam measurement report.
  • the UE may perform the downlink beam measurement procedure after an RRC connection is set up with a base station.
  • FIG. 11B illustrates an example of channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) that are mapped in the time and frequency domains. A square shown in FIG. 11 B may span a resource block (RB) within a bandwidth of a cell.
  • CSI-RSs channel state information reference signals
  • a base station may transmit one or more RRC messages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicating one or more CSI-RSs.
  • One or more of the following parameters may be configured by higher layer signaling (e.g. , RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RS resource configuration: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symbol and resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g., subframe location, offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g., QCL-scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn- subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid,
  • the three beams illustrated in FIG. 11 B may be configured for a UE in a UE-specific configuration. Three beams are illustrated in FIG. 11 B (beam #1 , beam #2, and beam #3), more or fewer beams may be configured.
  • Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol.
  • Beam #2 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a second symbol.
  • Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a third symbol.
  • a base station may use other subcarriers in a same RB (for example, those that are not used to transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another UE.
  • FDM frequency division multiplexing
  • TDM time domain multiplexing
  • CSI-RSs such as those illustrated in FIG. 11 B (e.g., CSI-RS 1101, 1102, 1103) may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE for one or more measurements.
  • the UE may measure a reference signal received power (RSRP) of configured CSI-RS resources.
  • the base station may configure the UE with a reporting configuration and the UE may report the RSRP measurements to a network (for example, via one or more base stations) based on the reporting configuration.
  • the base station may determine, based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of reference signals.
  • TCI transmission configuration indication
  • the base station may indicate one or more TCI states to the UE (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI).
  • the UE may receive a downlink transmission with a receive (Rx) beam determined based on the one or more TCI states.
  • the UE may or may not have a capability of beam correspondence. If the UE has the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam. If the UE does not have the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam.
  • the UE may perform the uplink beam selection procedure based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resources configured to the UE by the base station.
  • the base station may select and indicate uplink beams for the UE based on measurements of the one or more SRS resources transmitted by the UE.
  • a UE may assess (e.g. , measure) a channel quality of one or more beam pair links, a beam pair link comprising a transmitting beam transmitted by a base station and a receiving beam received by the UE.
  • the UE may transmit a beam measurement report indicating one or more beam pair quality parameters comprising, e.g., one or more beam identifications (e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (Rl).
  • beam identifications e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like
  • PMI precoding matrix indicator
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • Rl rank indicator
  • Procedure P1 may enable a UE measurement on transmit (Tx) beams of a transmission reception point (TRP) (or multiple TRPs), e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beams and/or UE Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of P1).
  • Beamforming at a TRP may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Beamforming at a UE may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Procedure P2 may be used to enable a UE measurement on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • the UE and/or the base station may perform procedure P2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1 , or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement.
  • the UE may perform procedure P3 for Rx beam determination by using the same Tx beam at the base station and sweeping an Rx beam at the UE.
  • FIG. 12B illustrates examples of three uplink beam management procedures: U1, U2, and U3.
  • Procedure U1 may be used to enable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a UE, e.g., to support a selection of one or more UE Tx beams and/or base station Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of U1).
  • Beamforming at the UE may include, e.g., a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown in the bottom rows of U1 and U3 as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Beamforming at the base station may include, e.g., an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow).
  • Procedure U2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam when the UE uses a fixed Tx beam.
  • the UE and/or the base station may perform procedure U2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement
  • the UE may perform procedure U3 to adjust its Tx beam when the base station uses a fixed Rx beam.
  • a UE may initiate a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure based on detecting a beam failure.
  • the UE may transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, a UCI, an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like) based on the initiating of the BFR procedure.
  • the UE may detect the beam failure based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of an associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an error rate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower than a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or the like).
  • the UE may measure a quality of a beam pair link using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one or more SS/PBCH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more demodulation reference signals (DMRSs).
  • RSs reference signals
  • a quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of a block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) value, a reference signal received quality (RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources.
  • BLER block error rate
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • RSRQ reference signal received quality
  • the base station may indicate that an RS resource is quasi co-located (QCLed) with one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g., a control channel, a shared data channel, and/or the like).
  • the RS resource and the one or more DMRSs of the channel may be QCLed when the channel characteristics (e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RS resource to the UE are similar or the same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via the channel to the UE.
  • the channel characteristics e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like
  • a network e.g., a gNB and/or an ng-eNB of a network
  • the UE may initiate a random access procedure.
  • a UE in an RRC_I DLE state and/or an RRC_I NACTI VE state may initiate the random access procedure to request a connection setup to a network.
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure from an RRC_CONNECTED state.
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplink transmission of an SR when there is no PUCCH resource available) and/or acquire uplink timing (e.g., when uplink synchronization status is non-synchronized).
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure to request one or more system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g., other system information such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like).
  • SIBs system information blocks
  • the UE may initiate the random access procedure for a beam failure recovery request.
  • a network may initiate a random access procedure for a handover and/or for establishing time alignment for an SCell addition.
  • FIG. 13A illustrates a four-step contention-based random access procedure.
  • a base station may transmit a configuration message 1310 to the UE.
  • the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A comprises transmission of four messages: a Msg 1 1311, a Msg 2 1312, a Msg 31313, and a Msg 41314.
  • the Msg 1 1311 may include and/or be referred to as a preamble (or a random access preamble).
  • the Msg 2 1312 may include and/or be referred to as a random access response (RAR).
  • RAR random access response
  • the configuration message 1310 may be transmitted, for example, using one or more RRC messages.
  • the one or more RRC messages may indicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the UE.
  • RACH parameters may comprise at least one of following: general parameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g., RACH-configGeneral ⁇ ; cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon'); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated ⁇ .
  • the base station may broadcast or multicast the one or more RRC messages to one or more UEs.
  • the one or more RRC messages may be UE-specific (e.g., dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a UE in an RRC_CONNECTED state and/or in an RRCJNACTIVE state).
  • the UE may determine, based on the one or more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit power for transmission of the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313.
  • the UE may determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the Msg 2 1312 and the Msg 41314.
  • the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the Msg 1 1311.
  • the one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g. , prach-Configlndex).
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals.
  • the one or more reference signals may be SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSI-RSs.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks.
  • the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of Msg 1 1311 and/or Msg 3 1313.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g., a received target power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission).
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313; and/or a power offset value between preamble groups.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds based on which the UE may determine at least one reference signal (e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).
  • at least one reference signal e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS
  • an uplink carrier e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier.
  • the Msg 1 1311 may include one or more preamble transmissions (e.g., a preamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions).
  • An RRC message may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and/or group B).
  • a preamble group may comprise one or more preambles.
  • the UE may determine the preamble group based on a pathloss measurement and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313.
  • the UE may measure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRP threshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS).
  • the UE may select at least one preamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if the association between the one or more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured by an RRC message.
  • the UE may determine the preamble based on the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310. For example, the UE may determine the preamble based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRP measurement, and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313.
  • the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximum number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds for determining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B).
  • a base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the UE with an association between one or more preambles and one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs).
  • the UE may determine the preamble to include in Msg 1 1311 based on the association.
  • the Msg 1 1311 may be transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions.
  • the UE may use one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion.
  • One or more RACH parameters e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMsklndex and/or ra-OccasionList
  • the UE may perform a preamble retransmission if no response is received following a preamble transmission.
  • the UE may increase an uplink transmit power for the preamble retransmission.
  • the UE may select an initial preamble transmit power based on a pathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble power configured by the network.
  • the UE may determine to retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power.
  • the UE may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g., PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMP/NG_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preamble retransmission.
  • the ramping step may be an amount of incremental increase in uplink transmit power for a retransmission.
  • the UE may ramp up the uplink transmit power if the UE determines a reference signal (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preamble transmission.
  • the UE may count a number of preamble transmissions and/or retransmissions (e.g., PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER).
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure completed unsuccessfully, for example, if the number of preamble transmissions exceeds a threshold configured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax).
  • the Msg 2 1312 received by the UE may include an RAR.
  • the Msg 21312 may include multiple RARs corresponding to multiple UEs.
  • the Msg 2 1312 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 1 1311.
  • the Msg 2 1312 may be scheduled on the DL-SCH and indicated on a PDCCH using a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI).
  • RA-RNTI random access RNTI
  • the Msg 21312 may indicate that the Msg 1 1311 was received by the base station.
  • the Msg 2 1312 may include a time-alignment command that may be used by the UE to adjust the UE’s transmission timing, a scheduling grant for transmission of the Msg 3 1313, and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI).
  • TC-RNTI Temporary Cell RNTI
  • the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the Msg 2 1312.
  • the UE may determine when to start the time window based on a PRACH occasion that the UE uses to transmit the preamble.
  • the UE may start the time window one or more symbols after a last symbol of the preamble (e.g., at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preamble transmission).
  • the one or more symbols may be determined based on a numerology.
  • the PDCCH may be in a common search space (e.g., a Typel -PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message.
  • the UE may identify the RAR based on a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI). RNTIs may be used depending on one or more events initiating the random access procedure.
  • the UE may use random access RNTI (RA-RNTI).
  • the RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the UE transmits a preamble.
  • the UE may determine the RA-RNTI based on: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index; and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions.
  • RA-RNTI 1 +s_id + 14 x t_id + 14 x 80 x fjd + 14 x 80 x 8 x ul_carrier_id, where s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0 ⁇ s_id ⁇ 14), t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACH occasion in a system frame (e.g., 0 ⁇ t_id ⁇ 80), f_id may be an index of the PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0 ⁇ f_id ⁇ 8), and ul_carrier_id may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission (e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).
  • s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0 ⁇ s_i
  • the UE may transmit the Msg 3 1313 in response to a successful reception of the Msg 21312 (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 21312).
  • the Msg 3 1313 may be used for contention resolution in, for example, the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • a plurality of UEs may transmit a same preamble to a base station and the base station may provide an RAR that corresponds to a UE. Collisions may occur if the plurality of UEs interpret the RAR as corresponding to themselves.
  • Contention resolution (e.g., using the Msg 3 1313 and the Msg 41314) may be used to increase the likelihood that the UE does not incorrectly use an identity of another the UE.
  • the UE may include a device identifier in the Msg 3 1313 (e.g., a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC-RNTI included in the Msg 2 1312, and/or any other suitable identifier).
  • the Msg 41314 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 3 1313. If a C-RNTI was included in the Msg 3 1313, the base station will address the UE on the PDCCH using the C-RNTI. If the UE's unique C-RNTI is detected on the PDCCH, the random access procedure is determined to be successfully completed. If a TC-RNTI is included in the Msg 31313 (e.g., if the UE is in an RRC_IDLE state or not otherwise connected to the base station), Msg 41314 will be received using a DL-SCH associated with the TC-RNTI.
  • the UE may determine that the contention resolution is successful and/or the UE may determine that the random access procedure is successfully completed.
  • the UE may be configured with a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier and a normal uplink (NUL) carrier.
  • An initial access (e.g., random access procedure) may be supported in an uplink carrier.
  • a base station may configure the UE with two separate RACH configurations: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier.
  • the network may indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL).
  • the UE may determine the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals is lower than a broadcast threshold.
  • Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313) may remain on the selected carrier.
  • the UE may switch an uplink carrier during the random access procedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313) in one or more cases.
  • the UE may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313 based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., a listen- before-talk).
  • FIG. 13B illustrates a two-step contention-free random access procedure. Similar to the four-step contentionbased random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1320 to the UE.
  • the configuration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310.
  • the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg 1 1321 and a Msg 21322.
  • the Msg 1 1321 and the Msg 21322 may be analogous in some respects to the Msg 1 1311 and a Msg 21312 illustrated in FIG. 13A, respectively.
  • the contention- free random access procedure may not include messages analogous to the Msg 3 1313 and/or the Msg 41314.
  • the contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B may be initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, SCell addition, and/or handover.
  • a base station may indicate or assign to the UE the preamble to be used for the Msg 1 1321.
  • the UE may receive, from the base station via PDCCH and/or RRC, an indication of a preamble (e.g., ra-Preamblelndex).
  • the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR.
  • a time window e.g., ra-ResponseWindow
  • the base station may configure the UE with a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search space indicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceld).
  • the UE may monitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) on the search space.
  • C-RNTI Cell RNTI
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes after or in response to transmission of Msg 1 1321 and reception of a corresponding Msg 2 1322.
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI.
  • the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if the UE receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifier corresponding to a preamble transmitted by the UE and/or the RAR comprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier.
  • the UE may determine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SI request.
  • FIG. 13C illustrates another two-step random access procedure. Similar to the random access procedures illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1330 to the UE.
  • the configuration message 1330 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/or the configuration message 1320.
  • the procedure illustrated in FIG. 13C comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg A 1331 and a Msg B 1332.
  • Msg A 1331 may be transmitted in an uplink transmission by the UE.
  • Msg A 1331 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block 1342.
  • the transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • the transport block 1342 may comprise UCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like).
  • the UE may receive the Msg B 1332 after or in response to transmitting the Msg A 1331.
  • the Msg B 1332 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., an RAR) illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B and/or the Msg 41314 illustrated in FIG. 13A.
  • an RAR e.g., an RAR
  • the UE may initiate the two-step random access procedure in FIG. 130 for licensed spectrum and/or unlicensed spectrum.
  • the UE may determine, based on one or more factors, whether to initiate the two-step random access procedure.
  • the one or more factors may be: a radio access technology in use (e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the UE has valid TA or not; a cell size; the UE’s RRC state; a type of spectrum (e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors.
  • the UE may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters included in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 included in the Msg A 1331.
  • the RACH parameters may indicate a modulation and coding schemes (MCS), a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342.
  • MCS modulation and coding schemes
  • a time-frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 e.g., a PRACH
  • a time-frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342 e.g., a PUSCH
  • FDM FDM
  • TDM Time Division Multiple Access
  • CDM Code Division Multiple Access
  • the RACH parameters may enable the UE to determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving Msg B 1332.
  • the transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data), an identifier of the UE, security information, and/or device information (e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (I MSI)).
  • I MSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • the base station may transmit the Msg B 1332 as a response to the Msg A 1331.
  • the Msg B 1332 may comprise at least one of following: a preamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplink grant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MOS); a UE identifier for contention resolution; and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI).
  • the UE may determine that the two-step random access procedure is successfully completed if: a preamble identifier in the Msg B 1332 is matched to a preamble transmitted by the UE; and/or the identifier of the UE in Msg B 1332 is matched to the identifier of the UE in the Msg A 1331 (e.g., the transport block 1342).
  • a UE and a base station may exchange control signaling.
  • the control signaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g., layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g., layer 2).
  • the control signaling may comprise downlink control signaling transmitted from the base station to the UE and/or uplink control signaling transmitted from the UE to the base station.
  • the downlink control signaling may comprise: a downlink scheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resources and/or a transport format; a slot format information; a preemption indication; a power control command; and/or any other suitable signaling.
  • the UE may receive the downlink control signaling in a payload transmitted by the base station on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • the payload transmitted on the PDCCH may be referred to as downlink control information (DOI).
  • the PDCCH may be a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of UEs.
  • a base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC) parity bits to a DCI in order to facilitate detection of transmission errors.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the base station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of the UE (or an identifier of the group of the UEs). Scrambling the CRC parity bits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusive OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits.
  • the identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI).
  • RNTI radio network temporary identifier
  • DCIs may be used for different purposes.
  • a purpose may be indicated by the type of RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI may indicate paging information and/or a system information change notification.
  • the P-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the system information.
  • SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI may indicate a random access response (RAR).
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cell RNTI may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access.
  • a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A).
  • RNTIs configured to the UE by a base station may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI), and/or the like.
  • CS-RNTI Configured Scheduling RNTI
  • TPC-PUCCH-RNTI Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI
  • TPC-SRS-RNTI Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI
  • INT-RNTI Interruption RNTI
  • the base station may transmit the DCIs with one or more DCI formats.
  • DCI format 0_0 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell.
  • DCI format 0_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g. , with compact DCI payloads).
  • DCI format 0_1 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 0_0).
  • DCI format 1_0 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell.
  • DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads).
  • DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0).
  • DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a group of UEs.
  • DCI format 2_1 may be used for notifying a group of UEs of a physical resource block and/or OFDM symbol where the UE may assume no transmission is intended to the UE.
  • DCI format 2_2 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH or PUSCH.
  • DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs.
  • DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined in future releases.
  • DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size.
  • the base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation.
  • channel coding e.g., polar coding
  • a base station may map the coded and modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH.
  • the base station may transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs).
  • the number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregation level) may be 1 , 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number.
  • a CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs).
  • REG may comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol.
  • the mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping).
  • FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part.
  • the base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH on one or more control resource sets (CORESETs).
  • a CORESET may comprise a timefrequency resource in which the UE tries to decode a DCI using one or more search spaces.
  • the base station may configure a CORESET in the time-frequency domain.
  • a first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 occur at the first symbol in a slot.
  • the first CORESET 1401 overlaps with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain.
  • a third CORESET 1403 occurs at a third symbol in the slot.
  • a fourth CORESET 1404 occurs at the seventh symbol in the slot.
  • FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.
  • the CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interference coordination and/or frequency- selective transmission of control channels).
  • the base station may perform different or same CCE-to-REG mapping on different CORESETs.
  • a CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping by RRC configuration.
  • a CORESET may be configured with an antenna port quasi co-location (QCL) parameter.
  • the antenna port QCL parameter may indicate QCL information of a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) for PDCCH reception in the CORESET.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the base station may transmit, to the UE, RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more search space sets.
  • the configuration parameters may indicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET.
  • a search space set may comprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs at a given aggregation level.
  • the configuration parameters may indicate: a number of PDCCH candidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoring periodicity and a PDCCH monitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats to be monitored by the UE; and/or whether a search space set is a common search space set or a UE- specific search space set.
  • a set of CCEs in the common search space set may be predefined and known to the UE.
  • a set of CCEs in the UE-specific search space set may be configured based on the UE’s identity (e.g., C-RNTI).
  • the UE may determine a time-frequency resource for a CORESET based on RRC messages.
  • the UE may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET based on configuration parameters of the CORESET.
  • the UE may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space sets configured on the CORESET based on the RRC messages.
  • the UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configuration parameters of a search space set.
  • the UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs.
  • Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats.
  • Monitoring may comprise decoding a DCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats (e.g., number of CCEs, number of PDCCH candidates in common search spaces, and/or number of PDCCH candidates in the UE-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats.
  • the decoding may be referred to as blind decoding.
  • the UE may determine a DCI as valid for the UE, in response to CRC checking (e.g., scrambled bits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching a RNTI value).
  • the UE may process information contained in the DCI (e.g., a scheduling assignment, an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlink preemption, and/or the like).
  • the UE may transmit uplink control signaling (e.g., uplink control information (UCI)) to a base station.
  • the uplink control signaling may comprise hybrid automatic repeat request (HARO) acknowledgements for received DL- SCH transport blocks.
  • the UE may transmit the HARO acknowledgements after receiving a DL-SCH transport block.
  • Uplink control signaling may comprise channel state information (CSI) indicating channel quality of a physical downlink channel.
  • CSI channel state information
  • the UE may transmit the CSI to the base station.
  • the base station based on the received CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g., comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for a downlink transmission.
  • Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR).
  • SR scheduling requests
  • the UE may transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is available for transmission to the base station.
  • the UE may transmit a UCI (e.g., HARO acknowledgements (HARG-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
  • the UE may transmit the uplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats.
  • PUCCH format 0 may have a length of one or two OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits.
  • the UE may transmit UCI in a PUCCH resource using PUCCH format 0 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK information bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is one or two.
  • PUCCH format 1 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits.
  • the UE may use PUCCH format 1 if the transmission is four or more symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two.
  • PUCCH format 2 may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits.
  • the UE may use PUCCH format 2 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of UCI bits is two or more.
  • PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits.
  • the UE may use PUCCH format 3 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and PUCCH resource does not include an orthogonal cover code.
  • PUCCH format 4 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 4 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and the PUCCH resource includes an orthogonal cover code.
  • the base station may transmit configuration parameters to the UE for a plurality of PUCCH resource sets using, for example, an RRC message.
  • the plurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g., up to four sets) may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell.
  • a PUCCH resource set may be configured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCH resources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resource identifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximum number) of UCI information bits the UE may transmit using one of the plurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set.
  • a PUCCH resource identifier e.g., pucch-Resourceid
  • the UE may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resource sets based on a total bit length of the UCI information bits (e.g., HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI). If the total bit length of UCI information bits is two or fewer, the UE may select a first PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than or equal to a first configured value, the UE may select a second PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “1”.
  • a total bit length of the UCI information bits e.g., HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI.
  • the UE may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the second configured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406), the UE may select a fourth PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3”.
  • the UE may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCH resource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission.
  • the UE may determine the PUCCH resource based on a PUCCH resource indicator in a DCI (e.g., with a DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on a PDCCH.
  • a three-bit PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of eight PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device 1502 in communication with a base station 1504 in accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the wireless device 1502 and base station 1504 may be part of a mobile communication network, such as the mobile communication network 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 A, the mobile communication network 150 illustrated in FIG. 1 B, or any other communication network. Only one wireless device 1502 and one base station 1504 are illustrated in FIG. 15, but it will be understood that a mobile communication network may include more than one UE and/or more than one base station, with the same or similar configuration as those shown in FIG. 15.
  • the base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a core network (not shown) through radio communications over the air interface (or radio interface) 1506.
  • the communication direction from the base station 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 is known as the downlink, and the communication direction from the wireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface is known as the uplink.
  • Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
  • data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from the base station 1504 may be provided to the processing system 1508 of the base station 1504.
  • the data may be provided to the processing system 1508 by, for example, a core network.
  • data to be sent to the base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided to the processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502.
  • the processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 and layer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission.
  • Layer 2 may include an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer, for example, with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.
  • Layer 3 may include an RRC layer as with respect to FIG. 2B.
  • the data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1510 of base station 1504.
  • the data to be sent to base station 1504 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wireless device 1502.
  • the transmission processing system 1510 and the transmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality.
  • Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.
  • the PHY layer may perform, for example, forward error correction coding of transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels to physical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like.
  • a reception processing system 1512 may receive the uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502.
  • a reception processing system 1522 may receive the downlink transmission from base station 1504.
  • the reception processing system 1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality.
  • Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A.
  • a wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 may include multiple antennas.
  • the multiple antennas may be used to perform one or more Ml MO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g., single-user MIMO or multi-user MIMO), transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming.
  • the wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a single antenna.
  • the processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 maybe associated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively.
  • Memory 1514 and memory 1524 may store computer program instructions or code that may be executed by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 to carry out one or more of the functionalities discussed in the present application.
  • the transmission processing system 1510, the transmission processing system 1520, the reception processing system 1512, and/or the reception processing system 1522 may be coupled to a memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that may be executed to carry out one or more of their respective functionalities.
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may comprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors.
  • the one or more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, for example, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least one of signal coding/processing, data processing, power control, input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enable the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 to operate in a wireless environment.
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to one or more peripherals 1516 and one or more peripherals 1526, respectively.
  • the one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or more peripherals 1526 may include software and/or hardware that provide features and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, a keypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, an electronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or more sensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a radar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a camera, and/or the like).
  • sensors e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may receive user input data from and/or provide user output data to the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526.
  • the processing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power to the other components in the wireless device 1502.
  • the power source may comprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof.
  • the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to a GPS chipset 1517 and a GPS chipset 1527, respectively.
  • FIG. 16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission.
  • a baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel may perform one or more functions.
  • the one or more functions may comprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) or CP- OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like.
  • SC-FDMA Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • FIG. 16A When transform precoding is enabled, a SC-FDMA signal for uplink transmission may be generated.
  • FIG. 16B illustrates an example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency.
  • the baseband signal may be a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • FIG. 16C illustrates an example structure for downlink transmissions.
  • a baseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may perform one or more functions.
  • the one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complexvalued modulation symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generation of complex-valued timedomain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like.
  • These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments.
  • FIG. 16D illustrates another example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency.
  • the baseband signal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
  • a wireless device may receive from a base station one or more messages (e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells (e.g. primary cell, secondary cell).
  • the wireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g. two or more base stations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality of cells.
  • the one or more messages (e.g. as a part of the configuration parameters) may comprise parameters of physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers for configuring the wireless device.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise parameters for configuring physical and MAC layer channels, bearers, etc.
  • the configuration parameters may comprise parameters indicating values of timers for physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels.
  • a timer may begin running once it is started and continue running until it is stopped or until it expires.
  • a timer may be started if it is not running or restarted if it is running.
  • a timer may be associated with a value (e.g. the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire once it reaches the value).
  • the duration of a timer may not be updated until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g., due to BWP switching).
  • a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for a process.
  • a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for the procedure.
  • a random access response window timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving a random access response.
  • the time difference between two time stamps may be used.
  • a timer is restarted, a process for measurement of time window may be restarted.
  • Other example implementations may be provided to restart a measurement of a time window.
  • a UE may access a cell, as part of the frequency spectrum, for wireless communications.
  • the UE may receive broadcast signals comprising access information of the cell, e.g., synchronization signal block(s) (SSB) and/or system information block (SIB, e.g., SIB1).
  • a cell e.g., a serving cell, may be associated with one or more SSBs.
  • the SIB1 e.g., transmitted by one or more SSBs
  • a serving cell may comprise a downlink (DL) carrier and one or more uplink (UL) carriers (e.g., (normal) UL and/or supplementary UL).
  • the serving cell configuration comprises downlink configuration of the DL carrier (e.g., via downlinkConfigOommon and/or downlinkConfigOommonSIB) and/or uplink configuration of the one or more UL carriers (e.g., uplinkConfigOommon and/or uplinkConfigOommonSIB) of the cell.
  • a carrier may be referred to as a component carrier.
  • uplink may refer to communication directed from mobile/wireless device to base station/network
  • downlink may refer to communication directed from base station/network to mobile/wireless device/UE.
  • the downlink configuration may indicate basic parameters of a DL carrier and transmission thereon, comprising frequency information of the DL carrier.
  • the frequency information of the DL carrier may indicate a list one or more frequency bands to which the DL carrier belongs (e.g., via frequencyBandList); an offset of the DL carrier to Point A (offsetToPointA); and/or a set of carriers for different subcarrier spacings (SOS, numerologies) that are used in the DL BWPs in the serving cell.
  • Multiple bands may be defined, e.g., for 5G and/or 6G, each with a respective center frequency.
  • Each band e.g., n1, n2, .... n25, n26, ...
  • ,n99 in FR1, and n257, n258, .... n262 in FR2) may be defined with a duplex mode (TDD and/or FDD), a range of frequencies for uplink and downlink, and a allowed channels bandwidths (e.g., 5MHz, 10 MHz, .... 50 MHz, 200 MHz, 400 MHz).
  • a frequency band may be/comprise a range of frequencies in a spectrum between two limits used in telecommunications.
  • a frequency band may be a range of frequencies defined and dedicated to a particular type of service or radio technology.
  • Frequency bands for 5G New Radio (5G NR) may be separated into two different frequency ranges.
  • the other is Frequency Range 2 (FR2), which includes frequency bands from 24.25 GHz to 52.6 GHz.
  • frequency bands may be defined for FR3 (e.g., above 72 GHz).
  • the DL carrier may comprise one or more DL bandwidth parts (BWPs). Each DL BWP may comprise a part of the frequency resources of the DL carrier.
  • a DL BWP configuration may indicate a frequency domain location and bandwidth of this BWP; and a SOS to be used in the BWP for (all) channels and (reference) signals.
  • the uplink configuration may indicate basic parameters of an UL carrier (e.g., NUL carrier and/or SUL carrier) and transmission thereon, comprising frequency information of the UL carrier.
  • the frequency information of the UL carrier may indicate a list one or more frequency bands to which the UL carrier belongs (e.g., via frequencyBandList); an absolute frequency of the reference resource block (common RB 0, e.g., via absoluteFreq uencyPointA, its lowest subcarrier may be referred to as Point A); and/or a set of carriers for different subcarrier spacings (SOS, numerologies) that are used in the UL BWPs in the serving cell and/or UL carrier.
  • SOS subcarrier spacings
  • An UL carrier (e.g., NUL carrier and/or SUL carrier) may comprise one or more UL bandwidth parts (BWPs). Each UL BWP may comprise a part of the frequency resources of the UL carrier.
  • An UL BWP configuration may indicate a frequency domain location and bandwidth of this BWP; and a SOS to be used in the BWP for (all) channels and (reference) signals.
  • An architectural consideration is the dual connectivity (DC) operation involving a first RAT (e.g., enhanced Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and a second RAT (e.g., NR).
  • E-UTRA enhanced Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
  • NR e.g., NR
  • the E-UTRA is the master.
  • NR is the master.
  • the dual connectivity operation involving only NR serving cells e.g., NR primary cell (PCell) and NR PSCells
  • PCell NR primary cell
  • NR PSCells NR primary cell
  • a standalone deployments of a first RAT may be single or multi-carrier (e.g.,
  • NR carrier aggregation, CA or dual connectivity with NR PCell and NR PSCell.
  • the non-standalone (NSA) deployment of a first RAT refers to a dual connectivity (DC) deployment involving a second RAT (e.g., E-UTRA), e.g., where there is Long Term Evolution (LTE) PCell and NR PSCell (there may also be one or more LTE SCells and one or more NR SCell).
  • LTE PCell and NR PSCell are configured in master cell group (MCG) and secondary cell group (SCG) respectively.
  • MSG and SCG are more generally called cell groups (CG).
  • the MCG and SCG may be configured with one or more additional serving cells, e.g., one or more LTE secondary cells (SCells) in MCG and one or more SCells in SCG.
  • Carrier Aggregation is generally used in an RAT (e.g., NR and LTE systems) to improve communication device transmit/receive data rates.
  • CA Carrier Aggregation
  • the UE typically operates initially on a single serving cell called a primary cell (Pcell).
  • the Pcell is operated on a component carrier in a frequency band.
  • the UE is then configured by the network with one or more secondary serving cells (Scell(s)).
  • Scell can correspond to a component carrier (CC) in the same frequency band (intra-band CA) or different frequency band (inter- band CA) from the frequency band of the CC corresponding to the Pcell.
  • CC component carrier
  • intra-band CA intra-band CA
  • inter- band CA inter- band
  • the Scell(s) may need to be activated by the network.
  • the Scell(s) can also be deactivated and later reactivated as needed via activation/deactivation signaling.
  • UE can be configured with carrier aggregation to aggregate Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) carriers, Time Division Duplex (TDD) carriers or both FDD and TDD carriers.
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UE can indicate via capability its carrier aggregation capability, including whether it supports CA on the downlink and whether it supports CA on the uplink.
  • a wireless system may incorporate multiple uplink enhancement technologies.
  • 3GPP 5G NR Rel. 15 EUTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC); Uplink carrier aggregation (CA); and Supplementary uplink (SUL).
  • EN-DC EUTRA-NR Dual Connectivity
  • CA Uplink carrier aggregation
  • SUL Supplementary uplink
  • a UE may be configured with a first carrier (e.g., LTE carrier, and/or SUL carrier) in a lower frequency band (e.g., FDD band), and a second carrier (e.g., NR carrier, and/or NUL carrier) in a higher frequency band (e.g., TDD band).
  • the carrier in the lower frequency band may have a larger coverage area.
  • the carrier in the higher frequency may have a smaller coverage area.
  • the UE can transmit data either under the first carrier coverage (i.e., the carrier in the lower frequency band with larger coverage), or under both the first carrier and the second carrier coverage (i.e., the carrier in the higher frequency with smaller coverage). Therefore, the coverage problem of users at the edge of the cell can be resolved.
  • Tx 2 transmission channels
  • one Tx of the UE’s transmitter can be used for the first carrier (e.g., LTE carrier, and/or the first NR carrier, and/or the SUL carrier), and the other Tx of the UE’s transmitter can be used for the second carrier (e.g., the 5G NR carrier, and/or the second NR carrier, and/or the NUL carrier).
  • the first carrier e.g., LTE carrier, and/or the first NR carrier, and/or the SUL carrier
  • the second carrier e.g., the 5G NR carrier, and/or the second NR carrier, and/or the NUL carrier
  • FIG. 17A shows an example application scenario of EN-DC deployment.
  • the difference between 4G coverage and 5G coverage is shown in the figure.
  • UE capable of EN-DC may transmit data by 4G and/or 5G network.
  • 2Tx 2 transmission channels
  • one Tx may be used for 4G and the other for 5G NR.
  • area B because there is 4G coverage, UE may transmit data via 4G network, e.g., not via 5G network.
  • FIG. 17B shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in Area A and Area B according to FIG. 17A.
  • Mobile devices supporting EN-DC will have two concurrent radio connections to the Evolved Packet Core (EPC), one of which is via 5G NR and the other via LTE.
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • the uplink dual-stream capability of 5G NR is limited, which means peak uplink data throughput is, for example, 74% of what can be achieved in 5G SA.
  • NSA non-stand-alone
  • 5G uplink throughput is improved compared to 4G, yet still lower than 5G stand-alone (SA).
  • FIG. 18A shows an example application scenario of UL inter-band GA.
  • area A with coverage of NR Carrier 1 and NR Carrier 2, UL CA can be activated.
  • area B with the coverage of one carrier, UE uses one carrier to transmit data.
  • Inter-band carrier aggregation aggregates the carriers of different operating bands.
  • 3GPP may be compatible with 13 Inter-band CA operating bands involving FR1, such as CA_n3-n78, CA_n28-n78, etc.
  • uplink CA can be used to improve spectrum utilization.
  • 2Tx two transmission channels are to support two carriers respectively, so UL CA will restrain the uplink dual-stream capability on TDD-NR which may result in capacity loss.
  • FIG. 18B shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in area A and area B according to FIG. 18A.
  • FDD-NR usually adopts medium- or low-range bands offering better uplink coverage than TDD-NR. Therefore, FDD-NR can be used to provide 5G services beyond the TDD-NR coverage area to improve user experience. For example, when the uplink data rate at cell edge is 2Mbps, if FDD-NR 2.1 GHz (20 MHz bandwidth) and TDD-NR 3.5 GHz (100 MHz bandwidth) are aggregated, the coverage can be improved by 17.8% compared with SA-based TDD-NR single carrier. Since UL inter-band CA cannot use uplink dual streams, it may have a negative impact on capacity.
  • the uplink peak data rate of a single user drops to 80% of that with 3.5 GHz in SA mode.
  • g N B will NOT activate uplink CA but single-carrier mode to maximize the resource utilization. It may be clarified that NOT in all scenarios will UL CA have the negative impact on capacity.
  • the single user’s uplink throughput of CA is directly related to the bandwidth and uplink duty ratio (of TDD-NR carrier) of the two aggregated component carriers (CC1 and CC2).
  • CC1 is a TDD-NR carrier (bandwidth of 50 MHz and 2.5 ms dual-period frame structure)
  • CC2 is an FDD-NR carrier (bandwidth of 20 MHz).
  • the uplink peak throughput of UL CA is increased by about 8% compared to that of TDD-NR single-carrier of dual-stream.
  • CA technology was introduced from the 4G era and has been successfully deployed and commercialized worldwide.
  • NR CA has been included since 3GPP Rel-15.
  • Intra-band CA can aggregate multiple frequency carriers of the same band and improve user experience.
  • the throughput of inter-band CA can be limited in some cases by the number of transmission channels of terminals.
  • FIG. 19A shows an example of supplementary uplink coverage.
  • Supplementary uplink is introduced to extend the uplink coverage by providing a supplementary uplink (usually in sub-3 GHz band).
  • a supplementary uplink usually in sub-3 GHz band.
  • NR frequency band a DL frequency band
  • two uplink frequency bands one NR frequency band and one SUL frequency band
  • UE uses the NR carrier to send and receive data.
  • UE uses the SUL carrier for transmitting data.
  • UE can dynamically select the UL NR or SUL for data transmission, but cannot use the two carriers at the same time.
  • the uplink operating bands of SULs are defined similarly to those of the corresponding FDD- LTE/FDD-NR operating bands, and need to be shared with the existing network (4G or 5G).
  • the SUL bands may involve uplink, so it cannot be used alone.
  • 3GPP is compatible with the 8 combinations of SUL and NR bands, including the combined definition of n78, n79 and SUL bands.
  • FIG. 19B shows an example application scenario of SUL. In Area A, with the good coverage of TDD-NR, UE uses TDD-NR for data transmitting. In Area B, beyond the uplink coverage of TDD-NR, UE switches to the SUL band for data sending.
  • FIG. 190 shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in Area A and Area B according to FIG. 19B.
  • SUL may be implemented at sub-3 GHz bands with better uplink coverage than TDD-NR bands, therefore may improve user experience. For example, in dense urban areas where cell edge uplink data rate is 2Mbps, if SUL 2.1 GHz (bandwidth of 20 MHz) and TDD-NR 3.5 GHz (bandwidth of 100 MHz) are deployed for networking, the network coverage can be increase by 17.8% compared to that of TDD-NR single-carrier and SA architecture. In TDD-NR coverage areas, TDD-NR will be used to send and receive data, so SUL will NOT influence the single user’s peak throughput.
  • SUL The downside of SUL is that it makes general 5G NR bands and SUL bands more dependent on one another since they have to be in the same cell, which limits its applicability.
  • SUL technology improves the uplink coverage by using sub-3 GHz bands for uplink transmission.
  • SUL defines new paired spectrum between TDD-NR and SUL and SUL is obtained by sharing the spectrum with 4G network. Therefore, 5G may be co-sited with 4G which limits the flexibility of 5G deployment and brings new problems to network deployment.
  • UL Tx Switching was introduced as a new feature to enhance EN-DC, UL GA, and SUL performance.
  • UL Tx switching can maximize uplink resource utilization with respect to UE’s capability. It uses one Tx channel either for carrier 1 or carrier 2, and uses the other Tx channel exclusively for carrier 2.
  • a transmitter (Tx) of a wireless device may have/comprise one or multiple (e.g., two) antennas/Tx chains.
  • the terms “antenna” and/or “Tx chain” may be interchangeable and/or may be used to refer to a physical antenna connector (e.g., of a respective antenna unit) of the UE that can integrate hardware and software to transmit/radiate/propagate a radio signal in the air directed as a particular beam.
  • an antenna may comprise an array/group of multiple antenna elements that generate a signal based on beamforming and/or MIMO/massive Ml MO.
  • Tx may be used interchangeably: Tx; antenna; transmit antenna; transmitter antenna; transmission antenna; Tx antenna; Tx antenna connector; transmit channel; Tx channel; transmission channel; transmit chain; Tx chain; Tx RF chain; transmission chain; antenna port; physical antenna port; uplink Tx; UL Tx chain; UL Tx antenna connector.
  • Tx may be used for short to refer to the above concept.
  • Antenna may comprise one or more RF components and/or antenna arrays, configured to send and/or receive wireless signals.
  • Antenna may be coupled to radio front end circuitry and may be any type of antenna capable of transmitting and/or receiving data and/or signals wirelessly.
  • antenna may comprise one or more omni-directional, sector or panel antennas operable to transmit/receive radio signals between, for example, 2 GHz and 66 GHz.
  • An omni directional antenna may be used to transmit/receive radio signals in any direction
  • a sector antenna may be used to transmit/receive radio signals from devices within a particular area
  • a panel antenna may be a line of sight antenna used to transm it/receive radio signals in a relatively straight line.
  • antenna may be separate from network node and may be connectable to network node through an interface or port.
  • RF interface may be configured to provide a communication interface to RF components such as a transmitter, a receiver, and an antenna.
  • AAS advanced antenna system
  • An AAS radio consists of an antenna array closely integrated with the hardware and software required for transmission and reception of radio signals, and signal processing algorithms to support the execution of the AAS features.
  • this solution provides much greater adaptivity and steerability, in terms of adapting the antenna radiation patterns to rapidly time-varying traffic and multi-path radio propagation conditions.
  • multiple signals may be simultaneously received or transmitted with different radiation patterns.
  • Multi-antenna techniques here referred to as AAS features, include beamforming and MIMO. Applying AAS features to an AAS radio results in significant performance gains because of the higher degrees of freedom provided by the larger number of radio chains, also referred to as Massive MIMO.
  • the UE may use multiple antennas to control the direction of a wave-front by appropriately weighting the magnitude and phase of individual antenna signals in an array of multiple antenna elements. That is, the same signal is sent from multiple antennas that have sufficient space between them (at least ! wavelength). In any given location, the receiver will thus receive multiple copies of the same signal. Depending on the location of the receiver, the signals may be in opposite phases, destructively averaging each other out, or constructively sum up if the different copies are in the same phase, or anything in between. By adjusting the phase and amplitude of the transmitted signals, constructive addition of the corresponding signals at the base station receiver can be achieved, which increases the received signal strength and thus the UE’s uplink throughput. The more antenna elements there are, the higher the gain.
  • digital beamforming also known as baseband beamforming or precoding
  • the signal is pre-coded (amplitude and phase modifications) in baseband processing before RF transmission. Multiple beams (one per each user) can be formed simultaneously from the same set of antenna elements.
  • analog beamforming the signal phases of individual antenna signals are adjusted in RF domain. Analog beamforming impacts the radiation pattern and gain of the antenna array, thus improves coverage. Unlike in digital beamforming, one beam per set of antenna elements can be formed.
  • MIMO Spatial multiplexing
  • the purpose of MIMO is to increase throughput. MIMO builds on the basic principle that when the received signal quality is high, it is better to receive multiple streams of data with reduced power per stream, than one stream with full power. The potential is large when the received signal quality is high and the streams do not interfere with each other. The potential diminishes when the mutual interference between streams increases. A number of layers/data streams that can be supported may be called “rank”. To distinguish between UL layers, a UE needs to have at least as many Tx antennas as there are layers, e.g., 2Tx to support 2-layer (or 2-port) transmissions.
  • An antenna port may be generally used as a generic term for signal transmission under identical channel conditions. For each operating mode for which an independent channel is assumed (e.g., S I SO vs. MIMO), a separate logical antenna port may be defined. Signals transmitted from different antennas ports may experience different “radio channels” even if the set of antennas are located at the same site. In some cases, it is important that transmissions share the same antenna port (e.g., quasi-collocated). OFDM symbols that are transmitted via identical antenna ports are subject to the same channel conditions. This helps the base station to estimate the channel using reference signals (e.g., DMRS) and use that information in decoding information content on physical channels (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH).
  • reference signals e.g., DMRS
  • an antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed.
  • MIMO takes advantage of this property (different radio channel) across different antenna ports to transmit multiple parallel streams of data. It is important to understand that antenna port is an abstract concept. There is a difference in logical 'antenna port’ and physical 'antenna element’. Specific transmissions use specific antenna ports and then those antenna ports are mapped onto one or more physical antenna elements.
  • FIG. 20 shows an example of wireless device transmitter antenna.
  • Logical antenna ports are mapped to physical antenna ports as shown in the figure.
  • the mapping of antenna port to physical antenna is controlled by beam forming, as a certain beam needs to transmit the signal on certain antenna ports to form a desired beam.
  • a UE may carry out a separate channel estimation for each antenna port. Separate reference signals that are suitable for estimating the respective channel may be defined for each antenna port.
  • the way in which these logical antenna ports are assigned to the physical transmit antennas of a UE may be up to the UE, and may vary between UEs of the same type (because of different operating conditions) and also between UEs from different manufacturers.
  • the UE may not explicitly notify the base station of the mapping that has been carried out, rather the base station may take this into account automatically during demodulation.
  • TDD time division duplex
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • Characteristics of a UE transmitter may be specified at the antenna connector of the UE with a single or multiple transmit antenna(s). For UE with integral antenna, a reference antenna with a gain of 0 d Bi may be assumed. Transmitter requirements for UL Ml MO operation may apply when the UE transmits on 2 ports on the same CDM group. The UE may use higher MPR (Allowed maximum power reduction) values outside this limitation.
  • transmitter power requirements may apply.
  • UE maximum output power shall be measured over all component carriers from different bands. If each band has separate antenna connectors, maximum output power is measured as the sum of maximum output power at each UE antenna connector. The period of measurement shall be at least one sub frame (1 ms).
  • a UE may reconfigure/retune some radio frequency (RF) hardware (and/or a Tx chain, e.g. , filters and/or duplexers) between two carriers, e.g., from a first carrier to a second carrier or vice versa.
  • RF radio frequency
  • This reconfiguration/retuning may be referred to as moving/switching a Tx chain between carriers.
  • UL Tx switching between two carriers comprises reconfiguring/retuning of an UL Tx chain/antenna from a center frequency of a first carrier to a center frequency of a second carrier (or vice versa).
  • Same UL Tx chain/antenna/antenna connector may be used for uplink transmissions via the first carrier (e.g., before switching) and the second carrier (e.g., after switching).
  • the UL Tx switching may be in response to receiving scheduling commands and/or TDD UL symbols/slots/subframes, thus, also called “dynamic UL Tx switching”.
  • Tx switching ; uplink switching; carrier switching; UL carrier switching; UL Tx switching; UL transmission switching; UL transmit channel switching; UL Tx chain switching; UL Tx antenna switching; Tx antenna switching; Dynamic UL Tx switching; transmit antenna switching; Tx antenna switching.
  • Switching period switching gap
  • uplink switching period UL switching gap
  • UL Tx switching period UL Tx switching gap
  • Tx switching period Tx switching gap
  • FIG. 21A shows an example of uplink Tx switching for a UE with 2Tx.
  • UL Tx switching may enable two operation modes: Mode 1 , where one Tx channel is used for 2.1 GHz carrier, and the other is used for 3.5 GHz carrier; and Mode 2, where one Tx channel is switched to 3.5 GHz, and the other is still used for 3.5 GHZ, which enables TDD-NR Dual-Stream transmission.
  • Uplink Tx Switching is used when switching between mode 1 and mode 2.
  • FIG. 21 B shows an example of transmission options for UL Tx switching as shown in FIG. 21 A.
  • Option 1 and Option 2 are further defined, as shown in the figure.
  • a UE may send data over carrier 1 and carrier 2 in time division mode (TDM), but not at the same time. This option may be referred to as “switched uplink”.
  • TDM time division mode
  • carrier 1 and carrier 2 may be flexibly aggregated, either in TDM mode or simultaneous transmission mode. This option may be referred to as “dual uplink”.
  • FIG. 22A shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in EN-DC scenario.
  • EN-DC Uplink Tx Switching
  • the Tx channels that originally supported LTE are switched to the TDD-NR frequency band, so that UE can use dual-stream in uplink, and in other time slots, the Tx are switched back to LTE.
  • UE can work in different modes as shown in FIG. 22A.
  • Uplink Tx Switching is used to enhance the uplink capacity.
  • Uplink Tx Switching in the uplink time slots for TDD-NR, dual-stream is maintained, and in other time slots UE uses the traditional EN-DC mode, resulting the uplink peak throughput increased by about 17% of that of TDD-NR in SA architecture.
  • FIG. 22B shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in inter-band GA scenario.
  • UE With Uplink Tx switching activated for inter-band GA, in TDD-NR UL time slots UE can transmit data with dual-stream.
  • UE can use inter-band GA with uplink Tx switching to further improve capacity and reduce latency.
  • UE uses FDD frequency band to send data, while maintaining FDD and TDD carrier aggregation in downlink, improving user experience.
  • Inter-band GA can flexibly support Option 1 and Option 2 of uplink Tx switching.
  • UE can work in one of the modes shown in FIG. 22B depending on the UE capabilities and the radio environment.
  • 3GPP Rel-16 has expanded the frequency band combinations of carrier aggregation to 78, and by integrating with Uplink Tx Switching, GA can boost 5G performance in coverage, capacity and latency.
  • Uplink Tx Switching With Uplink Tx Switching, UE can connect to both FDD and TDD carriers at the same time, even at cell edge, which solves the issue of no 5G access due to limited uplink. For example, in case of TDD-NR with 3.5 GHz and a bandwidth of 100 MHz, and FDD-NR frequency band of 2.1 GHz utilized for carrier aggregation, when cell edge uplink data rate is 2Mbps, adopting GA with Uplink Tx Switching can increase network capacity by 17.8%, compared to the network with single-carrier TDD-NR.
  • Uplink Tx Switching In the case of TDD-NR with 3.5 GHz (bandwidth of 100 MHz) aggregates FDD- NR of 2.1 GHz (bandwidth is 20 MHz) with Uplink Tx Switching, uplink peak throughput capacity is improved by 20%. Uplink Tx Switching can increase uplink time slot availability to 100%, therefore HARQ RTT can be reduced by 25% without uplink data having to waiting for TDD-NR uplink timeslots. 3GPP Rel-15 introduces inter-band GA with concurrent transmission on two carriers which may result in capacity loss without TDD-NR’s dual-stream transmission on uplink. While with Uplink Tx Switching, this limitation has been eliminated by sending data on FDD-NR and TDD-NR carriers with TDM mode. GA with Uplink Tx Switching maximizes spectrum utilization in both time domain and frequency domain, and by integrating with the feature of power boosting on TDD-NR carrier to achieve better user experiences.
  • FIG. 22C shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in SUL scenario.
  • SUL can integrate both TDD-NR and SUL’s time-frequency resources within TDD-NR’s coverage area, thereby increasing uplink capacity.
  • SUL supports Option 1 (TDM mode) with uplink Tx switching.
  • TDM mode Option 1
  • UE operates in the modes shown in FIG. 22C.
  • UE switches between TDD-NR and SUL frequency bands for data transmission.
  • SUL carrier is used to provide uplink coverage. Therefore, SUL with Uplink Tx Switching improves uplink throughput and reduces latency, and cannot improve the coverage compared with SUL without Uplink Tx Switching.
  • uplink time-frequency resources of SUL can be allocated for UE, and single user’s uplink capacity can be increased by 20%. Up to 100% of the uplink time slots can be available, and HARQ RTT can be reduced by nearly 20%.
  • Some LTE-NR aggregation combinations of channels across two bands may be considered difficult to achieve, because the simultaneous uplink transmissions on these bands give rise to inter-modulation (IM) products in a downlink (DL), e.g. , from base station to wireless device, band. For example, this may happen for inter-band frequency division duplex (FDD)-FDD and time division duplex (TDD)-TDD combinations.
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • a channel may be a part of the spectrum.
  • any problems with IM depend on the actual output power of the UL, the power balance, the allocations, the wanted signal levels and other interference. Then, the different wireless device implementations will have varying performance. In an ideal scenario, the BS will get channel state information (CSI) reports and PHR and may perhaps be able to take action for a notorious band combination, if the IM can be distinguished from other external interference.
  • CSI channel state information
  • a UE supporting uplink GA across two (or more) carriers can be assumed to have dedicated Transmit (Tx) chains for each carrier, and hence is able to support GA without any restrictions.
  • Tx Transmit
  • a UE may have 2 Tx chains, and it can transmit on the uplink on two carriers, but with some restrictions.
  • Such a UE is not able to transmit 1 Tx on carrier 1 and 2 Tx on carrier 2 (e.g., to support 2-layer multiple- input-multiple- output (MIMO) on carrier 2) since it has 2 Tx chains, and hence the UE can support either case 1 or case 2 for transmitting on the uplink.
  • MIMO 2-layer multiple- input-multiple- output
  • FIG. 23 shows an example of transmission options for UL Tx switching.
  • Option 1 and Option 2 are further defined, as shown in the figure.
  • a UE may send data over carrier 1 and carrier 2 in time division mode (TDM), but not at the same time. This option may be referred to as “switched uplink”.
  • TDM time division mode
  • option 2 in the terminal side, carrier 1 and carrier 2 may be flexibly aggregated, either in TDM mode or simultaneous transmission mode. This option may be referred to as “dual uplink”.
  • UL Tx switching may enable three operation modes: Mode 1, where one Tx chain is used in a first frequency band (e.g., for 2.1 GHz carrier), and the other Tx chain is used in a second frequency band (e.g., for 3.5 GHz carrier); Mode 2, where one Tx chain is switched to the second frequency band, and the other is still used in the second frequency band, which enables TDD- NR Dual-Stream transmission in the second band, and Mode 3, where both Tx chains are switched to the first frequency band, which enables TDD-NR Dual-Stream transmission in the first band.
  • Mode 1 where one Tx chain is used in a first frequency band (e.g., for 2.1 GHz carrier), and the other Tx chain is used in a second frequency band (e.g., for 3.5 GHz carrier)
  • Mode 2 where one Tx chain is switched to the second frequency band, and the other is still used in the second frequency band, which enables TDD- NR Dual-Stream transmission in the second band
  • Mode 3 where both Tx chains are
  • Two types of uplink Tx Switching may be used when switching between two operation modes. For example, a 1T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 1 and mode 2, or between mode 1 and mode 3. In case of 1T uplink switching, only one Tx chain (antenna connector) is switched between the two bands/carriers. In another example, a 2T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 2 and mode 3. In case of 2T uplink switching, both/two Tx chains (antenna connectors) are switched between the two bands/carriers at the same time.
  • a switching gap may be needed to allow the UE enough time to switch (e.g., to move/reconfigure some hardware (or a Tx chain) from carrier 1 to carrier 2 or vice versa) between the two carriers/bands.
  • the network (NW) needs to provide switching gaps on one of the carriers/bands and would also need to provide enough additional relaxation in UE Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) processing time, which is time typically between an end of an Uplink (UL) grant and start of the PUSCH.
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel
  • the network may send an enquiry (e.g., UECapabilityEnquiry) for the UE radio access capability information.
  • the network initiates the procedure to a UE in RRC_CONNECTED when it needs (additional) UE radio access capability information.
  • the UE may receive the enquiry from the base station, e.g., via an RRC message.
  • the UE may set the contents of the capability information (e.g., UECapabilitylnformation) message based on the request fields in the enquiry message.
  • the UE shall include in the ue-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList a UE-CapabilityRAT-Containerot the type UE-NR-Capability and with the rat-Type set to nr.
  • the UE may include the list of supported band combinations, feature sets, and/or feature set combinations (e.g., supportedBandCombinationList, featureSets and featureSetCombinations).
  • the UE may send an RRC message comprising the UE capability information (UE capability information message).
  • the UE capability information may comprise a list of band combinations supported by the UE (e.g., supportedBandCombinationList, BandCombinationList).
  • the list of band combinations may contain a list of NR CA, NR non-CA and/or MR-DC band combinations (also including DL only or UL only band).
  • the UE capability information may comprise the feature set combinations referenced from the supported band combinations (e.g., as included in supportedBandCombinationList).
  • the feature set combination may comprise a list of feature sets per band (FeatureSetsPerBand). Each feature set per band may comprise a list of feature sets applicable to the carrier(s) of one band entry of the associated band combination. Each feature set (FeatureSets) may provide pools of downlink feature sets and/or uplink feature sets. Each feature set (FeatureSets) may provide pools of downlink feature sets per component carrier (CC) (FeatureSetDownlinkPerCC) and/or uplink feature sets per CC (FeatureSetUplinkPerCC). [0284] The uplink feature sets per CC (FeatureSetUplinkPerCC) may indicate a set of features that the UE supports on the corresponding carrier of one band entry of a band combination.
  • the set of features may comprise: supported subcarrier spacing for UL (e.g., supportedSubcarrierSpacingUL); supported bandwidth for UL (e.g., supportedBandwidthUL); a (maximum) number of MIMO layers for UL/PUSCH (e.g., maxNumberMIMO-LayersCB- PUSCH, maxNumberMIMO-LayersNonCB-PUSCH, or MIMO-LayersUL); a (maximum) number of SRS resource per set (e.g., maxNumberSRS-ResourcePerSet); a (maximum) number of ports per set for PUSCH (e.g., maxNumberNZP- PUSCH-PortsPerSet); a (maximum) number of SRS antenna ports per set (e.g., maxNumberSRS- AntennaPortsPerSet); etc.
  • supported subcarrier spacing for UL e.g., supportedSubcarrierSpacingUL
  • the enquiry may comprise a request for UL Tx switching (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchRequest).
  • the UE may send the list of band combinations that the UE can (is capable to) support for UL Tx switching (e.g., BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch).
  • the UE may include into the list of supported band combinations for UL Tx switching (e.g., supportedBandCombinationList-UplinkTxSwitch) as many NR-only/ E-UTRA- NR band combinations that support UL TX switching as possible from a list of candidate band combinations, starting from a first entry.
  • the list of (one or more) supported band combinations for UL Tx switching may comprise a list of (one or more) supported band pairs (e.g., supportedBandPairListNR), and/or the support option for the uplink Tx switching (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-OptionSupport and/or uplinkTxSwitchingOptionForBandPair).
  • support option may indicate a “switched UL” mode (e.g., TDM transmission), or “dual UL” mode (concurrent transmission), or both modes.
  • support option may indicate whether power boosting for UL Tx switching is supported or not (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-PowerBoosting).
  • Each band pair of the supported band pairs for UL Tx switching comprises a first frequency band and a second frequency band.
  • the capability information indicates, for each band pair (e.g., ULTxSwitchingBandPair), an index of a first frequency band (e.g., band IndexULI ) and an index of a second frequency band (e.g., bandlndexUL2) for simultaneous transmission.
  • the capability information may also indicate for each band pair, a switching option (uplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair) and/or a switching gap/period associated with the two frequency bands of the band pair (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod, or uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodForBandPair).
  • the switching gap/period may be a duration in microseconds (e.g., 35us, 140us, or 21 Ous).
  • the capability information may indicate for each band pair, one or more switching gaps/periods associated with the two frequency bands of the band pair.
  • the capability information may comprise a first parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod and/or switchingPeriodForlT) indicating a first switching gap/period for switching one Tx chain between the first band and the second band of the band pair (e.g., 1 Tx-1 Tx uplink switching, and/or 1T1T switching).
  • a first parameter e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod and/or switchingPeriodForlT
  • the capability information may comprise a second parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T and/or switchingPeriod For2T) indicating a second switching gap/period for switching two Tx chains between the first band and the second band of the band pair (e.g., 2Tx-2Tx uplink switching, and/or 2T2T switching and/or 2T switching mode).
  • a second parameter e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T and/or switchingPeriod For2T
  • the capability information may not comprise the second parameter.
  • the capability information may indicate absence of the second parameter.
  • the field of the second parameter e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2Ti in the corresponding entry in the capability message may be absent, e.g. , if the UE does not support 2Tx-2Tx switching for a given band pair.
  • the capability information may indicate for each band pair, an index of an unaffected band (e.g., bandlndexUnaffected) in case of dual UL transmission.
  • the UE may support dual UL transmission on band X and Z, also, on band Y and Z.
  • the UE may report band Z as the unaffected band for band pair (X,Y).
  • uplink transmission on band Z may be unaffected/uninterrupted/maintained.
  • the UE may omit uplink transmissions on band X and band Y during the corresponding switching period, and/or may not omit the uplink transmission on band Z during the corresponding switching period.
  • the capability information may indicate for the unaffected band of a band pair, a switching period.
  • the capability information may comprise a third parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodUnaffectedBandDualUL, SwitchingPeriodUnaffectedBandDualUL, periodOnULBands, or switchingAdditionalPeriod DualUL), indicating the switching period corresponding to the band pair and the unaffected/impacted band in case of dual UL transmission.
  • the UE may support dual UL transmission on band X and Z, also, on band Y and Z. the UE may report the third switching period for band Z as and band pair (X,Y). In this case, when switching between band X and band Y, the UE may omit uplink transmissions on band X and band Y and band Z during the corresponding switching period indicated by the third parameter.
  • the network may configure one or more cells for the UE.
  • the network may transmit RRC message(s) indicating one or more cell groups (e.g., CellGroupConfig).
  • the RRC message(s) may comprise, for a cell group (MCG and/or SCG), configuration parameters of one or more serving cells, e.g., Pcell and/or SPcell and/or Scell(s).
  • Each of the one or more serving cells may comprise one or more uplink carriers (e.g., UL (NUL) and/or SUL).
  • the RRC message(s) may comprise SRS configurations (e.g., SRS-Config) of one or more serving cells.
  • the SRS configurations may comprise one or more parameters indicating a number of SRS ports (e.g., number of SRS antenna ports, or number of ports for SRS transmission).
  • the one or more configurations parameters e.g., nrofSRS-Ports
  • the RRC message(s) may comprise PUSCH configurations (e.g., PUSCH-Config) of the one or more serving cells.
  • the UE configured/scheduled with a PUSCH transmission may receive indication of precoding information (e.g., SRI and/or TPMI) to determine a transmission precoder to apply to the PUSCH transmission.
  • the UE may apply the precoding information to one or more PUSCH transmissions based on an SRS resource set.
  • the SRI may indicate the SRS resource set.
  • the UE may select the transmission precoder from the uplink codebook that has a number of antenna ports equal to the number of SRS ports (e.g., configured by higher layer parameter nrofSRS-Ports in SRS- Config).
  • the UE may transmit the PUSCH transmission using the same antenna ports that it uses for SRS transmission. For example, the UE may transmit the PUSCH transmission using the same number of antenna ports that it uses for SRS transmission.
  • the UE may determine a codebook subsets based on TPMI(s), based on the UE capability for the number of (e.g., two or four or eight) antenna ports.
  • the UE may transmit PUSCH using the same antenna port(s) as the SRS port(s) in the SRS resource(s) indicated by a scheduling DCI (e.g., DCI format 0_1 , 0_2 or 0_3) and/or by an RRC parameter (e.g., configuredGrantConfig).
  • a scheduling DCI e.g., DCI format 0_1 , 0_2 or 0_3
  • RRC parameter e.g., configuredGrantConfig
  • the UE may determine the PUSCH precoder(s) and/or transmission rank based on the SRI(s) when multiple SRS resources are configured.
  • the SRI(s) may be given by one or two SRS resource indicator(s) in DCI and/or by an RRC parameter (e.g., srs-Resourcelndicator).
  • One or more SRS resource sets (e.g., SRS-ResourceSet(s)) applicable for PUSCH scheduled by a DCI may be defined/configured by the entries of a higher layer parameter (e.g., srs-ResourceSetToAddModList and/or srs- ResourceSetToAddModListDCI-0-2 in SRS-config, respectively).
  • the UE may use one or multiple SRS resources for SRS transmission.
  • a maximum number of SRS resources which can be configured to the UE for simultaneous transmission in the same symbol and/or a maximum number of SRS resources may be based on UE capabilities.
  • the SRS resources transmitted simultaneously occupy the same RBs.
  • the UE may be configured with one SRS port for each SRS resource.
  • the UE may receive configuration parameter, of a carrier, indicating a number of antenna ports (or uplink Tx antennas or UL Tx chains) for transmission of uplink signals and channels (e.g., SRS and/or PUSCH/PUCCH) via the carrier.
  • configuration parameter of a carrier, indicating a number of antenna ports (or uplink Tx antennas or UL Tx chains) for transmission of uplink signals and channels (e.g., SRS and/or PUSCH/PUCCH) via the carrier.
  • the UE may transmit the PUSCH transmission using the same antenna ports as the SRS port(s) in the SRS resource(s) indicated by SRI(s).
  • the SRI(s) may be given by DCI (e.g., format 0_1 or 0_2) or by an RRC parameter (e.g., configuredGrantConfig).
  • the RRC message(s) may comprise a parameter that indicates an option, e.g., switched UL or dual UL, for UL Tx switching within the cell group (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption), e.g., based on the UE capability information.
  • the RRC message(s) may comprise a parameter that indicates whether power boosting is enabled for UL Tx switching within the cell group (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPowerBoosting).
  • the network may configure one or more serving cells for the UE, which may be the SpCell or an SCell of an MCG or SCG.
  • the UE may receive one or more RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of the one or more serving cells.
  • the configuration parameters of a serving cell may indicate downlink configurations and/or uplink configurations.
  • the configuration parameters of the serving cell may indicate one or more downlink BWPs of the serving cell.
  • the configuration parameters of the serving cell may indicate at least one uplink carrier of the serving cell, e.g., UL (NUL) and/or SUL.
  • the configuration parameters may indicate one or more UL BWPs.
  • the configuration parameters may indicate that UL Tx switching is configured (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching).
  • the configuration parameters of one or more cells may indicate that uplink Tx switching is configured for a plurality of bands (e.g., more than two band, via UplinkTxSwitchingMoreBands).
  • the configuration parameters may indicate a list of one or more band pairs configured with uplink Tx switching (e.g., for inter-band GA via uplinkTxSwitchingBandPairList). Each band pair in the list may comprise a first band and a second band.
  • the configuration parameters may indicate a first index of the first band (bandlnfoULI) and a second index of a second band (band lnfoUL2).
  • the configuration parameters of the one or more cells may comprise configuration parameters of UL Tx switching for each band pair of the list (e.g., UplinkTxSwitchingBandPairConfig).
  • the configuration parameters of UL Tx switching for each band pair may indicate a switching option for the band pair (e.g., switched/TDM UL or dual UL switching via switchingOptionConfigForBandPair).
  • the configuration parameters of UL Tx switching for each band pair may indicate whether UL Tx switching between the two bands of the band pair is configured or not (e.g., 1 Tx-1 Tx switching, or switching of one or at least one Tx antenna chain).
  • the configuration parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a parameter indicating whether 2 UL Tx switching between the two bands of the band pair is configured or not (e.g., 2Tx-2Tx switching, or switching of two Tx antenna chains, via uplinkTxSwitching-2T-Mode or switching2T-Mode).
  • the parameter may indicate 2Tx-2Tx switching mode is configured for inter-band UL GA and/or SUL.
  • the switching gap duration for a triggered uplink switching based on 2Tx-2Tx switching mode may be equal to the switching time capability value reported for the 2T switching mode. If this field is absent (e.g., the configuration parameters of UL Tx switching do not comprise this parameter) and/or uplink Tx switching (via uplinkTxSwitching) is configured, the UE determines/interprets that 1 Tx-2Tx UL Tx switching is configured.
  • uplinkTxSwitching there may be one uplink (or one uplink band in case of intra-band) configured with uplink Tx switching (uplinkTxSwitching), on which the maximum number of antenna ports (e.g., among all configured P-SRS/A-SRS and activated SP-SRS resources) is 1 and/or non-codebook based UL Ml MO is not configured.
  • the configuration parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a parameter (UplinkTxSwitchingAssociatedBandDualUL) indicating an associated band (associated Band) for each transmitting band (transmitBand), in case of dual UL.
  • a parameter UplinkTxSwitchingAssociatedBandDualUL
  • associated Band associated Band
  • transmitBand transmitBand
  • the configuration parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-Dual UL- TxState) indicating a state of one or more Tx chains if the state of Tx chains after the UL Tx switching is not unique, e.g., in case of 2Tx-2Tx switching is configured and/or dual uplink is configured (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption is set to dualUL).
  • a first value of the parameter e.g., value oneT
  • value twoT may indicate 2Tx is assumed to be supported on that carrier.
  • This parameter/field may apply for all band pairs, e.g., if uplink Tx switching for more than two bands (via uplinkTxSwitchingMoreBands) is configured.
  • the UL Tx switching configuration associated with an uplink carrier of a cell may indicate whether the configured uplink carrier is “carrierl” or “carried” for dynamic UL Tx switching (e.g., via uplinkTxSwitchingCarrier) in a band pair (e.g., carrier 1 in band 1 and carrier 2 in band 2).
  • the UL “carrierl” may be capable of one transmit antenna connector and UL “carried” may be capable of two transmit antenna connectors.
  • network configures one of the two uplink carriers involved in dynamic UL TX switching as carrierl and the other as carried.
  • (NG)EN-DC network always configures the NR carrier as carrier 2.
  • the UL Tx switching configuration associated with an uplink carrier of a cell may indicate a location of UL Tx switching period (e.g., via uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod Location) in a band pair (e.g., carrier 1 in band 1 and carrier 2 in band 2).
  • a Boolean parameter/field may indicate whether the location of the UL Tx switching period is configured in this respective UL carrier or not.
  • network configures this field to TRUE for one of the uplink carriers involved in dynamic UL TX switching and configures this field in the other carrier to FALSE.
  • (NG)EN-DC network always configures this field to TRUE for NR carrier (i.e. with (NG)EN-DC, the UL switching period always occurs on the NR carrier).
  • FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B show examples of UL Tx switching period location for UL Tx switching between pair of carriers/bands.
  • Time mask for switching between two uplink carriers is shown in FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B.
  • a switching time mask may be applicable for an uplink band pair (or an uplink carrier pair, each carrier being in a corresponding band).
  • the uplink band pair may be associated with an inter-band UL GA configuration and/or SUL configuration and/or dual connectivity (e.g., NR-DC and/or EN/DC and/or NE-DC and/or MR-DC).
  • the two uplink carriers may be in different bands with different carrier frequencies.
  • a capability information indicating UL Tx switching period/gap may be present for the respective band pair/combination associated with the two uplink carriers and/or sent to the network.
  • NR UL carrier 1 is capable of one transmit antenna connector and NR UL carrier 2 is capable of two transmit antenna connectors, e.g., with 3d B boosting on the maximum output power when the capability uplinkTxSwitchingPowerBoosting is present and the IE powerboostingTxSwitching is set to 1.
  • the UE may support the switch between single layer transmission with one antenna port and two-layer transmission with two antenna ports on the two uplink carriers following the scheduling commands and/or rank adaptation. In an example, both single layer and two-layer transmission with 2 antenna ports, and single layer transmission with 1 antenna port may be supported on NR UL carrier 2.
  • FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B are located in either NR carrier 1 or carrier 2 as indicated in RRC signaling (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodLocation).
  • FIG. 24A shows an example time mask for switching between UL carrier 1 and UL Carrier 2, where the switching period is located in carrier 1.
  • FIG. 24B shows an example time mask for switching between UL carrier 1 and UL Carrier 2, where the switching period is located in carrier 2.
  • the length of uplink switching period may be less than the value indicated by UE capability uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod.
  • the requirements may apply for the case of co-located and synchronized network deployment for the two uplink carriers.
  • the requirements may apply for the case of single TAG for the two uplink carriers, e.g. , the same uplink timing for the two carriers.
  • the switching time mask/period may be applicable for an uplink band pair of an inter-band UL GA configuration when a capability of 2T switching (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T) is present.
  • NR UL carrier 1 in a first band may be capable of two transmit antenna connectors
  • NR UL carrier 2 in a second band may be capable of two transmit antenna connectors
  • the two uplink carriers may be in different bands with different carrier frequencies.
  • the UE may support the switch between two-layer transmission with two antenna ports and two-layer transmission with two antenna ports (2Tx-2Tx switching) on the two uplink carriers following the scheduling commands and rank adaptation. Both single layer and two-layer transmission with 2 antenna ports, and single layer transmission with 1 antenna port may be supported on NR UL carrier 1 and carrier 2.
  • the UE may determine the switching period location to be in either NR carrier 1 or carrier 2 as indicated in RRC signaling (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodLocation').
  • the length of uplink switching period may be less than the value indicated by UE capability for 2Tx switching (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T).
  • the switching period may be fully contained in the time period between the end of the transmission on the switch-from carrier and the start of the transmission on the switch-to carrier.
  • the UE may ignore the RRC signaling (uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodLocation) and may not take effect in this case.
  • the number of NR uplink bands may be three or four or more, e.g., when the capability (BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch-r18) is present.
  • NR UL carrier(s) in each of the three or four or more uplink bands are capable of one or two transmit antenna connector(s), according to the UE capability ( Feature SetUplinkPerCC) .
  • carrier 1 may be in band X and carrier 2 may be in band Y.
  • the uplink transmission on either band X or band Y may be with one or two transmit antenna connector(s).
  • 1Tx-1Tx switching is supported for the band pair.
  • 1Tx-1Tx switching may comprise switching of one Tx chain from a first band to a second band of the band pair, wherein both bands of the band pair support one Tx chain.
  • NR UL at least one carrier in one band of one band pair is capable of one transmit antenna connector, and at least one NR UL carrier in the other band of the band pair is capable of two transmit antenna connectors, 1 Tx-2Tx switching is supported for the band pair.
  • 1 Tx-2Tx switching may comprise switching of one Tx chain from a first band to a second band of the band pair, wherein the first band of the band pair supports one Tx chain, and the second band of the band pair supports two Tx chains.
  • 2Tx-2Tx switching is supported for the band pair.
  • 2Tx-2Tx switching may comprise switching of two Tx chains from a first band to a second band of the band pair, wherein both bands of the band pair support two Tx chains.
  • the switching periods are located in either NR band X or band Y as indicated in RRC signaling (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingBandList-r18).
  • the length of uplink switching period X is indicated by a first UE capability (e.g., switchingPeriodFor1T-r18) when 1 Tx-1 Tx switching and/or 1 Tx-2Tx switching between the two bands in the band pair is supported and/or configured.
  • the length of uplink switching period X is indicated by a second UE capability (e.g., switchingPeriodFor2T-r18) when 2Tx- 2Tx switching between the two bands in the band pair is supported and/or configured.
  • the UE may be capable to transmit until the beginning of the switching period and after the end of switching period with the exception of transient periods.
  • the UE may support dual UL (dualUL) for at least two uplink band pairs in the GA configuration.
  • the two band pairs supporting dual UL may be denoted as band pairs of ⁇ band X and band Z ⁇ and ⁇ band Y and band Z ⁇ .
  • the UE may switch one transmitter (e.g., Tx chain) between band X and band Y.
  • the UE may be capable of uplink transmission on band Z during the switching period that is located on band X or Y, and/or the UE may not transmit on band X and/or Y during a time period T 1 located on band X or Y, where the time period T 1 is the length of switching period (reported) for the band pair of band X and band Y.
  • the capability information e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingMaintainedUL-Trans-r18 or maintained U L-Trans indicating “1”
  • the UE may be capable of uplink transmission on band Z during the switching period that is located on band X or Y, and/or the UE may not transmit on band X and/or Y during a time period T 1 located on band X or Y, where the time period T 1 is the length of switching period (reported) for the band pair of band X and band Y.
  • the UE does not indicate the band Z is a non-affected band in the capability information (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingMaintainedUL-Trans-r18 or maintainedUL-Trans not indicate “1”)
  • UE is not required to transmit on any of the three bands during the switching period during a time period T 1 located on band X or Y, where T 1 is the length of switching period for the band pair of band X and band Y.
  • the UE may not transmit on any of the three bands during the switching period indicated by the switching period capability located on band X or Y.
  • the UE may support dual UL (dualUL) for at least one uplink band pair including band X and band Y, and two transmit antenna connectors on at least one uplink band of band Z.
  • the UE may switch one transmitter (e.g., Tx chain) between band X and band Z, and across the same time, the UE may switch the other transmitter (e.g., Tx chain) between Y and band Z.
  • the UE may not transmit on any of the three bands during time period with the larger one of switching period T2 and T3, where T2 is the length of switching period for the band pair of band X and band Z, and T3 is the length of switching period for the band pair of band Y and band Z.
  • the UE may report the additional switching period capability (e.g., UplinkTxSwitchingAdditionalPeriodDualUL-r18).
  • the UE may not transmit on any of the three bands during time period indicated by the additional switching period capability.
  • the uplink transmission on band X and band Y may be with one transmit antenna connector and one antenna port, and the uplink transmission on band Z may be with two transmit antenna connectors and two antenna ports.
  • the switching period location may be configured by an RRC parameter, and/or band Z may be with the highest priority according to the RRC configuration.
  • the UE may omit uplink transmission during the uplink switching gap W Tx1.Tx2 if one or more conditions are met and/or the UE is configured with UL Tx switching (uplinkTxSwitching).
  • the switching gap/period W Tx1.Tx2 may be indicated by one or more UE capability (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod for 1 Tx switching and uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T for 2Tx switching) for the respective band combination/pair associated with the two uplink carriers.
  • the UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching with a parameter (e.g., BandCombination- UplinkTxSwitch) for a band combination/pair.
  • a parameter e.g., BandCombination- UplinkTxSwitch
  • the UE may be configured with a MCG using E-UTRA radio access and with a SCG using NR radio access (EN-DC).
  • the UE may be configured with uplink carrier aggregation.
  • the UE may be configured in a serving cell with two uplink carriers with higher layer parameter for SUL supplementaryUplink).
  • the one or more conditions under which the switching gap/period may be present and the location of the switching gap may be defined as follows.
  • the UE may not be expected to cancel the uplink switching, and/or to trigger any other new uplink switching occurring before To for any other uplink transmission that is scheduled after To-T 0 ffeet, where Toffset is the UE processing procedure time defined for the uplink transmission triggering the switch.
  • a UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching (e.g., with BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch) for a band combination.
  • the UE may be configured with a MCG using E-UTRA radio access and with a SCG using NR radio access (EN-DC).
  • the UE may be configured with uplink switching (e.g., with parameter uplinkTxSwitching).
  • the UE may be configured with switched UL transmission mode (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'switchedUL’).
  • the UE may be to transmit in the uplink based on DCI(s) received before T o - T O ff Set or based on a higher layer configuration(s).
  • the UE may be to transmit an NR uplink that takes place after an E-UTRA uplink on another uplink carrier.
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap W Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
  • the UE may be to transmit an E-UTRA uplink that takes place after an NR uplink on another uplink carrier.
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap W Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit simultaneously on the NR uplink and the E-UTRA uplink. If the UE is scheduled or configured to transmit any NR uplink transmission overlapping with an E-UTRA uplink transmission, the NR uplink transmission may be dropped.
  • the UE may be configured with dual UL transmission mode (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'dualUL').
  • the UE may be to transmit in the uplink based on DCI(s) received before T o - T O ff Set or based on a higher layer configuration(s).
  • the UE may be to transmit an NR two-port uplink that takes place after an E-UTRA uplink on another uplink carrier.
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap Af Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
  • the UE may be to transmit an E-UTRA uplink that takes place after an NR two-port uplink on another uplink carrier.
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap Af Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit simultaneously a two- port transmission on the NR uplink and the E-UTRA uplink. In other cases the UE may be expected to transmit normally all uplink transmissions without interruptions.
  • the UE may be configured with tdm-PattemConfig or by tdm-PattemConfig2.
  • the UE may assume the operation state in which one-port E-UTRA uplink can be transmitted.
  • the UE may assume the operation state in which two- port NR uplink can be transmitted.
  • a UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching (e.g., with BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch) for a band combination/pair. For that band combination/pair, the UE may be configured with uplink carrier aggregation. The UE may be configured with uplink switching (e.g., with parameter uplinkTxSwitching). The UE may be to transmit in the uplink based on DCI(s) received before T o - T O ff Set or based on a higher layer configuration(s). The UE may be to transmit a 2-port transmission on one uplink carrier and the preceding uplink transmission may be a 1 -port transmission on another uplink carrier.
  • uplink switching e.g., with BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap / Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
  • the UE may be to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier and the preceding uplink transmission may be a 2-port transmission on another uplink carrier.
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap A/ Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap A/ Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
  • switched UL transmission mode e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'switched UL'
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap A/ Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
  • dual UL transmission mode e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'dualUL'
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap A/ Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
  • dual UL transmission mode e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'dualUL'
  • the UE may consider this as if 1 -port transmission was transmitted on both uplinks.
  • a transmitter state indicating a first value e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL-TxState set to 'oneT'
  • the UE may consider this as if 1 -port transmission was transmitted on both uplinks.
  • the UE may consider this as if 2-port transmission took place on the transmitting carrier.
  • a second value e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL-TxState set to 'twoT'
  • 2T switching mode e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-2T-Mode
  • uplinkTxSwitching-2T-Mode when the UE is to transmit a 2-port transmission on one uplink carrier on one band and if the preceding uplink transmission is a 2-port transmission on another uplink carrier on another band, then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching period/gap W Tx1.Tx2 on any of the carriers.
  • the UE may not be scheduled or configured with uplink transmissions that result in simultaneous transmission on two antenna ports on one uplink carrier on one band, and any transmission on another uplink carrier on another band. In other cases, the UE may be expected to transmit normally all uplink transmissions without interruptions.
  • a UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching (e.g., via BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch) for a band combination/pair.
  • uplink switching e.g., via BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch
  • band combination/pair configured with uplink carrier aggregation with 3 or 4 bands
  • the two bands involved in the uplink switching may belong to different uplink serving cells, and/or the two bands involved in the uplink switching may belong to one uplink serving cell.
  • More than two bands may be involved in the determination of one uplink switching.
  • the UE may be configured on any two of the bands with dual UL (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair set to 'dualUL').
  • the UE When the UE is to transmit a 2-port transmission on one uplink carrier on the 1 st band and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port transmission on a carrier on the 2 nd and/or 3 rd band, and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 1 -port transmission can be supported in the 2 nd and 3 rd band, then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers.
  • the UE When the UE is to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier on the 1 st band and the 2 nd band, and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port or 2-port transmission on a carrier on the 3 rd band, and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 2-port transmission can be supported on the 3 rd band, then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers.
  • the UE When the UE is to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier on the 1 st band and the 2 nd band, and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port transmission on a carrier on the 1 st band and/or the 3 rd band, and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 1 -port transmission can be supported in the 1 st and 3 rd band, and/or if the UE indicates maintained/unaffected UL transmission (maintainedUL-Trans) on/for the 1 st band for band pair ⁇ the 2 nd band, the 3 rd band ⁇ , then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers on the 2 nd band and the 3 rd band.
  • the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers.
  • the UE When the UE is to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier on the 1 st band and the 2 nd band, and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port transmission on a carrier on the 3 rd band and/or the 4 th band, and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 1 -port transmission can be supported in the 3 rd and 4 th band, then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers.
  • the UE may not be scheduled or configured to transmit on more than two uplink bands at any given time.
  • the UE may be configured with dual UL (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair set to 'dualUL') for that band pair.
  • the UE may be configured with switched UL (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair set to 'switchedUL') for that band pair.
  • switched UL e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair set to 'switchedUL'
  • a Tx chain state parameter e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL- TxState set to 'oneT'
  • the UE may consider this as if 1 -port transmission was transmitted on the 3rd band and the band associated with the 3rd band (as configured by associatedBand).
  • the UE may consider this as if 2-port transmission took place on the transmitting carrier. Even if all cells in a band are deactivated, that does not invalidate the associated band configuration that is indicating the band as associated band for the other band(s).
  • a second value of the Tx chain state parameter e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL-TxState set to 'twoT'
  • a Tx chain state parameter e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL- TxState set to 'oneT'
  • a band in the band combination is not configured as dualUL for any band pair it belongs to
  • the UE may consider this as if 2-port transmission took place on the transmitting carrier.
  • a UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching (e.g., with BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch or uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T) for a band combination/pair.
  • the UE may be configured in a serving cell with two uplink carriers, e.g., configured with SUL with higher layer parameter supplementaryUplink.
  • the UE may be configured with uplink switching (e.g., with parameter uplinkTxSwitching).
  • the UE may assume that an uplink switching is triggered in a duration of switching gap V Tx1.Tx2 , where T o is the start time of the first symbol of the transmission occasion of the uplink channel or signal and T O ff Set is the preparation procedure time of the transmission occasion of the uplink channel or signal.
  • T o is the start time of the first symbol of the transmission occasion of the uplink channel or signal
  • T O ff Set is the preparation procedure time of the transmission occasion of the uplink channel or signal.
  • the UE may not be expected to transmit on any of the two uplinks. In other cases, the UE may be expected to transmit normally all uplink transmissions without interruptions.
  • Tx RF chains are difficult to be implemented for smartphone due to the following reasons: the cost and complexity is increasing because of more Tx RF chains, power supply modules and so on; the size, heat generation and power consumption will also increase dramatically if more than 2 power supply modules work at the same time; more Tx RF chains also increase the number of PLLs (phase locked loops) and LOs (local oscillators) which cause intermodulation interference and degrade the downlink performance for some band combination; and, some Tx RF resources may be under-utilized due to power limitation or restrictions of less available UL slots on TDD band. This makes it very difficult for networks to fully exploit all of available uplink resources/bands, and for smartphones to increase their uplink data rates.
  • PLLs phase locked loops
  • LOs local oscillators
  • Enhancements for operation with more than 4 Tx antenna may be considered targeting devices such as OPEs or loT devices without size and cost constraints.
  • Enhancements for frequency-selective precoding may be considered to provide most gains when the transmission includes 4 MIMO layers, so, such gains would not be applicable for 2Tx smartphones.
  • Enhancements for mTRP (multi Transmit Receive Point) uplink are in principle applicable to all device types, and provide gains mostly for cell-edge performance in macro-cell mTRP deployments, however, uplink performance may be improved for smartphones not in coverage-limited conditions.
  • 2Tx chain was the basic handheld UE assumption in NR FR1 high bands, for example n41 , n77, n78 and n79. This made UL MIMO for single CO enabled in the beginning of 5G NR in these bands.
  • UL GA was introduced in Rel-17, however, it was found that both UL CA and UL MIMO have big impacton UE architecture due to limitation of max 200MHz commercial power amplifier (PA) CBW. This led to support of UL CA+UL MIMO only in 200MHz contiguous UL GA case with the 2Tx chain assumption. For intra-band non-contiguous UL GA or inter-band UL GA, only a single layer can be supported with the 2Tx chain assumption.
  • PA commercial power amplifier
  • the max capability that 2Tx UE can achieve is max power is 26+26
  • max MIMO-K3A is 2layer+200MHz contiguous CA
  • max concurrent Bands is two.
  • 3Tx UE can bring potential enhancements, e.g. , power enhancement, MIMO enhancement, 3 bands Tx, and Tx switching transmission enhancement.
  • MIMO can be enhanced by 2 layer in one band and 1 layer in the other band for non-contiguous UL CA, inter-band UL CA, and EN-DC.
  • the 1 Tx low band and 2Tx high band concurrent transmission can be achieved.
  • Ous Tx switching may be supported, for example switch from the low band to high band to save power, etc.
  • FIG. 25A illustrates a 2Tx UE architecture. This example shows a UE architecture with 2 Tx chains and 2 LOs that can generate two frequency points for up conversion. Two PAs may be activated in the RFFE.
  • FIG. 25B illustrates a 3Tx UE architecture with 2 LOs.
  • This example shows a UE architecture with 3 Tx chains and 2 LOs and/or 3 PAs.
  • two of the three Tx chains share one LO and the other Tx chain has a dedicated LO.
  • FIG. 25C illustrates a 3Tx UE architecture with 3 LOs.
  • This example shows a UE architecture with 3 Tx chains and 3 LOs and/or 3 PAs.
  • each Tx chains has a dedicated LO.
  • the only update is activating the three PAs simultaneously (e.g., in FIG. 25B only two PAs may be activated).
  • the UE architecture with 3 dedicated LOs e.g., as in the example of FIG. 25C
  • one additional LO is needed, and the impact to RFFE is similar.
  • This UE can support three different bands transmissions simultaneously, e.g., 2 LTE + 1 NR band, or 2 low frequency NR bands + 1 high frequency NR band, or 1 LTE band + 2 NR bands, or 1 low frequency NR bands +2 high frequency NR bands.
  • 3 -antenna-port (3Tx) codebook-based transmissions may be supported by wireless devices and configured by the network.
  • 3Tx simultaneous transmissions for two bands e.g., inter-band CA/EN-DC
  • 2Tx on the other uplink operating band (1 Tx at band A +2Tx at band B)
  • 3Tx simultaneous transmission for three bands e.g., inter-band UL CA/EN-DC
  • 1Txon each uplink operating band (1Tx at band A + 1Tx at band B + 1Tx at band C) may be configured.
  • a wireless device may be capable of concurrently transmitting multiple wireless transmissions using the multiple Tx antenna chains.
  • inter-band UL CA and/or EN-DC may be enhanced for 3Tx UEs for operation on band combinations with two bands.
  • 3Tx band combinations may be defined/configured with 1 CO in each band.
  • Tx capability may be 1 Tx in one band and 2Tx in the other band.
  • 3 SRS ports are needed.
  • 3 SRS ports may be enabled by muting one SRS port in a 4-port SRS resource and/or by combining ports from multiple SRS resources (e.g., three 1 -port SRS resources and/or one 2-port SRS resource and one 1 -port SRS resource). It can enable dynamic switching among PUSCH transmissions with 1 port and/or 2 ports and/or 3 ports. By allowing indicating one or more SRS resources, it can switch between PUSCH transmissions with 1 port, 2 ports and 3 ports.
  • UL Tx switching is an important feature that enables high throughput multi-stream data transmission as well as UL coverage enhancement at the same time for inter-band CA.
  • dual UL transmissions are only possible through (based on) UL Tx switching.
  • the existing technology does not support uplink Tx switching for a UE with more than 2Tx antenna connectors (2Tx ports or 2Tx chains).
  • the implementation of the existing technologies enables uplink Tx switching based on two options: switched uplink (option 1, switchedUL) and/or dual uplink (option 2, dualUL) on two carriers in two different bands with a maximum of two Tx chains/antennas/ports (or two active Tx chains/antennas/ports) (referring to FIG. 21 A and FIG. 21 B and FIG. 23).
  • the implementation of the existing technologies cannot enable dual (simultaneous/concurrent) and/or switched (TDMed) uplink transmissions, on two carriers in two different bands with 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports (or 3 or more active Tx chains/antennas/ports).
  • Embodiments enable support of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports operating in two bands based on switched UL and/or dual UL mode (UL Tx switching option).
  • the implementation of the existing technologies may fall short in conveying the UE capability for the UL Tx switching option (e.g., switched UL and/or dual UL) based on three or more Tx chains/antennas/ports.
  • the existing capability information may indicate that the UE supports switched UL and/or dual UL on a band pair or a band combination, and/or that the UE supports 1 or 2 or 3 transmit antenna connectors on each band of a band pair/combination, however, none of these capabilities nor any combination thereof can indicate or guarantee that the UE can support 3 active Tx antenna connectors on the band pair/combination at the same time, e.g., to perform dual (simultaneous/concurrent) uplink transmissions using three or more Tx chains/antennas/ports (or three or more active Tx chains/antennas/ports) for operation on the band pair (e.g., 1 Tx ⁇ band A +2Tx ⁇ band B).
  • a UE may be capable of dual UL on a band pair based on 2 Tx chains (or 2 active Tx chains), e.g., a 1 -port transmission using 1Tx chain on band A and 1 -port transmission using 1Tx on band B.
  • a UE may be capable of configuring (e.g., tuning its hardware) 2 Tx antenna connectors in band A and 1 Tx antenna connector in band B.
  • the UE may not have enough power supply to support dual UL on the band pair (A,B) based on 3 Tx chains (or 3 active Tx chains), e.g., a 2-port transmission using 2Tx chains on band A and 1 -port transmission using 1 Tx on band B.
  • dual (concurrent) UL (transmissions) using 3 active Tx antennas may require additional capabilities of the wireless device (e.g., power supply).
  • the network may fail to determine whether a UE supports dual (concurrent or simultaneous) UL transmissions using three Tx chains (or three active Tx chains) in two bands at the same time or not (if not, switched/TDMed UL may be used). For example, even though a UE can configure its hardware to support 1Tx chain in a first band and 2Tx chains in a second band, it may not be able to transmit si mu Itaneously/concu rrently using these three Tx chains in the first band and the second band, e.g., due to power supply constraints.
  • the implementation of the existing technologies may result in misalignment between the UE and the base station about the UE capabilities associated with UL Tx switching based on 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports.
  • the implementation of the existing technologies may result in the network assuming such advanced capability for a UE, and configuring/scheduling the UE with UL transmissions across UL carriers that it cannot effectively fulfill, which may yield to failure of UL transmissions and/or waste of UL resources.
  • the implementation of the existing technologies may result in the network assuming the legacy capability for a UE (e.g., in a conservative approach), and not efficiently configuring/scheduling the UE with high throughput dual UL transmissions using MIMO in inter-band GA based on simultaneous/concurrent use of the three or more Tx chains (or three or more active Tx chains). Therefore, the implementation of the existing technologies cannot enable 2-layer UL MIMO in interband CA/EN-DC, and additional capability signaling is needed for the network to efficiently configure UL carriers in an inter-band GA and/or EN-DC with MIMO based on UL Tx switching.
  • the support of UL Tx switching may be very scenario/implementation-specific, depending highly on the UE RF architecture as well as the band combination (i.e., band-pair-specific).
  • a UE may support dual UL on a first band pair, but not on a second band pair.
  • a UE may support dual UL on a band pair using 2 active antenna ports, but not 3 or more active antenna ports.
  • Embodiments enable indication of whether a UE supports dual UL on a band pair/combination using 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports (or 3 or more active Tx chains/antennas/ports), e.g., for simultaneous/concurrent transmission of a first 1 -port transmission on a first band (e.g., 1 -layer PUSCH or 1-port UL using 1Tx chain ⁇ band A) and a second 2-port transmission on a second band (e.g., 2-layer PUSCH or 2-port UL using 2Tx chains ⁇ band B), and/or for simultaneous/concurrent transmission of three 1 -port transmissions on three bands.
  • a first band e.g., 1 -layer PUSCH or 1-port UL using 1Tx chain ⁇ band A
  • a second 2-port transmission on a second band e.g., 2-layer PUSCH or 2-port UL using 2Tx chains ⁇ band B
  • Embodiments enable the network to configure UL carriers with a 1 -port (1 -layer) transmission on a first band and a simultaneous 2-port (2-layer) transmission on a second band, based on UL Tx switching across the first band and the second band for a UE with 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports (or 3 or more active Tx chains/antennas/ports).
  • Embodiments enable the network to determine whether a UE supports UL Tx switching based on switched UL (e.g., no simultaneous/concurrent/dual UL transmissions, or option 1 orswitchedUL), 2T dual UL (e.g., only 1 -port + 1 -port simultaneous/concurrent/dual UL transmissions, or option 2 or 2TdualUL), and/or 3T dual UL (e.g., 1 -port + 2-port simultaneous/concurrent/dual UL transmissions, or option 3 or 3TdualUL), and/or MT dual UL (e.g., 1 -port + (M-1)-port simultaneous/concurrent/dual UL transmissions, or option M or MTdualUL).
  • switched UL e.g., no simultaneous
  • M may be the number of Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports of the UE.
  • the capability information message may indicate whether/that the UE is capable of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL using M Tx chains/antennas/ports (or M active Tx chains/antennas/ports) on the two bands of the band pair.
  • the capability information message may indicate whether/that the UE supports dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions on the two bands of the band pair.
  • the dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions may comprise a first 1 -port UL transmission on a first band of the band pair and a second 2-port (or (M-l)-port) UL transmission on a second band of the band pair.
  • the first 1 -port UL transmission may be a 1 -layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with a 1 Tx antenna connector (chain or port) on the first band.
  • the second 2-port UL transmission may be a 2-layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with 2 Tx antenna connectors (chains or ports) on the second band.
  • the first 2-port UL transmission may be a 2-layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with 2 Tx antenna connectors (chains or ports) on the first band.
  • the second (M-2)-port UL transmission may be a (M-2)- layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with M-2 Tx antenna connectors (chains or ports) on the second band.
  • the UE may transmit a capability information message indicating whether/that the UE supports (is capable of) UL Tx switching on/in/across a band pair/combination based on 2T dual UL.
  • the capability information message may indicate whether/that the UE is capable of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL using 2 Tx chains/antennas/ports (or 2 active Tx chains/antennas/ports) on the two bands of the band pair.
  • the capability information message may indicate whether/that the UE supports dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions on the two bands of the band pair, comprising a first 1 -port UL transmission on a first band of the band pair and a second 1 -port UL transmission on a second band of the band pair.
  • the first 1 -port UL transmission may be a 1 -layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with a 1 Tx antenna connector (chain or port) on the first band.
  • the second 1 -port UL transmission may be a 1 -layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with 1 Tx antenna connector (chain or port) on the second band.
  • the UE may support 2 or more Tx chains on a first band and/or second band in a band pair.
  • the band pair may comprise the first band and the second band.
  • the UE may not support 2T dual UL (concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmission using 2Tx chains) and/or 3T dual UL (concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmission using 3Tx chains) on the first band and the second band.
  • the capability information message may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching (option) based on switched UL (TDMed, e.g., switchedUL) on the band pair.
  • switched UL switched UL
  • the capability information message may indicate that the UE does not support 3T dual UL on the band pair, e.g., the UE may not be capable of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions on the two bands of the band pair, comprising a 2-port UL transmission on a first band of the band pair and a 1 -port UL transmission on a second band of the band pair.
  • the UE may support 2 or more Tx chains on the first band and/or the second band.
  • the UE may not be capable of using 2 (or more) Tx chains on the first band at the same time (simultaneously, concurrently) with the 1 (or more) Tx chain on the second band.
  • the UE may not have enough power supply for the concurrent transmissions using total of 3 (or more) antenna ports.
  • the capability information message may indicate that the UE supports 2T dual UL on the band pair, e.g., the UE may be capable of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions on the two bands of the band pair, comprising a 1 -port UL transmission on the first band of the band pair and a 1 -port UL transmission on the second band of the band pair.
  • the UE may have enough power supply for the concurrent transmissions using total of 2 antenna ports.
  • the UE may have 2Tx chains on the first band, and for dual UL with the second band, may be capable of using only one Tx chain of the 2Tx chains on the first band (2T dual: 1Tx ⁇ firsthand + 1Tx ⁇ second band). For example, the UE may not allocate/generate any power for the second Tx chain on the first band, e.g., during the dual UL transmissions.
  • Example embodiments of the present disclosure may provide enhancement for inter-band UL GA with Ml MO.
  • Embodiment enable the network to plan for configuration of UL carriers for du al/concurrent/simu Itaneou s UL transmissions using three or more Tx chains (or three or more active Tx chains), such that maximal UE capability can be exploited towards concurrent transmission of high-throughput UL and reliable UL on two or more bands.
  • the network may be able to schedule uplink grants and/or transmissions more efficiently for a UE in case of inter-band UL GA and/or EN-DC based on the UE capabilities.
  • the network may schedule a first 2(or more)-port uplink transmission on the first band and a concurrent/simultaneous second 1 -port uplink transmission on the second band, wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission overlap at least partially in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols), and thus, increase the UL throughput.
  • the network may determine/set the parameter(s) for UL Tx switching configuration (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair and/or switching2T-Mode and/or switching3T-Mode, etc.) for a band pair and/or a plurality of cells based on this capability.
  • the network may enable/configure 2T switching (switching2T-Mode) and/or 3T switching (switching3T-Mode) and/or 3-port/3T dual UL (3TdualUL) for the band pair, e.g., if the UE indicates support of 3(or more)T dual uplink capability on the band pair.
  • the UE may have one Tx chain/antenna in band A.
  • the network may schedule/configure the UE with a 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n.
  • the UE may have 2 Tx chains/antennas in band C in time slot/symbol n-1.
  • the UE may indicate 3T dual UL capability in band A and band B.
  • the network may configure UL Tx switching for the band pair (A,B) and/or band pair (B,C), such that 3T dual UL (transmission(s)) on band A and band B is enabled/configured and/or 2T (antenna) switching between band C and band B is enabled/configured.
  • the UE may be able to switch 2 Tx chains from band C to band B and perform a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 2-port UL transmission on band B with the 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n (e.g., instead of waiting until after the 1 -port transmission on band AforTDMed transmission based on switched UL (switchedUL) in time slot/symbol n+1), and concurrently achieve low-latency high-throughput uplink transmissions.
  • the network may not schedule a first 2(or more)-port uplink transmission on the first band and a concurrent/simultaneous second 1 -port uplink transmission on the second band, wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission overlap at least partially in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols).
  • the network may instead schedule a first 1 -port uplink transmission on the first band and a concurrent/simultaneous second 1 -port uplink transmission on the second band, wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission overlap at least partially in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols).
  • the UE can successfully perform the scheduled UL transmissions and avoid interference and/or waste of UL resources.
  • the network may determine/set the parameter(s) for UL Tx switching configuration (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair and/or switching2T-Mode and/or switching3T-Mode, etc.) for a band pair and/or a plurality of cells based on this capability.
  • the network may not enable/configure 2T switching (switching2T-Mode) and/or 3-port/3T dual UL (3Tdual UL) for the band pair if the UE does not support the 3(or more)T dual uplinks capability.
  • the UE may have one Tx chain/antenna in band A.
  • the network may schedule/configure the UE with a 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n.
  • the UE may have 2 Tx chains/antennas in band C in time slot/symbol n-1.
  • the UE may indicate no support of 3T dual UL capability in band A and band B. But the UE may indicate support of 2T dual UL capability in band A and band B.
  • the network may configure UL Tx switching for the band pair (A,B) and/or band pair (B,C), such that 3T dual UL (transmission(s)) on band A and band B is disabled (e.g., notconfigured/enabled) and/or 2T switching between band C and band B is disabled (e.g., not configured/enabled), and/or 2T dual ULon band A and band B is enabled/configured and/or 1T switching between band C and band B is enabled/configured.
  • 3T dual UL (transmission(s)) on band A and band B is disabled (e.g., notconfigured/enabled) and/or 2T switching between band C and band B is disabled (e.g., not configured/enabled)
  • 2T dual ULon band A and band B is enabled/configured
  • 1T switching between band C and band B is enabled/configured.
  • the UE may be able to switch 1Tx chains from band C to band B and perform a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port UL transmission on band B with the 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n (e.g., instead of waiting until after the 1 -port transmission on band A for TDMed transmission based on switched UL (switchedUL) in time slot/symbol n+1), and concurrently achieve low-latency high-throughput uplink transmissions. Additionally, the UE may not need to waste power and time to switch the other UL Tx chain from band C to band B, when it’s not going to be used for the dual UL transmissions.
  • the UE may indicate that it cannot support 3(or more)T dual uplinks and 2T dual UL on a first band and a second band.
  • the network may not schedule a first uplink transmission on the first band and a concurrent/simultaneous second uplink transmission on the second band, wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission overlap at least partially in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols).
  • the network may instead schedule a first uplink transmission on the first band in a first time slot/symbol (e.g., time slot/symbol n) and a second uplink transmission on the second band in a second time slot/symbol (e.g., time slot/symbol n+1), wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission do not overlap in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols).
  • the UE can successfully perform the scheduled UL transmissions in a TDMed/switched way and avoid interference and/or waste of UL resources.
  • the network may determine/set the parameter(s) for UL Tx switching configuration (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair and/or switching2T-Mode and/or switching3T-Mode, etc.) for a band pair and/or a plurality of cells based on this capability. For example, the network may disable (e.g., not configure/enable) 2T switching (switching2T-Mode) and/or 3-port/3T dual UL (3Tdual UL) for the band pair, if the UE does not support the 3(or more)T dual uplinks capability.
  • switchingOptionConfigForBandPair and/or switching2T-Mode and/or switching3T-Mode, etc. e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair and/or switching2T-Mode and/or switching3T-Mode, etc.
  • the network may disable (e.g., not configure/enable) 2T switching (switching2T-Mode) and/
  • the UE may have one Tx chain/antenna in band A.
  • the network may schedule/configure the UE with a 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n.
  • the UE may have 2 Tx chains/antennas in band C in time slot/symbol n-1.
  • the UE may indicate no support of 3T dual UL and/or 2T dual UL capability in band A and band B.
  • the network may configure UL Tx switching for the band pair (A,B) and/or band pair (B,C), such that switched UL on band A and band B is enabled/configured, and/or 3T dual UL on band A and band B is disabled (e.g., not configured/enabled), and/or 2T dual ULon band A and band B is disabled (e.g., not configured/enabled), and/or 2T switching between band C and band B is disabled (e.g., not configured/enabled).
  • the UE may be able to switch 1 Tx chain at a time from band C to band B and perform a switched/TDMed UL transmissions on band A in time slot/symbol n and on band B in time slot/symbol n+1. Therefore, UE does not need to waste power and time to switch the other UL Tx chain from band C to band B, when it’s not going to be used for the dual UL transmissions.
  • FIG. 26 illustrates an example of signaling of uplink transmit antenna switching capability as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the uplink transmit antenna switching capability may indicate support of UL Tx switching based on 3T (e.g., 2T+1T) dual UL.
  • a UE may receive from a base station, a message (e.g., RRC message) comprising enquiry for UL Tx switching capability of the UE.
  • a message e.g., RRC message
  • the UE may receive a capability enquiry message comprising one or more parameters indicating a request for the UE’s capability of UL Tx (transmit antenna) switching.
  • the UE may transmit one or more capability information messages.
  • the one or more capability information messages may comprise configuration(s) (information elements) of UL Tx switching capability of the UE across one or more band combinations comprising a band pair (A,B).
  • the band pair may comprise a first band (band A) and a second band (band B).
  • the configuration(s) of UL Tx switching capability may comprise one or more parameters indicating whether the UE supports uplink Tx (transmit antenna) switching based on MT (e.g., (M-1 )Tx ⁇ band A + 1 Tx ⁇ band B) dual uplink or not.
  • MT dual uplink may refer to dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmission(s) using (a total number of) M Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports across two or more bands.
  • MT dual uplink may refer to UL Tx switching (option) based on (a total number of) M Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports across two or more bands.
  • M may be 3.
  • the one or more capability information messages may messages may comprise one or more parameters indicating support of UL Tx switching based on 2T+1T (3T) dual UL on band pair (A, B) .
  • the one or more capability information messages may messages may comprise one or more parameters indicating support of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmission(s) using (a total number of) 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports across the band pair (A, B).
  • the band pair may comprise a first band (band A) and a second band (band B).
  • the one or more capability information messages may indicate support of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmissions comprising a first 2-port uplink transmission (using 2 transmit antenna connectors/ports) on band A, and a second 1 -port uplink transmission (using 1 transmit antenna connector/port) on band B.
  • the one or more capability information messages may indicate support of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmissions comprising a first 2-port uplink transmission (using 2 transmit antenna connectors/ports) on band B, and a second 1 -port uplink transmission (using 1 transmit antenna connector/port) on band B.
  • the embodiments enable dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmission on band A and band B using three (or more) active antenna chains and/or transmit antenna connectors/ports.
  • transmit antenna connectors or ports transmit chain, transmit antenna, transmit antenna port, transmit antenna connector, Tx chain, Tx antenna, Tx antenna port, Tx antenna connector, port, antenna, antenna port, antenna connector.
  • uplink carrier/channels and/or transmissions one two or more frequency bands that at least partially overlap in time domain e.g., at least in one symbol: dual uplink, dual uplink transmission(s), concurrent uplink, concurrent uplink transmission(s), simultaneous uplink, simultaneous uplink transmission(s).
  • MT dual UL 3Tdual, 3T dual, 1T+2T dual, 2T+1T dual, 1T+2T concurrent, 2T+1T concurrent, 2-port+1 port dual/concurrent UL, 1 -port+2-port concurrent UL.
  • FIG. 27 illustrates an example of dual uplink transmission based on uplink transmit antenna switching capability as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the UE may receive a UE capability enquiry message comprising/indicating a request for UL Tx switching capability of the UE for a band combination (e.g., one or more band pairs).
  • the UE capability enquiry message may comprise/indicate a request for dual/concurrent UL capability of the UE for/across two or more bands of a band combination (e.g., one or more band pairs).
  • the UE may transmit a UE capability information message to the base station, e.g., in response to the UE capability inquiry.
  • the UE may include UL Tx switching capability information in the UE capability information message, e.g., in response to the request for UL Tx switching capability.
  • the UE may include UL Tx switching capability information of a band pair in the UE capability information message, e.g., in response to the request for UL Tx switching capability for a band combination comprising the two bands of the band pair.
  • the UE may include one or more parameters in the capability information message.
  • the one or more parameters may indicate MT dual UL capability on/for a band pair.
  • MT dual capability may refer to a capability of the UE to support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using a total of M Tx antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the UE may include the one or more parameters in the capability information message in response to the request for UL Tx switching capability on a band combination comprising the two bands of the band pair.
  • the one or more parameters may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching across the two bands of the band pair for switching scenarios that enable or result in dual/concurrent UL transmissions using a total of M Tx antenna ports (or M active Tx antenna ports) on the band pair.
  • the UE may indicate 3T (e.g., 2Tx@band A + 1 Tx@band B and/or 1 Tx@band A + 2Tx@band B) dual UL capability on/for a band pair (A,B).
  • 3T dual capability may refer to a capability of the UE to support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using a total of 3 Tx antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the UE may include the one or more parameters in the capability information message in response to the request for UL Tx switching capability on a band combination comprising the two bands of the band pair.
  • the one or more parameters may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching across the two bands of the band pair for switching scenarios that enable or result in dual/concurrent UL transmissions using a total of 3 Tx antenna ports (or 3 active Tx antenna ports) on the band pair.
  • the UE capability information message may comprise configurations or information elements of band combinations (e.g., a plurality of bands) and/or feature sets that the UE supports on the band combinations.
  • the configurations or information elements of band combinations and/or feature sets may comprise parameters of UL Tx switching across the bands in the band combination.
  • the UE capability information message may comprise parameters of uplink Tx switching for a band pair comprising a first band (e.g., band A) and a second band (e.g., band B) of the band combination.
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a first parameter indicating whether the UE supports switching of 2 Tx chains (e.g., 2T switching mode) on the bands pair (A,B).
  • the first parameter may indicate a first UL Tx switching gap/period as a duration that the UE requires for switching the 2 Tx chains between the first band (band A) and the second band (band B).
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a second parameter indicating whether the UE supports switching of 3 Tx chains (e.g., 3T switching mode) on the bands pair (A,B).
  • the second parameter may indicate a second UL Tx switching gap/period as a duration that the UE requires for switching the 3 Tx chains between the first band (band A) and the second band (band B).
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a third parameter indicating whether the UE supports switching of M Tx chains (e.g., MT switching mode) on the bands pair (A,B).
  • the third parameter may indicate a third UL Tx switching gap/period as a duration that the UE requires for switching the M Tx chains between the first band (band A) and the second band (band B).
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a first parameter indicating whether the UE supports 2T dual uplink on the band pair (A,B) or not.
  • a first value of the first parameter may indicate that the UE supports dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 2 Tx chains on the band pair.
  • a second value of the first parameter may indicate that the UE does not support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 2 Tx chains on the band pair.
  • 2T dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • a 1 -port e.g., 1 -layer
  • PUSCH e.g., 1 -layer uplink
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching may not comprise the first parameter indicating that the UE does not support 2T dual uplink on the band pair (A, B) .
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a second parameter indicating whether the UE supports 3T dual uplink on the band pair (A, B) or not.
  • a first value of the second parameter may indicate that the UE supports dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 3 Tx chains on the band pair.
  • a second value of the second parameter may indicate that the UE does not support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 3 Tx chains on the band pair.
  • 3T dual uplink may comprise a 2-port (e.g., 2-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • 3T dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 2-port (e.g., 2-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching may not comprise the second parameter indicating that the UE does not support 3T dual uplink on the band pair (A,B).
  • MT dual uplink may comprise a (M-l)-port (e.g., (M-l)-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • MT dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous (M-l)-port (e.g., (M-l)-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching may not comprise the third parameter indicating that the UE does not support MT dual uplink on the band pair (A, B).
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a fourth parameter.
  • the parameters may comprise the fourth parameter if the parameters comprise the third parameter.
  • the parameters may comprise the fourth parameter if the third parameter indicates that the UE supports MT dual UL on the band pair.
  • the fourth parameter may indicate, in case of MT dual UL, which band of the band pair supports 1 T and which one supports (M-1)T.
  • a first value of the fourth parameter may indicate that the first band (e.g., band A indicated by a first band index) supports (M-l)-port transmission and/or the second band (e.g., band B indicated by a second band index) supports 1 -port transmission.
  • a second value of the fourth parameter may indicate that the first band (e.g., band A indicated by a first band index) supports 1 -port transmission and/or the second band (e.g., band B indicated by a second band index) supports (M-l)-port transmission.
  • a third value of the fourth parameter may indicate that either of the first band (e.g., band A indicated by a first band index) and the second band (e.g., band B indicated by a second band index) supports (M-l)-port transmission.
  • the capability information message may comprise two or more of the above parameters, e.g., the first parameter and/or the second parameter and/or the third parameter.
  • the parameters of UL Tx switching capability may comprise a switching parameter indicating one or more supported switching options for the band pair (e.g., 3TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair).
  • a first value of the switching parameter (e.g., switchedUL) may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on switched/TDMed UL for the band pair. For example, the UE may not be able to transmit concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions on the two bands of the band pair.
  • a second value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on 2T dual UL for the band pair.
  • the UE may be able to transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of 2 Tx chains (or 2 active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair.
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • the second value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports 1 -port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously.
  • the UE may indicate that it can only use one of the 2Tx chains in band B for uplink transmission in slot n.
  • a third value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on 3T dual UL for the band pair.
  • the UE may be able to transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of 3 Tx chains (or 3 active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair.
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 2-port uplink transmission (e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • a 1 -port uplink transmission e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH
  • a 2-port uplink transmission e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 2-port uplink transmission (e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports 1 -port transmission on band A and 2-port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously.
  • the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports 2-port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously.
  • a fourth value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on MT dual UL for the band pair.
  • the UE may be able to transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of M Tx chains (or M active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair.
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission (e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • a 1 -port uplink transmission e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH
  • a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission (e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports 1 -port transmission on band A and (M-1 )-port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously.
  • the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports (M-1 )-port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously.
  • a fifth value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on TDMed/switched UL and 2T dual UL for the band pair.
  • a sixth value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on TDMed/switched UL and 3T dual UL for the band pair.
  • a seventh value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on 2T dual UL and 3T dual UL for the band pair.
  • the UE may receive one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message) comprising configurations of a cell group comprising a plurality of uplink carriers.
  • the configurations of the cell group may comprise one or more parameters of UL Tx switching across the plurality of uplink carriers.
  • the plurality of uplink carriers may be in a plurality of bands, e.g. , each uplink carrier of the plurality of uplink carriers may be in a respective band of the plurality of bands (e.g., inter-band UL GA and/or EN-DC).
  • the one or more parameters may indicate that UL Tx switching is enabled/configured for/across a band pair (A,B).
  • the band pair may comprise a first band A and a second band B.
  • the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a first parameter indicating switching of 2 Tx chains (e.g., 2T switching mode) is enabled/configured for the bands pair (A,B). For example, based on the first parameter, the UE may switch 2 Tx chains at the same time (e.g., together or back to back) between band A and band B.
  • the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a second parameter indicating switching of 3 Tx chains (e.g., 3T switching mode) is enabled/configured for the bands pair (A,B).
  • the UE may switch 3 Tx chains at the same time (e.g., together or back to back) between band A and band B.
  • the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a third parameter indicating switching of M Tx chains (e.g., MT switching mode) is enabled/configured for the bands pair (A,B).
  • the UE may switch M Tx chains at the same time (e.g., together or back to back) between band A and band B.
  • the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a first parameter indicating whether 2T dual uplink is enabled on the band pair (A,B) or not.
  • a first value of the first parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 2 Tx chains on the band pair is enabled.
  • a second value of the first parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 2 Tx chains on the band pair is disabled.
  • 2T dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • a 1 -port e.g., 1 -layer
  • PUSCH e.g., 1 -layer uplink
  • the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a second parameter indicating whether 3T dual uplink is enabled on the band pair (A,B) or not.
  • a first value of the second parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 3 Tx chains on the band pair is enabled.
  • a second value of the second parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 3 Tx chains on the band pair is disabled.
  • 3T dual uplink may comprise a 2-port (e.g., 2-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • 3T dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 2-port (e.g., 2-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • MT dual uplink may comprise a (M-l)-port (e.g., (M-l)-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • MT dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous (M-l)-port (e.g., (M-l)-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
  • the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a switching parameter indicating the switching option configuration for the band pair (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair).
  • a first value of the switching parameter may indicate that UL Tx switching based on switched/TD Med UL is configured for the band pair.
  • the UE may not (expect to) transmit concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions on the two bands of the band pair.
  • a second value of the switching parameter may indicate that UL Tx switching based on 2T dual UL is configured for the band pair.
  • the UE may transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of 2 Tx chains (or 2 active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair.
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • the second value of the switching parameter may indicate that 1 -port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously.
  • the UE may only use one of the 2Tx chains in band B for uplink transmission in slot n.
  • a third value of the switching parameter may indicate that UL Tx switching based on 3T dual UL is configured for the band pair.
  • the UE may transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of 3 Tx chains (or 3 active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair.
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 2-port uplink transmission (e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • a 1 -port uplink transmission e.g., a 1-layer PUSCH
  • a 2-port uplink transmission e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 2-port uplink transmission (e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 - port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that 1 -port transmission on band A and 2-port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously.
  • the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that 2-port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously.
  • a fourth value of the switching parameter may indicate that UL Tx switching based on MT dual UL is configured for the band pair.
  • the UE may transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of M Tx chains (or M active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair.
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission (e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • a 1 -port uplink transmission e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH
  • a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH
  • the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission (e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B).
  • the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that 1 -port transmission on band A and (M-1 )-port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously.
  • the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that (M-1 )-port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously.
  • the UE may transmit dual UL transmissions simultaneously.
  • the UE may receive one or more signals (e.g., RRC messages and/or MAC- CEs and/or DCIs) comprising uplink grants.
  • the UE may receive a first uplink grant indicating a first resource for a first uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) on a first carrier in the first band (e.g., band A).
  • the UE may receive a second uplink grant indicating a second resource for a second uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) on a second carrier in the second band (e.g., band B).
  • the second uplink transmission may be a 1-port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink transmission.
  • the first resource and the second resource may overlap, at least partially or completely, in time domain.
  • one or more symbols of the first resource may overlap with one or more symbols of the second resource.
  • the UE may transmit the first uplink transmission with (M-1) (e.g., 2) Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports on the first band (band A) and the second uplink transmission with 1 Tx chain/antenna connector/port on the second band (band B), e.g., in response to the MT (e.g., (M-1 )T+1 T) dual UL being enabled/configured for band pair (A,B).
  • M-1 e.g., 2
  • MT e.g., (M-1 )T+1 T
  • FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B show examples of transmission options for UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
  • switched UL and Dual UL are further defined, as shown in the figure.
  • a UE may send data over a first carrier/band and a second carrier/band and/or a third carrier/band in time division mode (TDM), but not at the same time.
  • TDM time division mode
  • the first carrier/band and the second carrier/band or the third carrier/band may be flexibly aggregated, e.g., for a simultaneous/concurrent transmission.
  • a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports may be capable of supporting and/or configured with UL Tx switching across two or more bands based on switched UL.
  • the UE may be capable of supporting and/or configured with UL Tx switching based on switched UL across 3 bands.
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain in a first carrier/band, a second Tx chain in a second carrier/band and a third Tx chain in a third carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit using either of the 3 Tx chains in one of the three carriers/bands at a given time.
  • a second mode of switched UL operation (Mode 2 in FIG. 28A)
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain in a first carrier/band, a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in a second carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port transmission on the second carrier/band, or a 1 -port transmission on the first band.
  • a third mode of switched UL operation (Mode 3 in FIG. 28A)
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain in the second carrier/band, a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in the first carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port transmission on the first carrier/band, or a 1 -port transmission on the second band.
  • a fourth mode of switched UL operation (Mode 4 in FIG. 28A) the UE may have a first Tx chain and a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in a first carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port or 3-port transmission on the first carrier/band.
  • a fifth mode of switched UL operation (Mode 5 in FIG. 28A)
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain and a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in the second carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port or 3-port transmission on the second carrier/band.
  • a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports may be capable of supporting and/or configured with UL Tx switching across two or more bands based on switched UL.
  • the UE may be capable of supporting and/or configured with UL Tx switching based on dual UL across 3 bands.
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain in a first carrier/band, a second Tx chain in a second carrier/band and a third Tx chain in a third carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit using the 3 Tx chains in the three carriers/bands at the same time (simultaneously/concurrently), e.g., this mode may be referred to as triple UL.
  • this mode may be referred to as triple UL.
  • the UE may transmit using 2 Tx chains on two carriers/bands of the three carriers/bands at the same time (simultaneously/concurrently).
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain in a first carrier/band, a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in a second carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit a 2-port uplink transmission on the second carrier/band, and a 1 -port uplink transmission on the first band, e.g., this mode may be referred to as 3T (2T+1T) dual UL.
  • the UE may transmit a 1 -port uplink transmission on the second carrier/band, and a 1-port uplink transmission on the first band, e.g., this mode may be referred to as (2T) dual UL.
  • 2T 1-port uplink transmission on the first band
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain in the first carrier/band, a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in the second carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit a 2-port uplink transmission on the first carrier/band, and a 1-port uplink transmission on the second band, e.g., this mode may be referred to as 3T (2T+1T) dual UL.
  • the UE may transmit a 1-port uplink transmission on the first carrier/band, and a 1-port uplink transmission on the second band, e.g., this mode may be referred to as (2T) dual UL.
  • 2T 1-port uplink transmission on the second band
  • 2T this mode may be referred to as (2T) dual UL.
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain and a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in a first carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit a 1-port or 2- port or 3-port transmission on the first carrier/band.
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain and a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in the second carrier/band.
  • the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port or 3-port transmission on the second carrier/band.
  • UL Tx switching of one or more Tx chains across the bands may enable the different operation modes (e.g., Mode 1 , Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4, and Mode 5 in FIG. 28A and/or FIG. 28B).
  • Different types of uplink Tx Switching may be used when switching between each two operation modes. For example, a 1T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 1 and mode 2, or between mode 2 and mode 3, or between mode 3 and mode 4, or between mode 1 and mode 3, or between mode 3 and mode 5.
  • 1T uplink switching only one Tx chain (antenna connector) is switched between the two bands/carriers.
  • a 2T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 1 and mode 4, or mode 2 and mode 4, or between mode 1 and mode 5, or between mode 3 and mode 5.
  • two Tx chains (antenna connectors) are switched between the two or more bands/carriers at the same time.
  • a 3T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 4 and mode 5.
  • three Tx chains (antenna connectors) are switched between the two or more bands/carriers at the same time.
  • a UE may indicate support of UL Tx switching of one or more Tx chains across a plurality of bands (e.g., two or more bands, e.g., of one or more band pairs). Based on the embodiments, the UE may indicate support of UL Tx switching that enables different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B. Based on the embodiments, the UE may indicate support of UL Tx switching based different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B.
  • different operation modes e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL
  • the UE may indicate support of different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) for one or more band pairs (e.g., a plurality of bands) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B.
  • different operation modes e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL
  • band pairs e.g., a plurality of bands
  • the UE may receive RRC message(s) comprising configuration parameters of UL Tx switching indicating UL Tx switching based on different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B. Based on the embodiments, the UE may be configured with different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) for one or more band pairs (e.g., a plurality of bands) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B.
  • different operation modes e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL
  • band pairs e.g., a plurality of bands
  • FIG. 29 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 2 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain (Tx-1) on a first band (band A) and a second Tx chain (Tx-2) on a second band (band B).
  • Tx-1 on a first band
  • Tx-2 on a second band
  • the UE may support 1 Tx chain in band A and/or 2 Tx chains in band B.
  • the UE may have/perform/transmit a (2T) dual UL using a total of 2 Tx chains on the first band and the second band: a first 1-port UL transmission with the first Tx chain on the first band and second (simultaneous/concurrent/dual) 1-port UL transmission with the second Tx chain on the second band.
  • the UE may switch the first Tx chain from the first band to the second band.
  • the UE may have/perform/transmit a 2-port UL transmission with the 2Tx chains on the second band, e.g. , in a next slot after switching.
  • FIG. 30 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain (Tx-1) on a first band (band A) and a second Tx chain (Tx-2) and a third Tx chain (Tx-3) on a second band (band B).
  • Tx-1 first Tx chain
  • Tx-2 second Tx chain
  • Tx-3 third Tx chain
  • band B band
  • the UE may support 1Tx chain in band A and/or 2 Tx chains in band B.
  • the UE may have/perform/transmit a 3Tdual UL (2T+1T dual or 2+1 dual) using a total of 3 Tx chains on the first band and the second band: a first 1 -port UL transmission with the first Tx chain on the first band and second (simultaneous/concurrent/dual) 2-port UL transmission with the second Tx chain and the third Tx chain on the second band.
  • the UE may switch the first Tx chain from the second band to the first band.
  • the UE may have/perform/transmit another 3T dual UL on the first band and the second band, e.g., in a next slot after switching: a 2-port UL transmission with the first Tx chain and the third Tx chain on the first band and a (simultaneous/concurrent/dual) 1 -port UL transmission with the second Tx chain on the second band.
  • FIG. 31 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
  • the UE may have a first Tx chain (Tx-1) and a second Tx chain (Tx-2) and a third Tx chain (Tx-3) on a first band (band A).
  • the UE may support 3Tx chain in band A and/or 3 or 3 Tx chains in band B.
  • the UE may transmit a 3-port UL transmission with the first Tx chain and the second Tx chain and the third Tx chain on the first band.
  • the UE may switch the first Tx chain and the second Tx chain, based on 2T switching, from the first band to the second band.
  • the UE may have/perform/transmit a 3T dual UL on the first band and the second band, e.g., in a next slot after switching: a 2-port UL transmission with the first Tx chain and the second Tx chain on the first band and a (simultaneous/concurrent/dual) 1 -port UL transmission with the third Tx chain on the second band.
  • a wireless device may transmit one or more capability information messages comprising one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching, for a band pair comprising a first band and a second band.
  • the one or more parameters may indicate: whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports, and/or whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports.
  • the dual uplink with three antenna ports may comprise uplink transmission with two antenna ports (e.g., 2-port UL transmission) on the first band and uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the second band.
  • the dual uplink with two antenna ports may comprise uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the first band and uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the second band.
  • a wireless device may transmit one or more capability information messages (e.g., UECapabilitylnformation) indicating whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching (e.g., ULTxSwitchingBandPair) based on dual uplink with three antenna ports on a band pair comprising a first band and a second band (e.g., via 3TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair).
  • the dual uplink with three antenna ports may comprise uplink transmission with two antenna ports (e.g., 2-port UL transmission) on the first band and uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the second band.
  • the one or more capability information messages may comprise one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for the band pair (e.g. , ULTxSwitchingBandPair) .
  • the one or more parameters may indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the one or more parameters may comprise a first parameter (e.g., 3TDualOptionForBandPair or 2T1TDualOptionForBandPair) with a first value (e.g., supported) indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the one or more parameters may comprise a first parameter (e.g., 3TDu al Option ForBandPai r or 2T1 TDualOptionForBandPair) with a second value (e.g., not supported) indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the one or more parameters may not comprise a first parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports.
  • the absence of the first parameter may indicate that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the one or more parameters may indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the dual uplink with two antenna ports may comprise uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the first band and uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the second band.
  • the one or more parameters may comprise a second parameter (e.g., 2TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair or
  • the one or more parameters may comprise a second parameter (e.g., 2TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair or
  • the one or more parameters may not comprise a second parameter (e.g., 2TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair or 1T1 TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair) associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports.
  • the absence of the second parameter may indicate that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the one or more parameters may comprise a third parameter (e.g., 3TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair) indicating one or more support options/types for uplink transmissions on the first band and the second band based on uplink transmit antenna switching.
  • a first value (e.g., switchedUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink on the band pair.
  • a second value (e.g., 2TdualUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports/Tx chains on the band pair.
  • a third value (e.g., 3TdualUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more ports/Tx chains on the band pair.
  • the wireless device and/or the base station may determine, based on the third value of the third parameter, that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair (e.g., 2TdualUL).
  • a fourth value (e.g., switchedUL-3TdualUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
  • a fifth value (e.g., 2TdualUL-3TdualUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
  • Dual uplink may comprise simultaneous/concurrent uplink transmissions by the wireless device on two bands.
  • the uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first band may overlap, in time domain, with the uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
  • the transmitting may be based on the wireless device supporting three transmit antenna connectors in at least one of the first band or the second band.
  • the wireless device may receive a capability enquiry message (e.g., UECapabilityEnquiry) indicating a request for the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching (e.g., via uplinkTxSwitch Request and/or supportedBandListNR and/or supportedBandCombinationList-UplinkTxSwitch).
  • a capability enquiry message e.g., UECapabilityEnquiry
  • uplinkTxSwitch Request and/or supportedBandListNR and/or supportedBandCombinationList-UplinkTxSwitch e.g., via uplinkTxSwitch Request and/or supportedBandListNR and/or supportedBandCombinationList-UplinkTxSwitch.
  • 3TdualUL may comprise/indicate support of and/or configuration/enabling of simultaneous transmission of a 2-port UL transmission on a first band and a 1 -port UL transmission on a second band. Reciprocal capability on the first and the second band may be assumed. Another parameter may indicate for 3TdualUL, which of the first band and/or the second band of the band pair supports the 2-port transmission. If the UE supports 3Tdual UL on a band pair, it may also support 2TdualUL on the band pair. If the UE does not support legacy dualUL on the band pair, it may also not support 3TdualUL on the band pair, and/or not include/support 3TdualUL for the band pair.
  • the UE may do one or more of the followings: (1) if switchedUL is supported, uplink transmission on any one band of the band pair in the band combination may be supported (e.g., according to the scheduling commands, and the corresponding inter-band GA requirements) with uplink assigned to one band on band X or band Y apply; (2) if dualUL or 2Tdual UL is supported, simultaneous uplink transmission on the two NR UL bands from the band pair for which dualUL or 2TdualUL is declared in the band combination may be supported (e.g., according to the scheduling commands, and the corresponding interband GA requirements) with uplink GA between the
  • the wireless device may receive one or more radio resource control (RRC) messages comprising configuration parameters (e.g., UplinkTxSwitchingBandPairConfig via CellGroupConfig) of uplink transmit antenna switching for a plurality of cells.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the configuration parameters may comprise a first parameter (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair or 3TswitchingOptionConfigForBandPair or
  • 2T1 TswitchingOptionConfigForBandPair indicating that dual uplink with three or more antenna ports is configured for the band pair.
  • Three antenna connectors of the wireless device may be in the second band.
  • the wireless device may receive one or more control messages indicating a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first uplink carrier on the first band.
  • a preceding uplink transmission may be a second uplink transmission with three ports on a second uplink carrier on the second band.
  • the wireless device may switch, in response to the one or more control messages, two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band.
  • the wireless device may receive one or more second control messages indicating a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band.
  • the third uplink transmission may overlap in time domain with the first uplink transmission.
  • the wireless device may transmit, in response to (the) switching two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band and based on the one or more capability information messages indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports on the band pair: the first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first uplink carrier on the first band; and the third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band.
  • the first uplink transmission and the third uplink transmission may be dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmissions with (using) three antenna ports on the band pair.
  • a wireless device may receive a capability enquiry message to request the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna (TX) switching.
  • a wireless device may transmit capability information indicating support for uplink TX switching, in a band combination comprising a first band and a second band based on concurrent/dual uplink transmission.
  • the concurrent/dual uplink transmission may comprise a first UL transmission using/with a first quantity/number of ports (e.g., X ports) transmission on a first band; and a second UL transmission using/with a second quantity/number of ports (e.g., Y ports) transmission on a second band. At least one of the first quantity or the second quantity may be equal to or greater that two.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method including: transmitting, by a wireless device, one or more capability information messages including one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair including a first band and a second band, the one or more parameters indicating support of: a first uplink transmission using two antenna ports on the first band; a second uplink transmission using one antenna port on the second band; and uplink transmit antenna switching, for the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission, based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method including: transmitting, by a wireless device, one or more capability information messages indicating the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first band; and a second uplink transmission with one antenna port on a second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate support of: the first uplink transmission using the two antenna ports on the first band; and the second uplink transmission using the one antenna port on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages includes one or more parameters indicating the uplink transmit antenna switching.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages include one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair including the first band and the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with two antenna ports or switched uplink with two antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with two antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band; and the switched uplink with two antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include at least one of: a first parameter indicating a first switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of two transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band; or a second parameter indicating a second switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of three transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages indicate the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter indicating the first band of the band pair as a band that supports uplink transmission with two antenna ports during dual uplink.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages include one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters do not include a first parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the dual uplink with two antenna ports includes: uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a second parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a second parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters do not include a second parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a third parameter indicating one or more support options/types for uplink transmissions on the first band and the second band based on uplink transmit antenna switching.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a first value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a second value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a third value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including determining, based on the third value of the third parameter, that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a fourth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a fifth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein dual uplink includes simultaneous orconcurrent uplink transmissions by the wireless device on two bands.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first band overlap, in time domain, with the uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the transmitting is based on the wireless device supporting three transmit antenna connectors in at least one of the first band or the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving a capability enquiry message indicating a request for the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving one or more radio resource control (RRC) messages including configuration parameters of uplink transmit antenna switching for a plurality of cells, wherein the configuration parameters include a first parameter indicating that dual uplink with three or more antenna ports is configured for the band pair.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein three antenna connectors of the wireless device are in the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving one or more control messages indicating a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first uplink carrier on the first band. [0486] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a preceding uplink transmission is a second uplink transmission with three ports on a second uplink carrier on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including switching, in response to the one or more control messages, two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving one or more second control messages indicating a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band, wherein the third uplink transmission overlaps in time domain with the first uplink transmission.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, in response to switching two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band and based on the one or more capability information messages indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports on the band pair: the first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first uplink carrier on the first band; and the third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the first uplink transmission and the third uplink transmission are dual uplink transmissions with three antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method including: receiving, by a base station from a wireless device, one or more capability information messages including one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair including a first band and a second band, the one or more parameters indicating support of: a first uplink transmission using two antenna ports on the first band; a second uplink transmission using one antenna port on the second band; and uplink transmit antenna switching, for the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission, based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method including: receiving, by a base station from a wireless device, one or more capability information messages indicating the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first band; and a second uplink transmission with one antenna port on a second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate support of: the first uplink transmission using the two antenna ports on the first band; and the second uplink transmission using the one antenna port on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages includes one or more parameters indicating the uplink transmit antenna switching.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages include one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair including the first band and the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with two antenna ports or switched uplink with two antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with two antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band; and the switched uplink with two antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include at least one of: a first parameter indicating a first switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of two transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band; or a second parameter indicating a second switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of three transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages indicate the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter indicating the first band of the band pair as a band that supports uplink transmission with two antenna ports during dual uplink.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages include one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters do not include a first parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the dual uplink with two antenna ports includes: uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a second parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a second parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters do not include a second parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a third parameter indicating one or more support options/types for uplink transmissions on the first band and the second band based on uplink transmit antenna switching.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method 1 -21 , wherein a first value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a second value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a third value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including determining, based on the third value of the third parameter, that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a fourth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a fifth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein dual uplink includes simultaneous orconcurrent uplink transmissions by the wireless device on two bands.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first band overlap, in time domain, with the uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the receiving is based on the wireless device supporting three transmit antenna connectors in at least one of the first band or the second band. [0521] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, to the wireless device, a capability enquiry message indicating a request for the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, to the wireless device, one or more radio resource control (RRC) messages including configuration parameters of uplink transmit antenna switching for a plurality of cells, wherein the configuration parameters include a first parameter indicating that dual uplink with three or more antenna ports is configured for the band pair.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein three antenna connectors of the wireless device are in the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, to the wireless device, one or more control messages indicating a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first uplink carrier on the first band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a preceding uplink transmission is a second uplink transmission with three ports on a second uplink carrier on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, to the wireless device, one or more second control messages indicating a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band, wherein the third uplink transmission overlaps in time domain with the first uplink transmission.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving, in response to the wireless device switching two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band and based on the one or more capability information messages indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports on the band pair: the first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first uplink carrier on the first band; and the third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the first uplink transmission and the third uplink transmission are dual uplink transmissions with three antenna ports on the band pair.
  • the techniques described herein relate to an apparatus (e.g., wireless device or base station) including: one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the apparatus to perform any of the methods and/or techniques disclosed herein.
  • the techniques described herein relate to a non-transitory computer-readable medium including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an apparatus (e.g., wireless device or base station), cause the apparatus to perform any of the methods and/or techniques disclosed herein.
  • an apparatus e.g., wireless device or base station

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A wireless device transmits one or more capability information messages comprising one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair comprising a first band and a second band. The one or more parameters indicate support of: a first uplink transmission using two antenna ports on the first band, a second uplink transmission using one antenna port on the second band, and uplink transmit antenna switching, for the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission, based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports. The dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission. The switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.

Description

TITLE
Concurrent Uplink Transmission
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/567,169, filed March 19, 2024, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0002] Examples of several of the various embodiments of the present disclosure are described herein with reference to the drawings.
[0003] FIG. 1 A and FIG. 1 B illustrate example mobile communication networks in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented.
[0004] FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate a New Radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocol stack.
[0005] FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
[0006] FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack of FIG. 2A.
[0007] FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU.
[0008] FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B respectively illustrate a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels for the downlink and uplink.
[0009] FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE.
[0010] FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped.
[0011] FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier.
[0012] FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier.
[0013] FIG. 10A illustrates three carrier aggregation configurations with two component carriers.
[0014] FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCCH groups.
[0015] FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block structure and location.
[0016] FIG. 11B illustrates an example of CSI-RSs that are mapped in the time and frequency domains.
[0017] FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B respectively illustrate examples of three downlink and uplink beam management procedures.
[0018] FIG. 13A, FIG. 13B, and FIG. 13C respectively illustrate a four-step contention-based random access procedure, a two-step contention-free random access procedure, and another two-step random access procedure. [0019] FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part.
[0020] FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a COE-to-REG mapping for DOI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing.
[0021] FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device in communication with a base station.
[0022] FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, FIG. 160, and FIG. 16D illustrate example structures for uplink and downlink transmission. [0023] FIG. 17 A shows an example application scenario of EN-DC deployment.
[0024] FIG. 17B shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in Area A and Area B according to FIG. 17A.
[0025] FIG. 18A shows an example application scenario of UL inter-band GA.
[0026] FIG. 18B shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in area A and area B according to FIG. 18A.
[0027] FIG. 19A shows an example of supplementary uplink coverage.
[0028] FIG. 19B shows an example application scenario of SUL.
[0029] FIG. 190 shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in Area A and Area B according to FIG. 19B.
[0030] FIG. 20 shows an example of wireless device transmitter antenna.
[0031] FIG. 21A shows an example of uplink Tx switching for a UE with 2Tx.
[0032] FIG. 21 B shows an example of transmission options for UL Tx switching as shown in FIG. 21 A.
[0033] FIG. 22A shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in EN-DC scenario.
[0034] FIG. 22B shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in inter-band CA scenario.
[0035] FIG. 220 shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in SUL scenario.
[0036] FIG. 23 shows an example of transmission options for UL Tx switching.
[0037] FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B show examples of UL Tx switching period location for UL Tx switching between pair of carriers/bands.
[0038] FIG. 25A illustrates a 2Tx UE architecture.
[0039] FIG. 25B illustrates a 3Tx UE architecture with 2 LOs.
[0040] FIG. 250 illustrates a 3Tx UE architecture with 3 LOs.
[0041] FIG. 26 illustrates an example of signaling of uplink transmit antenna switching capability as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0042] FIG. 27 illustrates an example of dual uplink transmission based on uplink transmit antenna switching capability as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
[0043] FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B show examples of transmission options for UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
[0044] FIG. 29 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 2 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
[0045] FIG. 30 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
[0046] FIG. 31 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0047] In the present disclosure, various embodiments are presented as examples of how the disclosed techniques may be implemented and/or how the disclosed techniques may be practiced in environments and scenarios. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that various changes in form and detail can be made therein without departing from the scope. In fact, after reading the description, it will be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art how to implement alternative embodiments. The present embodiments should not be limited by any of the described exemplary embodiments. The embodiments of the present disclosure will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Limitations, features, and/or elements from the disclosed example embodiments may be combined to create further embodiments within the scope of the disclosure. Any figures which highlight the functionality and advantages, are presented for example purposes only. The disclosed architecture is sufficiently flexible and configurable, such that it may be utilized in ways other than that shown. For example, the actions listed in any flowchart may be re-ordered or only optionally used in some embodiments.
[0048] Embodiments may be configured to operate as needed. The disclosed mechanism may be performed when certain criteria are met, for example, in a wireless device, a base station, a radio environment, a network, a combination of the above, and/or the like. Example criteria may be based, at least in part, on for example, wireless device or network node configurations, traffic load, initial system set up, packet sizes, traffic characteristics, a combination of the above, and/or the like. When the one or more criteria are met, various example embodiments may be applied. Therefore, it may be possible to implement example embodiments that selectively implement disclosed protocols.
[0049] A base station may communicate with a mix of wireless devices. Wireless devices and/or base stations may support multiple technologies, and/or multiple releases of the same technology. Wireless devices may have some specific capability(ies) depending on wireless device category and/or capability(ies). When this disclosure refers to a base station communicating with a plurality of wireless devices, this disclosure may refer to a subset of the total wireless devices in a coverage area. This disclosure may refer to, for example, a plurality of wireless devices of a given LTE or 5G release with a given capability and in a given sector of the base station. The plurality of wireless devices in this disclosure may refer to a selected plurality of wireless devices, and/or a subset of total wireless devices in a coverage area which perform according to disclosed methods, and/or the like. There may be a plurality of base stations or a plurality of wireless devices in a coverage area that may not comply with the disclosed methods, for example, those wireless devices or base stations may perform based on older releases of LTE or 5G technology.
[0050] In this disclosure, “a” and “an” and similar phrases are to be interpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” Similarly, any term that ends with the suffix “(s)” is to be interpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” In this disclosure, the term “may” is to be interpreted as “may, for example.” In other words, the term “may” is indicative that the phrase following the term “may” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed by one or more of the various embodiments. The terms “comprises” and “consists of”, as used herein, enumerate one or more components of the element being described. The term “comprises” is interchangeable with “includes” and does not exclude unenumerated components from being included in the element being described. By contrast, “consists of” provides a complete enumeration of the one or more components of the element being described. The term “based on”, as used herein, should be interpreted as “based at least in part on” rather than, for example, “based solely on”. The term “and/or” as used herein represents any possible combination of enumerated elements. For example, “A, B, and/or C” may represent A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; or A, B, and C.
[0051] If A and B are sets and every element of A is an element of B, A is called a subset of B. In this specification, only non-empty sets and subsets are considered. For example, possible subsets of B = {cell! , cell2} are: {cell! }, {cell2}, and {celH , cell2}. The phrase “based on” (or equally “based at least on”) is indicative that the phrase following the term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “in response to” (or equally “in response at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “depending on” (or equally “depending at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “depending on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments. The phrase “employin g/using” (or equally “employing/using at least”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “employin g/using” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.
[0052] The term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether the device is in an operational or non- operational state. Configured may refer to specific settings in a device that effect the operational characteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware, registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within a device, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state, to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “a control message to cause in a device” may mean that a control message has parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics or may be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether the device is in an operational or non-operational state.
[0053] In this disclosure, parameters (or equally called, fields, or Information elements: lEs) may comprise one or more information objects, and an information object may comprise one or more other objects. For example, if parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M, and parameter (IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K, and parameter (IE) K comprises parameter (information element) J. Then, for example, N comprises K, and N comprises J. In an example embodiment, when one or more messages comprise a plurality of parameters, it implies that a parameter in the plurality of parameters is in at least one of the one or more messages, but does not have to be in each of the one or more messages.
[0054] Many features presented are described as being optional through the use of “may” or the use of parentheses. For the sake of brevity and legibility, the present disclosure does not explicitly recite each and every permutation that may be obtained by choosing from the set of optional features. The present disclosure is to be interpreted as explicitly disclosing all such permutations. For example, a system described as having three optional features may be embodied in seven ways, namely with just one of the three possible features, with any two of the three possible features or with three of the three possible features.
[0055] Many of the elements described in the disclosed embodiments may be implemented as modules. A module is defined here as an element that performs a defined function and has a defined interface to other elements. The modules described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (e.g. hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, which may be behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may be implemented as a software routine written in a computer language configured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++, Fortran, Java, Basic, MATLAB or the like) or a modeling/simulation program such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, or LabVI EWMathScript. It may be possible to implement modules using physical hardware that incorporates discrete or programmable analog, digital and/or quantum hardware. Examples of programmable hardware comprise: computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, applicationspecific integrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); and complex programmable logic devices (OPLDs). Computers, microcontrollers and microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C, C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed using hardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware description language (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internal hardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device. The mentioned technologies are often used in combination to achieve the result of a functional module.
[0056] FIG. 1A illustrates an example of a mobile communication network 100 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. The mobile communication network 100 may be, for example, a public land mobile network (PLMN) run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG. 1A, the mobile communication network 100 includes a core network (CN) 102, a radio access network (RAN) 104, and a wireless device 106.
[0057] The CN 102 may provide the wireless device 106 with an interface to one or more data networks (DNs), such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the CN 102 may set up end-to-end connections between the wireless device 106 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the wireless device 106, and provide charging functionality.
[0058] The RAN 104 may connect the CN 102 to the wireless device 106 through radio communications over an air interface. As part of the radio communications, the RAN 104 may provide scheduling, radio resource management, and retransmission protocols. The communication direction from the RAN 104 to the wireless device 106 over the air interface is known as the downlink and the communication direction from the wireless device 106 to the RAN 104 over the air interface is known as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using frequency division duplexing (FDD), time-division duplexing (TDD), and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
[0059] The term wireless device may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass any mobile device or fixed (non-mobile) device for which wireless communication is needed or usable. For example, a wireless device may be a telephone, smart phone, tablet, computer, laptop, sensor, meter, wearable device, Internet of Things (loT) device, vehicle road side unit (RSU), relay node, automobile, and/or any combination thereof. The term wireless device encompasses other terminology, including user equipment (UE), user terminal (UT), access terminal (AT), mobile station, handset, wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU), and/or wireless communication device.
[0060] The RAN 104 may include one or more base stations (not shown). The term base station may be used throughout this disclosure to refer to and encompass a Node B (associated with UMTS and/or 3G standards), an Evolved Node B (eNB, associated with E-UTRA and/or 4G standards), a remote radio head (RRH), a baseband processing unit coupled to one or more RRHs, a repeater node or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node, a Next Generation Evolved Node B (ng-eNB), a Generation Node B (gNB, associated with NR and/or 5G standards), an access point (AP, associated with, for example, WiFi or any other suitable wireless communication standard), and/or any combination thereof. A base station may comprise at least one gNB Central Unit (gNB-CU) and at least one a gNB Distributed Unit (gNB-DU).
[0061] A base station included in the RAN 104 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the wireless device 106 over the air interface. For example, one or more of the base stations may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). The size of a cell may be determined by a range at which a receiver (e.g., a base station receiver) can successfully receive the transmissions from a transmitter (e.g., a wireless device transmitter) operating in the cell. Together, the cells of the base stations may provide radio coverage to the wireless device 106 over a wide geographic area to support wireless device mobility.
[0062] In addition to three-sector sites, other implementations of base stations are possible. For example, one or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as a sectored site with more or less than three sectors. One or more of the base stations in the RAN 104 may be implemented as an access point, as a baseband processing unit coupled to several remote radio heads (RRHs), and/or as a repeater or relay node used to extend the coverage area of a donor node. A baseband processing unit coupled to RRHs may be part of a centralized or cloud RAN architecture, where the baseband processing unit may be either centralized in a pool of baseband processing units or virtualized. A repeater node may amplify and rebroadcast a radio signal received from a donor node. A relay node may perform the same/similar functions as a repeater node but may decode the radio signal received from the donor node to remove noise before amplifying and rebroadcasting the radio signal.
[0063] The RAN 104 may be deployed as a homogenous network of macrocell base stations that have similar antenna patterns and similar high-level transmit powers. The RAN 104 may be deployed as a heterogeneous network. In heterogeneous networks, small cell base stations may be used to provide small coverage areas, for example, coverage areas that overlap with the comparatively larger coverage areas provided by macrocell base stations. The small coverage areas may be provided in areas with high data traffic (or so-called “hotspots”) or in areas with weak macrocell coverage. Examples of small cell base stations include, in order of decreasing coverage area, microcell base stations, picocell base stations, and femtocell base stations or home base stations.
[0064] The Third-Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) was formed in 1998 to provide global standardization of specifications for mobile communication networks similar to the mobile communication network 100 in FIG. 1A. To date, 3GPP has produced specifications for three generations of mobile networks: a third generation (3G) network known as Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a fourth generation (4G) network known as Long-Term Evolution (LTE), and a fifth generation (5G) network known as 5G System (5GS). Embodiments of the present disclosure are described with reference to the RAN of a 3GPP 5G network, referred to as next-generation RAN (NG- RAN). Embodiments may be applicable to RANs of other mobile communication networks, such as the RAN 104 in FIG. 1 A, the RANs of earlier 3G and 4G networks, and those of future networks yet to be specified (e.g., a 3GPP 6G network). NG-RAN implements 5G radio access technology known as New Radio (NR) and may be provisioned to implement 4G radio access technology or other radio access technologies, including non-3GPP radio access technologies.
[0065] FIG. 1 B illustrates another example mobile communication network 150 in which embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented. Mobile communication network 150 may be, for example, a PLMN run by a network operator. As illustrated in FIG. 1B, mobile communication network 150 includes a 5G core network (5G-CN) 152, an NG-RAN 154, and UEs 156A and 156B (collectively UEs 156). These components may be implemented and operate in the same or similar manner as corresponding components described with respect to FIG. 1A.
[0066] The 5G-CN 152 provides the UEs 156 with an interface to one or more DNs, such as public DNs (e.g., the Internet), private DNs, and/or intra-operator DNs. As part of the interface functionality, the 5G-CN 152 may set up end- to-end connections between the UEs 156 and the one or more DNs, authenticate the UEs 156, and provide charging functionality. Compared to the ON of a 3GPP 4G network, the basis of the 5G-CN 152 may be a service-based architecture. This means that the architecture of the nodes making up the 5G-CN 152 may be defined as network functions that offer services via interfaces to other network functions. The network functions of the 5G-CN 152 may be implemented in several ways, including as network elements on dedicated or shared hardware, as software instances running on dedicated or shared hardware, or as virtualized functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud-based platform).
[0067] As illustrated in FIG. 1B, the 5G-CN 152 includes an Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF) 158A and a User Plane Function (UPF) 158B, which are shown as one component AMF/UPF 158 in FIG. 1 B for ease of illustration. The UPF 158B may serve as a gateway between the NG-RAN 154 and the one or more DNs. The UPF 158B may perform functions such as packet routing and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane policy rule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classification to support routing of traffic flows to the one or more DNs, quality of service (QoS) handling for the user plane (e.g., packet filtering, gating, uplink/downlink rate enforcement, and uplink traffic verification), downlink packet buffering, and downlink data notification triggering. The UPF 158B may serve as an anchor point for intra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility, an external protocol (or packet) data unit (PDU) session point of interconnect to the one or more DNs, and/or a branching point to support a multi-homed PDU session. The UEs 156 may be configured to receive services through a PDU session, which is a logical connection between a UE and a DN.
[0068] The AMF 158A may perform functions such as Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling termination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS) security control, inter-CN node signaling for mobility between 3GPP access networks, idle mode UE reachability (e.g., control and execution of paging retransmission), registration area management, intra-system and inter-system mobility support, access authentication, access authorization including checking of roaming rights, mobility management control (subscription and policies), network slicing support, and/or session management function (SMF) selection. NAS may refer to the functionality operating between a ON and a UE, and AS may refer to the functionality operating between the UE and a RAN. [0069] The 5G-CN 152 may include one or more additional network functions that are not shown in FIG. 1B for the sake of clarity. For example, the 5G-CN 152 may include one or more of a Session Management Function (SMF), an NR Repository Function (NRF), a Policy Control Function (PCF), a Network Exposure Function (NEF), a Unified Data Management (UDM), an Application Function (AF), and/or an Authentication Server Function (AUSF).
[0070] The NG-RAN 154 may connect the 5G-CN 152 to the UEs 156 through radio communications over the air interface. The NG-RAN 154 may include one or more gNBs, illustrated as gNB 160A and gNB 160B (collectively gNBs 160) and/or one or more ng-eNBs, illustrated as ng-eNB 162A and ng-eNB 162B (collectively ng-eNBs 162). The gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may be more generically referred to as base stations. The gNBs 160 and ng-eNBs 162 may include one or more sets of antennas for communicating with the UEs 156 over an air interface. For example, one or more of the gNBs 160 and/or one or more of the ng-eNBs 162 may include three sets of antennas to respectively control three cells (or sectors). Together, the cells of the gNBs 160 and the ng-eNBs 162 may provide radio coverage to the UEs 156 over a wide geographic area to support UE mobility.
[0071] As shown in FIG. 1 B, the gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the 5G-CN 152 by means of an NG interface and to other base stations by an Xn interface. The NG and Xn interfaces may be established using direct physical connections and/or indirect connections over an underlying transport network, such as an internet protocol (IP) transport network. The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to the UEs 156 by means of a Uu interface. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 1B, gNB 160A may be connected to the UE 156A by means of a Uu interface. The NG, Xn, and Uu interfaces are associated with a protocol stack. The protocol stacks associated with the interfaces may be used by the network elements in FIG. 1 B to exchange data and signaling messages and may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user. The control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
[0072] The gNBs 160 and/or the ng-eNBs 162 may be connected to one or more AMF/UPF functions of the 5G-CN 152, such as the AMF/UPF 158, by means of one or more NG interfaces. For example, the gNB 160A may be connected to the UPF 158B of the AMF/UPF 158 by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface. The NG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g., non-guaranteed delivery) of user plane PDUs between the gNB 160A and the UPF 158B. The gNB 160A may be connected to the AMF 158A by means of an NG-Control plane (NG-C) interface. The NG-0 interface may provide, for example, NG interface management, UE context management, UE mobility management, transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, and configuration transfer and/or warning message transmission.
[0073] The gNBs 160 may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over the Uu interface. For example, the gNB 160A may provide NR user plane and control plane protocol terminations toward the UE 156A over a Uu interface associated with a first protocol stack. The ng-eNBs 162 may provide Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UEs 156 over a Uu interface, where E-UTRA refers to the 3GPP 4G radio-access technology. For example, the ng-eNB 162B may provide E-UTRA user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards the UE 156B over a Uu interface associated with a second protocol stack.
[0074] The 5G-CN 152 was described as being configured to handle NR and 4G radio accesses. It will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art that it may be possible for NR to connect to a 4G core network in a mode known as “non-standalone operation.” In non-standalone operation, a 4G core network is used to provide (or at least support) control-plane functionality (e.g., initial access, mobility, and paging). Although only oneAMF/UPF 158 is shown in FIG. 1 B, one g N B or ng-eNB may be connected to multiple AMF/UPF nodes to provide redundancy and/or to load share across the multiple AMF/UPF nodes.
[0075] As discussed, an interface (e.g., Uu, Xn, and NG interfaces) between the network elements in FIG. 1 B may be associated with a protocol stack that the network elements use to exchange data and signaling messages. A protocol stack may include two planes: a user plane and a control plane. The user plane may handle data of interest to a user, and the control plane may handle signaling messages of interest to the network elements.
[0076] FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B respectively illustrate examples of NR user plane and NR control plane protocol stacks for the Uu interface that lies between a UE 210 and a gNB 220. The protocol stacks illustrated in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B may be the same or similar to those used for the Uu interface between, for example, the UE 156A and the gNB 160A shown in FIG. 1B.
[0077] FIG. 2A illustrates a NR user plane protocol stack comprising five layers implemented in the UE 210 and the gNB 220. At the bottom of the protocol stack, physical layers (PHYs) 211 and 221 may provide transport services to the higher layers of the protocol stack and may correspond to layer 1 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model. The next four protocols above PHYs 211 and 221 comprise media access control layers (MAGs) 212 and 222, radio link control layers (RLCs) 213 and 223, packet data convergence protocol layers (PDOPs) 214 and 224, and service data application protocol layers (SDAPs) 215 and 225. Together, these four protocols may make up layer 2, or the data link layer, of the OSI model.
[0078] FIG. 3 illustrates an example of services provided between protocol layers of the NR user plane protocol stack. Starting from the top of FIG. 2A and FIG. 3, the SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform QoS flow handling. The UE 210 may receive services through a PDU session, which may be a logical connection between the UE 210 and a DN. The PDU session may have one or more QoS flows. A UPF of a CN (e.g., the UPF 158B) may map IP packets to the one or more QoS flows of the PDU session based on QoS requirements (e.g., in terms of delay, data rate, and/or error rate). The SDAPs 215 and 225 may perform mapping/de-mapping between the one or more QoS flows and one or more data radio bearers. The mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers may be determined by the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220. The SDAP 215 at the UE 210 may be informed of the mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers through reflective mapping or control signaling received from the gNB 220. For reflective mapping, the SDAP 225 at the gNB 220 may mark the downlink packets with a QoS flow indicator (QFI), which may be observed by the SDAP 215 at the UE 210 to determine the mapping/de-mapping between the QoS flows and the data radio bearers. [0079] The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform header compression/decompression to reduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted over the air interface, ciphering/deciphering to prevent unauthorized decoding of data transmitted over the air interface, and integrity protection (to ensure control messages originate from intended sources. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform retransmissions of undelivered packets, in-sequence delivery and reordering of packets, and removal of packets received in duplicate due to, for example, an intra-gNB handover. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform packet duplication to improve the likelihood of the packet being received and, at the receiver, remove any duplicate packets. Packet duplication may be useful for services that require high reliability.
[0080] Although not shown in FIG. 3, PDCPs 214 and 224 may perform mapping/de-mapping between a split radio bearer and RLC channels in a dual connectivity scenario. Dual connectivity is a technique that allows a UE to connect to two cells or, more generally, two cell groups: a master cell group (MCG) and a secondary cell group (SCG). A split bearer is when a single radio bearer, such as one of the radio bearers provided by the PDCPs 214 and 224 as a service to the SDAPs 215 and 225, is handled by cell groups in dual connectivity. The PDCPs 214 and 224 may map/de-map the split radio bearer between RLC channels belonging to cell groups.
[0081] The RLCs 213 and 223 may perform segmentation, retransmission through Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ), and removal of duplicate data units received from MACs 212 and 222, respectively. The RLCs 213 and 223 may support three transmission modes: transparent mode (TM); unacknowledged mode (UM); and acknowledged mode (AM). Based on the transmission mode an RLC is operating, the RLC may perform one or more of the noted functions. The RLC configuration may be per logical channel with no dependency on numerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. As shown in FIG. 3, the RLCs 213 and 223 may provide RLC channels as a service to PDCPs 214 and 224, respectively.
[0082] The MACs 212 and 222 may perform multiplexing/demultiplexing of logical channels and/or mapping between logical channels and transport channels. The multiplexing/demultiplexing may include multiplexing/demultiplexing of data units, belonging to the one or more logical channels, into/from Transport Blocks (TBs) delivered to/from the PHYs
211 and 221. The MAC 222 may be configured to perform scheduling, scheduling information reporting, and priority handling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling. Scheduling may be performed in the g N B 220 (at the MAC 222) for downlink and uplink. The MACs 212 and 222 may be configured to perform error correction through Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) (e.g., one HARQ entity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priority handling between logical channels of the UE 210 by means of logical channel prioritization, and/or padding. The MACs
212 and 222 may support one or more numerologies and/or transmission timings. In an example, mapping restrictions in a logical channel prioritization may control which numerology and/or transmission timing a logical channel may use. As shown in FIG. 3, the MACs 212 and 222 may provide logical channels as a service to the RLCs 213 and 223.
[0083] The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform mapping of transport channels to physical channels and digital and analog signal processing functions for sending and receiving information over the air interface. These digital and analog signal processing functions may include, for example, coding/decoding and modulation/demodulation. The PHYs 211 and 221 may perform multi-antenna mapping. As shown in FIG. 3, the PHYs 211 and 221 may provide one or more transport channels as a service to the MAGs 212 and 222.
[0084] FIG. 4A illustrates an example downlink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack. FIG. 4A illustrates a downlink data flow of three IP packets (n, n+1, and m) through the NR user plane protocol stack to generate two TBs at the gNB 220. An uplink data flow through the NR user plane protocol stack may be similar to the downlink data flow depicted in FIG. 4A.
[0085] The downlink data flow of FIG. 4A begins when SDAP 225 receives the three IP packets from one or more QoS flows and maps the three packets to radio bearers. In FIG. 4A, the SDAP 225 maps IP packets n and n+1 to a first radio bearer 402 and maps IP packet m to a second radio bearer 404. An SDAP header (labeled with an “H” in FIG. 4A) is added to an IP packet. The data unit from/to a higher protocol layer is referred to as a service data unit (SDU) of the lower protocol layer and the data unit to/from a lower protocol layer is referred to as a protocol data unit (PDU) of the higher protocol layer. As shown in FIG. 4A, the data unit from the SDAP 225 is an SDU of lower protocol layer PDCP 224 and is a PDU of the SDAP 225.
[0086] The remaining protocol layers in FIG. 4A may perform their associated functionality (e.g. , with respect to FIG. 3), add corresponding headers, and forward their respective outputs to the next lower layer. For example, the PDCP 224 may perform IP-header compression and ciphering and forward its output to the RLC 223. The RLC 223 may optionally perform segmentation (e.g., as shown for IP packet m in FIG. 4A) and forward its output to the MAC 222. The MAC 222 may multiplex a number of RLC PDUs and may attach a MAC subheader to an RLC PDU to form a transport block. In NR, the MAC subheaders may be distributed across the MAC PDU, as illustrated in FIG. 4A. In LTE, the MAC subheaders may be entirely located at the beginning of the MAC PDU. The NR MAC PDU structure may reduce processing time and associated latency because the MAC PDU subheaders may be computed before the full MAC PDU is assembled.
[0087] FIG. 4B illustrates an example format of a MAC subheader in a MAC PDU. The MAC subheader includes: an SDU length field for indicating the length (e.g., in bytes) of the MAC SDU to which the MAC subheader corresponds; a logical channel identifier (LCID) field for identifying the logical channel from which the MAC SDU originated to aid in the demultiplexing process; a flag (F) for indicating the size of the SDU length field; and a reserved bit (R) field for future use.
[0088] FIG. 4B further illustrates MAC control elements (CEs) inserted into the MAC PDU by a MAC, such as MAC 212 or MAC 222. For example, FIG. 4B illustrates two MAC CEs inserted into the MAC PDU. MAC CEs may be inserted at the beginning of a MAC PDU for downlink transmissions (as shown in FIG. 4B) and at the end of a MAC PDU for uplink transmissions. MAC CEs may be used for in-band control signaling. Example MAC CEs include: scheduling-related MAC CEs, such as buffer status reports and power headroom reports; activation/deactivation MAC CEs, such as those for activation/deactivation of PDCP duplication detection, channel state information (CSI) reporting, sounding reference signal (SRS) transmission, and prior configured components; discontinuous reception (DRX) related MAC CEs; timing advance MAC CEs; and random access related MAC CEs. A MAC CE may be preceded by a MAC subheader with a similar format as described for MAC SDUs and may be identified with a reserved value in the LCID field that indicates the type of control information included in the MAC CE.
[0089] Before describing the NR control plane protocol stack, logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels are first described as well as a mapping between the channel types. One or more of the channels may be used to carry out functions associated with the NR control plane protocol stack described later below.
[0090] FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B illustrate, for downlink and uplink respectively, a mapping between logical channels, transport channels, and physical channels. Information is passed through channels between the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY of the NR protocol stack. A logical channel may be used between the RLC and the MAC and may be classified as a control channel that carries control and configuration information in the NR control plane or as a traffic channel that carries data in the NR user plane. A logical channel may be classified as a dedicated logical channel that is dedicated to a specific UE or as a common logical channel that may be used by more than one UE. A logical channel may also be defined by the type of information it carries. The set of logical channels defined by NR include, for example:
[0091] - a paging control channel (POOH) for carrying paging messages used to page a UE whose location is not known to the network on a cell level;
[0092] - a broadcast control channel (BOOH) for carrying system information messages in the form of a master information block (MIB) and several system information blocks (SIBs), wherein the system information messages may be used by the UEs to obtain information about how a cell is configured and how to operate within the cell;
[0093] - a common control channel (COCH) for carrying control messages together with random access;
[0094] - a dedicated control channel (DOCH) for carrying control messages to/from a specific the UE to configure the UE; and
[0095] - a dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) for carrying user data to/from a specific the UE.
[0096] T ransport channels are used between the MAC and PHY layers and may be defined by how the information they carry is transmitted over the air interface. The set of transport channels defined by NR include, for example: [0097] - a paging channel (PCH) for carrying paging messages that originated from the PCCH;
[0098] - a broadcast channel (BOH) for carrying the MIB from the BCCH;
[0099] - a downlink shared channel (DL-SCH) for carrying downlink data and signaling messages, including the SIBs from the BCCH;
[0100] -- an uplink shared channel (UL-SCH) for carrying uplink data and signaling messages; and
[0101] - a random access channel (RACH) for allowing a UE to contact the network without any prior scheduling. [0102] The PHY may use physical channels to pass information between processing levels of the PHY. A physical channel may have an associated set of time-frequency resources for carrying the information of one or more transport channels. The PHY may generate control information to support the low-level operation of the PHY and provide the control information to the lower levels of the PHY via physical control channels, known as L1/L2 control channels. The set of physical channels and physical control channels defined by NR include, for example:
[0103] -- a physical broadcast channel (PBOH) for carrying the MIB from the BOH; [0104] -- a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) for carrying downlink data and signaling messages from the DL-SCH, as well as paging messages from the PCH;
[0105] -- a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) for carrying downlink control information (DOI), which may include downlink scheduling commands, uplink scheduling grants, and uplink power control commands;
[0106] -- a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) for carrying uplink data and signaling messages from the UL- SCH and in some instances uplink control information (UCI) as described below;
[0107] -- a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) for carrying UCI, which may include HARQ acknowledgments, channel quality indicators (CQI), pre-coding matrix indicators (PMI), rank indicators (Rl), and scheduling requests (SR); and
[0108] -- a physical random access channel (PRACH) for random access.
[0109] Similar to the physical control channels, the physical layer generates physical signals to support the low-level operation of the physical layer. As shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B, the physical layer signals defined by NR include: primary synchronization signals (PSS), secondary synchronization signals (SSS), channel state information reference signals (CSI-RS), demodulation reference signals (DMRS), sounding reference signals (SRS), and phase-tracking reference signals (PT-RS). These physical layer signals will be described in greater detail below.
[0110] FIG. 2B illustrates an example NR control plane protocol stack. As shown in FIG. 2B, the NR control plane protocol stack may use the same/similar first four protocol layers as the example NR user plane protocol stack. These four protocol layers include the PHYs 211 and 221 , the MAGs 212 and 222, the RLCs 213 and 223, and the PDOPs 214 and 224. Instead of having the SDAPs 215 and 225 at the top of the stack as in the NR user plane protocol stack, the NR control plane stack has radio resource controls (RRCs) 216 and 226 and NAS protocols 217 and 237 at the top of the NR control plane protocol stack.
[0111] The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 (e.g., the AMF 158A) or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the ON. The NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 via signaling messages, referred to as NAS messages. There is no direct path between the UE 210 and the AMF 230 through which the NAS messages can be transported. The NAS messages may be transported using the AS of the Uu and NG interfaces. NAS protocols 217 and 237 may provide control plane functionality such as authentication, security, connection setup, mobility management, and session management.
[0112] The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 or, more generally, between the UE 210 and the RAN. The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality between the UE 210 and the gNB 220 via signaling messages, referred to as RRC messages. RRC messages may be transmitted between the UE 210 and the RAN using signaling radio bearers and the same/similar PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY protocol layers. The MAC may multiplex control-plane and user-plane data into the same transport block (TB). The RRCs 216 and 226 may provide control plane functionality such as: broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paging initiated by the CN or the RAN; establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE 210 and the RAN; security functions including key management; establishment, configuration, maintenance and release of signaling radio bearers and data radio bearers; mobility functions; QoS management functions; the UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting; detection of and recovery from radio link failure (RLF); and/or NAS message transfer. As part of establishing an RRC connection, RRCs 216 and 226 may establish an RRC context, which may involve configuring parameters for communication between the UE 210 and the RAN.
[0113] FIG. 6 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of a UE. The UE may be the same or similar to the wireless device 106 depicted in FIG. 1A, the UE 210 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other wireless device described in the present disclosure. As illustrated in FIG. 6, a UE may be in at least one of three RRC states: RRC connected 602 (e.g., RRC_CONNECTED), RRC idle 604 (e.g., RRC_I DLE), and RRC inactive 606 (e.g., RRCJNACTIVE).
[0114] In RRC connected 602, the UE has an established RRC context and may have at least one RRC connection with a base station. The base station may be similar to one of the one or more base stations included in the RAN 104 depicted in FIG. 1A, one of the gNBs 160 or ng-eNBs 162 depicted in FIG. 1 B, the gNB 220 depicted in FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, or any other base station described in the present disclosure. The base station with which the UE is connected may have the RRC context for the UE. The RRC context, referred to as the UE context, may comprise parameters for communication between the UE and the base station. These parameters may include, for example: one or more AS contexts; one or more radio link configuration parameters; bearer configuration information (e.g., relating to a data radio bearer, signaling radio bearer, logical channel, QoS flow, and/or PDU session); security information; and/or PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, and/or SDAP layer configuration information. While in RRC connected 602, mobility of the UE may be managed by the RAN (e.g., the RAN 104 or the NG-RAN 154). The UE may measure the signal levels (e.g., reference signal levels) from a serving cell and neighboring cells and report these measurements to the base station currently serving the UE. The UE’s serving base station may request a handover to a cell of one of the neighboring base stations based on the reported measurements. The RRC state may transition from RRC connected 602 to RRC idle 604 through a connection release procedure 608 or to RRC inactive 606 through a connection inactivation procedure 610. [0115] In RRC idle 604, an RRC context may not be established for the UE. In RRC idle 604, the UE may not have an RRC connection with the base station. While in RRC idle 604, the UE may be in a sleep state for the majority of the time (e.g., to conserve battery power). The UE may wake up periodically (e.g., once in every discontinuous reception cycle) to monitor for paging messages from the RAN. Mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through a procedure known as cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602 through a connection establishment procedure 612, which may involve a random access procedure as discussed in greater detail below.
[0116] In RRC inactive 606, the RRC context previously established is maintained in the UE and the base station. This allows for a fast transition to RRC connected 602 with reduced signaling overhead as compared to the transition from RRC idle 604 to RRC connected 602. While in RRC inactive 606, the UE may be in a sleep state and mobility of the UE may be managed by the UE through cell reselection. The RRC state may transition from RRC inactive 606 to RRC connected 602 through a connection resume procedure 614 or to RRC idle 604 though a connection release procedure 616 that may be the same as or similar to connection release procedure 608.
[0117] An RRC state may be associated with a mobility management mechanism. In RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606, mobility is managed by the UE through cell reselection. The purpose of mobility management in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 is to allow the network to be able to notify the UE of an event via a paging message without having to broadcast the paging message over the entire mobile communications network. The mobility management mechanism used in RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 may allow the network to track the UE on a cell-group level so that the paging message may be broadcast over the cells of the cell group that the UE currently resides within instead of the entire mobile communication network. The mobility management mechanisms for RRC idle 604 and RRC inactive 606 track the UE on a cell-group level. They may do so using different granularities of grouping. For example, there may be three levels of cell-grouping granularity: individual cells; cells within a RAN area identified by a RAN area identifier (RAI); and cells within a group of RAN areas, referred to as a tracking area and identified by a tracking area identifier (TAI).
[0118] Tracking areas may be used to track the UE at the CN level. The CN (e.g., the CN 102 or the 5G-CN 152) may provide the UE with a list of TAIs associated with a UE registration area. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell associated with a TAI not included in the list of TAIs associated with the UE registration area, the UE may perform a registration update with the CN to allow the CN to update the UE’s location and provide the UE with a new the UE registration area.
[0119] RAN areas may be used to track the UE at the RAN level. For a UE in RRC inactive 606 state, the UE may be assigned a RAN notification area. A RAN notification area may comprise one or more cell identities, a list of RAIs, or a list of TAIs. In an example, a base station may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. In an example, a cell may belong to one or more RAN notification areas. If the UE moves, through cell reselection, to a cell not included in the RAN notification area assigned to the UE, the UE may perform a notification area update with the RAN to update the UE’s RAN notification area.
[0120] A base station storing an RRC context for a UE or a last serving base station of the UE may be referred to as an anchor base station. An anchor base station may maintain an RRC context for the UE at least during a period of time that the UE stays in a RAN notification area of the anchor base station and/or during a period of time that the UE stays in RRC inactive 606.
[0121] A gNB, such as gNBs 160 in FIG. 1 B, may be split in two parts: a central unit (gNB-CU), and one or more distributed units (gNB-DU). A gNB-CU may be coupled to one or more gNB-DUs using an F1 interface. The gNB-CU may comprise the RRC, the PDCP, and the SDAP. A gNB-DU may comprise the RLC, the MAC, and the PHY. [0122] In NR, the physical signals and physical channels (discussed with respect to FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B) may be mapped onto orthogonal frequency divisional multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. OFDM is a multicarrier communication scheme that transmits data over F orthogonal subcarriers (or tones). Before transmission, the data may be mapped to a series of complex symbols (e.g., M-quadrature amplitude modulation (M-QAM) or M-phase shift keying (M-PSK) symbols), referred to as source symbols, and divided into F parallel symbol streams. The F parallel symbol streams may be treated as though they are in the frequency domain and used as inputs to an Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) block that transforms them into the time domain. The IFFT block may take in F source symbols at a time, one from each of the F parallel symbol streams, and use each source symbol to modulate the amplitude and phase of one of F sinusoidal basis functions that correspond to the F orthogonal subcarriers. The output of the IFFT block may be F time-domain samples that represent the summation of the F orthogonal subcarriers. The F time-domain samples may form a single OFDM symbol. After some processing (e.g., addition of a cyclic prefix) and up-conversion, an OFDM symbol provided by the IFFT block may be transmitted over the air interface on a carrier frequency. The F parallel symbol streams may be mixed using an FFT block before being processed by the IFFT block. This operation produces Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)-precoded OFDM symbols and may be used by UEs in the uplink to reduce the peak to average power ratio (PAPR). Inverse processing may be performed on the OFDM symbol at a receiver using an FFT block to recover the data mapped to the source symbols.
[0123] FIG. 7 illustrates an example configuration of an NR frame into which OFDM symbols are grouped. An NR frame may be identified by a system frame number (SFN). The SFN may repeat with a period of 1024 frames. As illustrated, one NR frame may be 10 milliseconds (ms) in duration and may include 10 subframes that are 1 ms in duration. A subframe may be divided into slots that include, for example, 14 OFDM symbols per slot.
[0124] The duration of a slot may depend on the numerology used for the OFDM symbols of the slot. In NR, a flexible numerology is supported to accommodate different cell deployments (e.g., cells with carrier frequencies below 1 GHz up to cells with carrier frequencies in the mm-wave range). A numerology may be defined in terms of subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration. For a numerology in NR, subcarrier spacings may be scaled up by powers of two from a baseline subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz, and cyclic prefix durations may be scaled down by powers of two from a baseline cyclic prefix duration of 4.7 ps. For example, NR defines numerologies with the following subcarrier spacing/cyclic prefix duration combinations: 15 kHz/4.7 ps; 30 kHz/2.3 ps; 60 kHz/1.2 ps; 120 kHz/0.59 ps; and 240 kHz/0.29 ps.
[0125] A slot may have a fixed number of OFDM symbols (e.g., 14 OFDM symbols). A numerology with a higher subcarrier spacing has a shorter slot duration and, correspondingly, more slots per subframe. FIG. 7 illustrates this numerology-dependent slot duration and slots-per-subframe transmission structure (the numerology with a subcarrier spacing of 240 kHz is not shown in FIG. 7 for ease of illustration). A subframe in NR may be used as a numerologyindependent time reference, while a slot may be used as the unit upon which uplink and downlink transmissions are scheduled. To support low latency, scheduling in NR may be decoupled from the slot duration and start at any OFDM symbol and last for as many symbols as needed for a transmission. These partial slot transmissions may be referred to as mini-slot or subslot transmissions.
[0126] FIG. 8 illustrates an example configuration of a slot in the time and frequency domain for an NR carrier. The slot includes resource elements (REs) and resource blocks (RBs). An RE is the smallest physical resource in NR. An RE spans one OFDM symbol in the time domain by one subcarrier in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An RB spans twelve consecutive REs in the frequency domain as shown in FIG. 8. An NR carrier may be limited to a width of 275 RBs or 275x12 = 3300 subcarriers. Such a limitation, if used, may limit the NR carrier to 50, 100, 200, and 400 MHz for subcarrier spacings of 15, 30, 60, and 120 kHz, respectively, where the 400 MHz bandwidth may be set based on a 400 MHz per carrier bandwidth limit.
[0127] FIG. 8 illustrates a single numerology being used across the entire bandwidth of the NR carrier. In other example configurations, multiple numerologies may be supported on the same carrier.
[0128] NR may support wide carrier bandwidths (e.g., up to 400 MHz for a subcarrier spacing of 120 kHz). Not all UEs may be able to receive the full carrier bandwidth (e.g., due to hardware limitations). Also, receiving the full carrier bandwidth may be prohibitive in terms of UE power consumption. In an example, to reduce power consumption and/or for other purposes, a UE may adapt the size of the UE’s receive bandwidth based on the amount of traffic the UE is scheduled to receive. This is referred to as bandwidth adaptation.
[0129] NR defines bandwidth parts (BWPs) to support UEs not capable of receiving the full carrier bandwidth and to support bandwidth adaptation. In an example, a BMP may be defined by a subset of contiguous RBs on a carrier. A UE may be configured (e.g., via RRC layer) with one or more downlink BWPs and one or more uplink BWPs per serving cell (e.g., up to four downlink BWPs and up to four uplink BWPs per serving cell). At a given time, one or more of the configured BWPs for a serving cell may be active. These one or more BWPs may be referred to as active BWPs of the serving cell. When a serving cell is configured with a secondary uplink carrier, the serving cell may have one or more first active BWPs in the uplink carrier and one or more second active BWPs in the secondary uplink carrier.
[0130] For unpaired spectra, a downlink BWP from a set of configured downlink BWPs may be linked with an uplink BWP from a set of configured uplink BWPs if a downlink BWP index of the downlink BWP and an uplink BWP index of the uplink BWP are the same. For unpaired spectra, a UE may expect that a center frequency for a downlink BWP is the same as a center frequency for an uplink BWP.
[0131] For a downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs on a primary cell (POell), a base station may configure a UE with one or more control resource sets (CORESETs) for at least one search space. A search space is a set of locations in the time and frequency domains where the UE may find control information. The search space may be a UE-specific search space or a common search space (potentially usable by a plurality of UEs). For example, a base station may configure a UE with a common search space, on a POell or on a primary secondary cell (PSOell), in an active downlink BWP.
[0132] For an uplink BWP in a set of configured uplink BWPs, a BS may configure a UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCOH transmissions. A UE may receive downlink receptions (e.g., PDCOH or PDSCH) in a downlink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix duration) for the downlink BWP. The UE may transmit uplink transmissions (e.g., PUCOH or PUSCH) in an uplink BWP according to a configured numerology (e.g., subcarrier spacing and cyclic prefix length for the uplink BWP).
[0133] One or more BWP indicator fields may be provided in Downlink Control Information (DCI). A value of a BWP indicator field may indicate which BWP in a set of configured BWPs is an active downlink BWP for one or more downlink receptions. The value of the one or more BWP indicator fields may indicate an active uplink BWP for one or more uplink transmissions.
[0134] A base station may sem i-statically configure a UE with a default downlink BWP within a set of configured downlink BWPs associated with a PCell. If the base station does not provide the default downlink BWP to the UE, the default downlink BWP may be an initial active downlink BWP. The UE may determine which BWP is the initial active downlink BWP based on a CORESET configuration obtained using the PBCH.
[0135] A base station may configure a UE with a BWP inactivity timer value for a PCell. The UE may start or restart a BWP inactivity timer at any appropriate time. For example, the UE may start or restart the BWP inactivity timer (a) when the UE detects a DOI indicating an active downlink BWP other than a default downlink BWP for a paired spectra operation; or (b) when a UE detects a DOI indicating an active downlink BWP or active uplink BWP other than a default downlink BWP or uplink BWP for an unpaired spectra operation. If the UE does not detect DOI during an interval of time (e.g., 1 ms or 0.5 ms), the UE may run the BWP inactivity timer toward expiration (for example, increment from zero to the BWP inactivity timer value, or decrement from the BWP inactivity timer value to zero). When the BWP inactivity timer expires, the UE may switch from the active downlink BWP to the default downlink BWP.
[0136] In an example, a base station may semi-statically configure a UE with one or more BWPs. A UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to a second BWP in response to receiving a DOI indicating the second BWP as an active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of the BWP inactivity timer (e.g., if the second BWP is the default BWP). [0137] Downlink and uplink BWP switching (where BWP switching refers to switching from a currently active BWP to a not currently active BWP) may be performed independently in paired spectra. In unpaired spectra, downlink and uplink BWP switching may be performed simultaneously. Switching between configured BWPs may occur based on RRC signaling, DOI, expiration of a BWP inactivity timer, and/or an initiation of random access.
[0138] FIG. 9 illustrates an example of bandwidth adaptation using three configured BWPs for an NR carrier. A UE configured with the three BWPs may switch from one BWP to another BWP at a switching point. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9, the BWPs include: a BWP 902 with a bandwidth of 40 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; a BWP 904 with a bandwidth of 10 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; and a BWP 906 with a bandwidth of 20 MHz and a subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz. The BWP 902 may be an initial active BWP, and the BWP 904 may be a default BWP. The UE may switch between BWPs at switching points. In the example of FIG. 9, the UE may switch from the BWP 902 to the BWP 904 at a switching point 908. The switching at the switching point 908 may occur for any suitable reason, for example, in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer (indicating switching to the default BWP) and/or in response to receiving a DOI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 910 from active BWP 904 to BWP 906 in response receiving a DOI indicating BWP 906 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 912 from active BWP 906 to BWP 904 in response to an expiry of a BWP inactivity timer and/or in response receiving a DOI indicating BWP 904 as the active BWP. The UE may switch at a switching point 914 from active BWP 904 to BWP 902 in response receiving a DOI indicating BWP 902 as the active BWP. [0139] If a UE is configured for a secondary cell with a default downlink BWP in a set of configured downlink BWPs and a timer value, UE procedures for switching BWPs on a secondary cell may be the same/similar as those on a primary cell. For example, the UE may use the timer value and the default downlink BWP for the secondary cell in the same/similar manner as the UE would use these values for a primary cell.
[0140] To provide for greater data rates, two or more carriers can be aggregated and simultaneously transmitted to/from the same UE using carrier aggregation (GA). The aggregated carriers in GA may be referred to as component carriers (CCs). When GA is used, there are a number of serving cells for the UE, one for a CC. The CCs may have three configurations in the frequency domain.
[0141] FIG. 10A illustrates the three GA configurations with two CCs. In the intraband, contiguous configuration 1002, the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are located directly adjacent to each other within the frequency band. In the intraband, non-contiguous configuration 1004, the two CCs are aggregated in the same frequency band (frequency band A) and are separated in the frequency band by a gap. In the interband configuration 1006, the two CCs are located in frequency bands (frequency band A and frequency band B).
[0142] In an example, up to 32 CCs may be aggregated. The aggregated CCs may have the same or different bandwidths, subcarrier spacing, and/or duplexing schemes (TDD or FDD). A serving cell for a UE using CA may have a downlink CC. For FDD, one or more uplink CCs may be optionally configured for a serving cell. The ability to aggregate more downlink carriers than uplink carriers may be useful, for example, when the UE has more data traffic in the downlink than in the uplink.
[0143] When CA is used, one of the aggregated cells for a UE may be referred to as a primary cell (PCell). The PCell may be the serving cell that the UE initially connects to at RRC connection establishment, reestablishment, and/or handover. The PCell may provide the UE with NAS mobility information and the security input. UEs may have different PCells. In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the downlink primary CC (DL PCC). In the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the PCell may be referred to as the uplink primary CC (UL PCC). The other aggregated cells for the UE may be referred to as secondary cells (SCells). In an example, the SCells may be configured after the PCell is configured for the UE. For example, an SCell may be configured through an RRC Connection Reconfiguration procedure. In the downlink, the carrier corresponding to an SCell may be referred to as a downlink secondary CC (DL SCC). In the uplink, the carrier corresponding to the SCell may be referred to as the uplink secondary CC (UL SCC).
[0144] Configured SCells for a UE may be activated and deactivated based on, for example, traffic and channel conditions. Deactivation of an SCell may mean that PDCCH and PDSCH reception on the SCell is stopped and PUSCH, SRS, and CQI transmissions on the SCell are stopped. Configured SCells may be activated and deactivated using a MAC CE with respect to FIG. 4B. For example, a MAC CE may use a bitmap (e.g., one bit per SCell) to indicate which SCells (e.g., in a subset of configured SCells) for the UE are activated or deactivated. Configured SCells may be deactivated in response to an expiration of an SCell deactivation timer (e.g., one SCell deactivation timer per SCell). [0145] Downlink control information, such as scheduling assignments and scheduling grants, for a cell may be transmitted on the cell corresponding to the assignments and grants, which is known as self-scheduling. The DOI for the cell may be transmitted on another cell, which is known as cross-carrier scheduling. Uplink control information (e.g., HARQ acknowledgments and channel state feedback, such as CQI, PMI, and/or Rl) for aggregated cells may be transmitted on the PUCOH of the POell. For a larger number of aggregated downlink COs, the PUCOH of the POell may become overloaded. Cells may be divided into multiple PUCOH groups.
[0146] FIG. 10B illustrates an example of how aggregated cells may be configured into one or more PUCOH groups. A PUCOH group 1010 and a PUCOH group 1050 may include one or more downlink COs, respectively. In the example of FIG. 10B, the PUCOH group 1010 includes three downlink COs: a POell 1011, an SCell 1012, and an SCell 1013. The PUCOH group 1050 includes three downlink COs in the present example: a POell 1051, an SCell 1052, and an SCell 1053. One or more uplink COs may be configured as a POell 1021, an SCell 1022, and an SCell 1023. One or more other uplink COs may be configured as a primary SCell (PSCell) 1061, an SCell 1062, and an SCell 1063. Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink COs of the PUCOH group 1010, shown as UC1 1031, UC1 1032, and UC1 1033, may be transmitted in the uplink of the POell 1021. Uplink control information (UCI) related to the downlink COs of the PUCOH group 1050, shown as UC1 1071, UC1 1072, and UC1 1073, may be transmitted in the uplink of the PSCell 1061. In an example, if the aggregated cells depicted in FIG. 10B were not divided into the PUCOH group 1010 and the PUCOH group 1050, a single uplink POell to transmit UCI relating to the downlink COs, and the POell may become overloaded. By dividing transmissions of UCI between the POell 1021 and the PSCell 1061, overloading may be prevented.
[0147] A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier, may be assigned with a physical cell ID and a cell index. The physical cell ID or the cell index may identify a downlink carrier and/or an uplink carrier of the cell, for example, depending on the context in which the physical cell ID is used. A physical cell ID may be determined using a synchronization signal transmitted on a downlink component carrier. A cell index may be determined using RRC messages. In the disclosure, a physical cell ID may be referred to as a carrier ID, and a cell index may be referred to as a carrier index. For example, when the disclosure refers to a first physical cell ID for a first downlink carrier, the disclosure may mean the first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlink carrier. The same/similar concept may apply to, for example, a carrier activation. When the disclosure indicates that a first carrier is activated, the specification may mean that a cell comprising the first carrier is activated.
[0148] In GA, a multi-carrier nature of a PHY may be exposed to a MAC. In an example, a HARQ entity may operate on a serving cell. A transport block may be generated per assignment/grant per serving cell. A transport block and potential HARQ retransmissions of the transport block may be mapped to a serving cell.
[0149] In the downlink, a base station may transmit (e.g., unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast) one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to a UE (e.g., PSS, SSS, CSI-RS, DMRS, and/or PT-RS, as shown in FIG. 5A). In the uplink, the UE may transmit one or more RSs to the base station (e.g., DMRS, PT-RS, and/or SRS, as shown in FIG. 5B). The PSS and the SSS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to synchronize the UE to the base station. The PSS and the SSS may be provided in a synchronization signal (SS) I physical broadcast channel (PBCH) block that includes the PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH. The base station may periodically transmit a burst of SS/PBCH blocks.
[0150] FIG. 11A illustrates an example of an SS/PBCH block's structure and location. A burst of SS/PBCH blocks may include one or more SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., 4 SS/PBCH blocks, as shown in FIG. 11A). Bursts may be transmitted periodically (e.g., every 2 frames or 20 ms). A burst may be restricted to a half-frame (e.g., a first half-frame having a duration of 5 ms). It will be understood that FIG. 11A is an example, and that these parameters (number of SS/PBCH blocks per burst, periodicity of bursts, position of burst within the frame) may be configured based on, for example: a carrier frequency of a cell in which the SS/PBCH block is transmitted; a numerology or subcarrier spacing of the cell; a configuration by the network (e.g., using RRC signaling); or any other suitable factor. In an example, the UE may assume a subcarrier spacing for the SS/PBCH block based on the carrier frequency being monitored, unless the radio network configured the UE to assume a different subcarrier spacing.
[0151] The SS/PBCH block may span one or more OFDM symbols in the time domain (e.g., 4 OFDM symbols, as shown in the example of FIG. 11A) and may span one or more subcarriers in the frequency domain (e.g., 240 contiguous subcarriers). The PSS, the SSS, and the PBCH may have a common center frequency. The PSS may be transmitted first and may span, for example, 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The SSS may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., two symbols later) and may span 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. The PBCH may be transmitted after the PSS (e.g., across the next 3 OFDM symbols) and may span 240 subcarriers.
[0152] The location of the SS/PBCH block in the time and frequency domains may not be known to the UE (e.g., if the UE is searching for the cell). To find and select the cell, the UE may monitor a carrier for the PSS. For example, the UE may monitor a frequency location within the carrier. If the PSS is not found after a certain duration (e.g., 20 ms), the UE may search for the PSS at a different frequency location within the carrier, as indicated by a synchronization raster. If the PSS is found at a location in the time and frequency domains, the UE may determine, based on a known structure of the SS/PBCH block, the locations of the SSS and the PBCH, respectively. The SS/PBCH block may be a celldefining SS block (CD-SSB). In an example, a primary cell may be associated with a CD-SSB. The CD-SSB may be located on a synchronization raster. In an example, a cell selection/search and/or reselection may be based on the CD- SSB.
[0153] The SS/PBCH block may be used by the UE to determine one or more parameters of the cell. For example, the UE may determine a physical cell identifier (PCI) of the cell based on the sequences of the PSS and the SSS, respectively. The UE may determine a location of a frame boundary of the cell based on the location of the SS/PBCH block. For example, the SS/PBCH block may indicate that it has been transmitted in accordance with a transmission pattern, wherein a SS/PBCH block in the transmission pattern is a known distance from the frame boundary.
[0154] The PBCH may use a QPSK modulation and may use forward error correction (FEC). The FEC may use polar coding. One or more symbols spanned by the PBCH may carry one or more DMRSs for demodulation of the PBCH. The PBCH may include an indication of a current system frame number (SFN) of the cell and/or a SS/PBCH block timing index. These parameters may facilitate time synchronization of the UE to the base station. The PBCH may include a master information block (MIB) used to provide the UE with one or more parameters. The MIB may be used by the UE to locate remaining minimum system information (RMSI) associated with the cell. The RMSI may include a System Information Block Type 1 (SIB1 ). The SIB1 may contain information needed by the UE to access the cell. The UE may use one or more parameters of the MIB to monitor PDCOH, which may be used to schedule PDSCH. The PDSCH may include the SIB1. The SIB1 may be decoded using parameters provided in the MIB. The PBCH may indicate an absence of SIB1. Based on the PBCH indicating the absence of SIB1 , the UE may be pointed to a frequency. The UE may search for an SS/PBCH block at the frequency to which the UE is pointed.
[0155] The UE may assume that one or more SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with a same SS/PBCH block index are quasi co-located (QCLed) (e.g. , having the same/similar Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial Rx parameters). The UE may not assume QCL for SS/PBCH block transmissions having different SS/PBCH block indices.
[0156] SS/PBCH blocks (e.g., those within a half-frame) may be transmitted in spatial directions (e.g., using different beams that span a coverage area of the cell). In an example, a first SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a first spatial direction using a first beam, and a second SS/PBCH block may be transmitted in a second spatial direction using a second beam.
[0157] In an example, within a frequency span of a carrier, a base station may transmit a plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. In an example, a first PCI of a first SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks may be different from a second PCI of a second SS/PBCH block of the plurality of SS/PBCH blocks. The PCIs of SS/PBCH blocks transmitted in different frequency locations may be different or the same.
[0158] The CSI-RS may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE to acquire channel state information (CSI). The base station may configure the UE with one or more CSI-RSs for channel estimation or any other suitable purpose. The base station may configure a UE with one or more of the same/similar CSI-RSs. The UE may measure the one or more CSI-RSs. The UE may estimate a downlink channel state and/or generate a CSI report based on the measuring of the one or more downlink CSI-RSs. The UE may provide the CSI report to the base station. The base station may use feedback provided by the UE (e.g., the estimated downlink channel state) to perform link adaptation. [0159] The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more CSI-RS resource sets. A CSI-RS resource may be associated with a location in the time and frequency domains and a periodicity. The base station may selectively activate and/or deactivate a CSI-RS resource. The base station may indicate to the UE that a CSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set is activated and/or deactivated.
[0160] The base station may configure the UE to report CSI measurements. The base station may configure the UE to provide CSI reports periodically, aperiodically, or semi-persistently. For periodic CSI reporting, the UE may be configured with a timing and/or periodicity of a plurality of CSI reports. For aperiodic CSI reporting, the base station may request a CSI report. For example, the base station may command the UE to measure a configured CSI-RS resource and provide a CSI report relating to the measurements. For semi-persistent CSI reporting, the base station may configure the UE to transmit periodically, and selectively activate or deactivate the periodic reporting. The base station may configure the UE with a CSI-RS resource set and CSI reports using RRC signaling.
[0161] The CSI-RS configuration may comprise one or more parameters indicating, for example, up to 32 antenna ports. The UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for a downlink CSI-RS and a control resource set (CORESET) when the downlink CSI-RS and CORESET are spatially GCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of the physical resource blocks (PRBs) configured for the CORESET. The UE may be configured to employ the same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks when the downlink CSI-RS and SS/PBCH blocks are spatially QCLed and resource elements associated with the downlink CSI-RS are outside of PRBs configured for the SS/PBCH blocks.
[0162] Downlink DMRSs may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for channel estimation. For example, the downlink DMRS may be used for coherent demodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH). An NR network may support one or more variable and/or configurable DMRS patterns for data demodulation. At least one downlink DMRS configuration may support a front-loaded DMRS pattern. A front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi- statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. a maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for PDSCH. A DMRS configuration may support one or more DMRS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DMRS configuration may support up to eight orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. For multiuser-MI MO, a DMRS configuration may support up to 4 orthogonal downlink DMRS ports per UE. A radio network may support (e.g., at least for CP-OFDM) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence may be the same or different. The base station may transmit a downlink DMRS and a corresponding PDSCH using the same precoding matrix. The UE may use the one or more downlink DMRSs for coherent demodulation/channel estimation of the PDSCH.
[0163] In an example, a transmitter (e.g., a base station) may use a precoder matrices for a part of a transmission bandwidth. For example, the transmitter may use a first precoder matrix for a first bandwidth and a second precoder matrix for a second bandwidth. The first precoder matrix and the second precoder matrix may be different based on the first bandwidth being different from the second bandwidth. The UE may assume that a same precoding matrix is used across a set of PRBs. The set of PRBs may be denoted as a precoding resource block group (PRG).
[0164] A PDSCH may comprise one or more layers. The UE may assume that at least one symbol with DMRS is present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PDSCH. A higher layer may configure up to 3 DMRSs for the PDSCH.
[0165] Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted by a base station and used by a UE for phase-noise compensation. Whether a downlink PT-RS is present or not may depend on an RRC configuration. The presence and/or pattern of the downlink PT-RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis using a combination of RRC signaling and/or an association with one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., modulation and coding scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of a downlink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MOS. An NR network may support a plurality of PT-RS densities defined in the time and/or frequency domains. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource. Downlink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE. Downlink PT-RS may be transmitted on symbols to facilitate phase tracking at the receiver.
[0166] The UE may transmit an uplink DMRS to a base station for channel estimation. For example, the base station may use the uplink DMRS for coherent demodulation of one or more uplink physical channels. For example, the UE may transmit an uplink DMRS with a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The uplink DM-RS may span a range of frequencies that is similar to a range of frequencies associated with the corresponding physical channel. The base station may configure the UE with one or more uplink DMRS configurations. At least one DMRS configuration may support a front- loaded DMRS pattern. The front-loaded DMRS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., one or two adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more uplink DMRSs may be configured to transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or a PUCCH. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with a number (e.g. maximum number) of front-loaded DMRS symbols for the PUSCH and/or the PUCCH, which the UE may use to schedule a single-symbol DMRS and/or a double-symbol DMRS. An NR network may support (e.g., for cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM)) a common DMRS structure for downlink and uplink, wherein a DMRS location, a DMRS pattern, and/or a scrambling sequence for the DMRS may be the same or different.
[0167] A PUSCH may comprise one or more layers, and the UE may transmit at least one symbol with DMRS present on a layer of the one or more layers of the PUSCH. In an example, a higher layer may configure up to three DMRSs for the PUSCH.
[0168] Uplink PT-RS (which may be used by a base station for phase tracking and/or phase-noise compensation) may or may not be present depending on an RRC configuration of the UE. The presence and/or pattern of uplink PT- RS may be configured on a UE-specific basis by a combination of RRC signaling and/or one or more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS)), which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamic presence of uplink PT-RS may be associated with one or more DCI parameters comprising at least MCS. A radio network may support a plurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain. When present, a frequency domain density may be associated with at least one configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. The UE may assume a same precoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be fewer than a number of DMRS ports in a scheduled resource. For example, uplink PT-RS may be confined in the scheduled time/frequency duration for the UE.
[0169] SRS may be transmitted by a UE to a base station for channel state estimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/or link adaptation. SRS transmitted by the UE may allow a base station to estimate an uplink channel state at one or more frequencies. A scheduler at the base station may employ the estimated uplink channel state to assign one or more resource blocks for an uplink PUSCH transmission from the UE. The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS resource sets. For an SRS resource set, the base station may configure the UE with one or more SRS resources. An SRS resource set applicability may be configured by a higher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter. For example, when a higher layer parameter indicates beam management, an SRS resource in a SRS resource set of the one or more SRS resource sets (e.g., with the same/similar time domain behavior, periodic, aperiodic, and/or the like) may be transmitted at a time instant (e.g., simultaneously). The UE may transmit one or more SRS resources in SRS resource sets. An NR network may support aperiodic, periodic and/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions. The UE may transmit SRS resources based on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or more trigger types may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or one or more DOI formats. In an example, at least one DOI format may be employed for the UE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resource sets. An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higher layer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggered based on one or more DOI formats. In an example, when PUSCH and SRS are transmitted in a same slot, the UE may be configured to transmit SRS after a transmission of a PUSCH and a corresponding uplink DMRS.
[0170] The base station may semi-statically configure the UE with one or more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one of following: a SRS resource configuration identifier; a number of SRS ports; time domain behavior of an SRS resource configuration (e.g., an indication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS); slot, minislot, and/or subframe level periodicity; offset for a periodic and/or an aperiodic SRS resource; a number of OFDM symbols in an SRS resource; a starting OFDM symbol of an SRS resource; an SRS bandwidth; a frequency hopping bandwidth; a cyclic shift; and/or an SRS sequence ID.
[0171] An antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. If a first symbol and a second symbol are transmitted on the same antenna port, the receiver may infer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, and/or the like) for conveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel for conveying the first symbol on the antenna port. A first antenna port and a second antenna port may be referred to as quasi colocated (QCLed) if one or more large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol on the first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel over which a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed. The one or more large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: a delay spread; a Doppler spread; a Doppler shift; an average gain; an average delay; and/or spatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.
[0172] Channels that use beamforming require beam management. Beam management may comprise beam measurement, beam selection, and beam indication. A beam may be associated with one or more reference signals. For example, a beam may be identified by one or more beamformed reference signals. The UE may perform downlink beam measurement based on downlink reference signals (e.g., a channel state information reference signal (OS l-RS)) and generate a beam measurement report. The UE may perform the downlink beam measurement procedure after an RRC connection is set up with a base station. [0173] FIG. 11B illustrates an example of channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) that are mapped in the time and frequency domains. A square shown in FIG. 11 B may span a resource block (RB) within a bandwidth of a cell. A base station may transmit one or more RRC messages comprising CSI-RS resource configuration parameters indicating one or more CSI-RSs. One or more of the following parameters may be configured by higher layer signaling (e.g. , RRC and/or MAC signaling) for a CSI-RS resource configuration: a CSI-RS resource configuration identity, a number of CSI-RS ports, a CSI-RS configuration (e.g., symbol and resource element (RE) locations in a subframe), a CSI-RS subframe configuration (e.g., subframe location, offset, and periodicity in a radio frame), a CSI-RS power parameter, a CSI-RS sequence parameter, a code division multiplexing (CDM) type parameter, a frequency density, a transmission comb, quasi co-location (QCL) parameters (e.g., QCL-scramblingidentity, crs-portscount, mbsfn- subframeconfiglist, csi-rs-configZPid, qcl-csi-rs-configNZPid), and/or other radio resource parameters.
[0174] The three beams illustrated in FIG. 11 B may be configured for a UE in a UE-specific configuration. Three beams are illustrated in FIG. 11 B (beam #1 , beam #2, and beam #3), more or fewer beams may be configured. Beam #1 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1101 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a first symbol. Beam #2 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1102 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a second symbol. Beam #3 may be allocated with CSI-RS 1103 that may be transmitted in one or more subcarriers in an RB of a third symbol. By using frequency division multiplexing (FDM), a base station may use other subcarriers in a same RB (for example, those that are not used to transmit CSI-RS 1101) to transmit another CSI-RS associated with a beam for another UE. By using time domain multiplexing (TDM), beams used for the UE may be configured such that beams for the UE use symbols from beams of other UEs.
[0175] CSI-RSs such as those illustrated in FIG. 11 B (e.g., CSI-RS 1101, 1102, 1103) may be transmitted by the base station and used by the UE for one or more measurements. For example, the UE may measure a reference signal received power (RSRP) of configured CSI-RS resources. The base station may configure the UE with a reporting configuration and the UE may report the RSRP measurements to a network (for example, via one or more base stations) based on the reporting configuration. In an example, the base station may determine, based on the reported measurement results, one or more transmission configuration indication (TCI) states comprising a number of reference signals. In an example, the base station may indicate one or more TCI states to the UE (e.g., via RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and/or a DCI). The UE may receive a downlink transmission with a receive (Rx) beam determined based on the one or more TCI states. In an example, the UE may or may not have a capability of beam correspondence. If the UE has the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may determine a spatial domain filter of a transmit (Tx) beam based on a spatial domain filter of the corresponding Rx beam. If the UE does not have the capability of beam correspondence, the UE may perform an uplink beam selection procedure to determine the spatial domain filter of the Tx beam. The UE may perform the uplink beam selection procedure based on one or more sounding reference signal (SRS) resources configured to the UE by the base station. The base station may select and indicate uplink beams for the UE based on measurements of the one or more SRS resources transmitted by the UE. [0176] In a beam management procedure, a UE may assess (e.g. , measure) a channel quality of one or more beam pair links, a beam pair link comprising a transmitting beam transmitted by a base station and a receiving beam received by the UE. Based on the assessment, the UE may transmit a beam measurement report indicating one or more beam pair quality parameters comprising, e.g., one or more beam identifications (e.g., a beam index, a reference signal index, or the like), RSRP, a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI), and/or a rank indicator (Rl). [0177] FIG. 12A illustrates examples of three downlink beam management procedures: P1, P2, and P3. Procedure P1 may enable a UE measurement on transmit (Tx) beams of a transmission reception point (TRP) (or multiple TRPs), e.g., to support a selection of one or more base station Tx beams and/or UE Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of P1). Beamforming at a TRP may comprise a Tx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of P1 and P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at a UE may comprise an Rx beam sweep for a set of beams (shown, in the bottom rows of P1 and P3, as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure P2 may be used to enable a UE measurement on Tx beams of a TRP (shown, in the top row of P2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure P2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1 , or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement. The UE may perform procedure P3 for Rx beam determination by using the same Tx beam at the base station and sweeping an Rx beam at the UE.
[0178] FIG. 12B illustrates examples of three uplink beam management procedures: U1, U2, and U3. Procedure U1 may be used to enable a base station to perform a measurement on Tx beams of a UE, e.g., to support a selection of one or more UE Tx beams and/or base station Rx beams (shown as ovals in the top row and bottom row, respectively, of U1). Beamforming at the UE may include, e.g., a Tx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown in the bottom rows of U1 and U3 as ovals rotated in a clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Beamforming at the base station may include, e.g., an Rx beam sweep from a set of beams (shown, in the top rows of U1 and U2, as ovals rotated in a counter-clockwise direction indicated by the dashed arrow). Procedure U2 may be used to enable the base station to adjust its Rx beam when the UE uses a fixed Tx beam. The UE and/or the base station may perform procedure U2 using a smaller set of beams than is used in procedure P1, or using narrower beams than the beams used in procedure P1. This may be referred to as beam refinement The UE may perform procedure U3 to adjust its Tx beam when the base station uses a fixed Rx beam.
[0179] A UE may initiate a beam failure recovery (BFR) procedure based on detecting a beam failure. The UE may transmit a BFR request (e.g., a preamble, a UCI, an SR, a MAC CE, and/or the like) based on the initiating of the BFR procedure. The UE may detect the beam failure based on a determination that a quality of beam pair link(s) of an associated control channel is unsatisfactory (e.g., having an error rate higher than an error rate threshold, a received signal power lower than a received signal power threshold, an expiration of a timer, and/or the like).
[0180] The UE may measure a quality of a beam pair link using one or more reference signals (RSs) comprising one or more SS/PBCH blocks, one or more CSI-RS resources, and/or one or more demodulation reference signals (DMRSs). A quality of the beam pair link may be based on one or more of a block error rate (BLER), an RSRP value, a signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) value, a reference signal received quality (RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The base station may indicate that an RS resource is quasi co-located (QCLed) with one or more DM-RSs of a channel (e.g., a control channel, a shared data channel, and/or the like). The RS resource and the one or more DMRSs of the channel may be QCLed when the channel characteristics (e.g., Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread, spatial Rx parameter, fading, and/or the like) from a transmission via the RS resource to the UE are similar or the same as the channel characteristics from a transmission via the channel to the UE.
[0181] A network (e.g., a gNB and/or an ng-eNB of a network) and/or the UE may initiate a random access procedure. A UE in an RRC_I DLE state and/or an RRC_I NACTI VE state may initiate the random access procedure to request a connection setup to a network. The UE may initiate the random access procedure from an RRC_CONNECTED state. The UE may initiate the random access procedure to request uplink resources (e.g., for uplink transmission of an SR when there is no PUCCH resource available) and/or acquire uplink timing (e.g., when uplink synchronization status is non-synchronized). The UE may initiate the random access procedure to request one or more system information blocks (SIBs) (e.g., other system information such as SIB2, SIB3, and/or the like). The UE may initiate the random access procedure for a beam failure recovery request. A network may initiate a random access procedure for a handover and/or for establishing time alignment for an SCell addition.
[0182] FIG. 13A illustrates a four-step contention-based random access procedure. Prior to initiation of the procedure, a base station may transmit a configuration message 1310 to the UE. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A comprises transmission of four messages: a Msg 1 1311, a Msg 2 1312, a Msg 31313, and a Msg 41314. The Msg 1 1311 may include and/or be referred to as a preamble (or a random access preamble). The Msg 2 1312 may include and/or be referred to as a random access response (RAR).
[0183] The configuration message 1310 may be transmitted, for example, using one or more RRC messages. The one or more RRC messages may indicate one or more random access channel (RACH) parameters to the UE. The one or more RACH parameters may comprise at least one of following: general parameters for one or more random access procedures (e.g., RACH-configGeneral}; cell-specific parameters (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon'); and/or dedicated parameters (e.g., RACH-configDedicated}. The base station may broadcast or multicast the one or more RRC messages to one or more UEs. The one or more RRC messages may be UE-specific (e.g., dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a UE in an RRC_CONNECTED state and/or in an RRCJNACTIVE state). The UE may determine, based on the one or more RACH parameters, a time-frequency resource and/or an uplink transmit power for transmission of the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313. Based on the one or more RACH parameters, the UE may determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for receiving the Msg 2 1312 and the Msg 41314.
[0184] The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may indicate one or more Physical RACH (PRACH) occasions available for transmission of the Msg 1 1311. The one or more PRACH occasions may be predefined. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more available sets of one or more PRACH occasions (e.g. , prach-Configlndex). The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more PRACH occasions and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate an association between (a) one or more preambles and (b) one or more reference signals. The one or more reference signals may be SS/PBCH blocks and/or CSI-RSs. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a number of SS/PBCH blocks mapped to a PRACH occasion and/or a number of preambles mapped to a SS/PBCH blocks.
[0185] The one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310 may be used to determine an uplink transmit power of Msg 1 1311 and/or Msg 3 1313. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate a reference power for a preamble transmission (e.g., a received target power and/or an initial power of the preamble transmission). There may be one or more power offsets indicated by the one or more RACH parameters. For example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a power ramping step; a power offset between SSB and CSI-RS; a power offset between transmissions of the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313; and/or a power offset value between preamble groups. The one or more RACH parameters may indicate one or more thresholds based on which the UE may determine at least one reference signal (e.g., an SSB and/or CSI-RS) and/or an uplink carrier (e.g., a normal uplink (NUL) carrier and/or a supplemental uplink (SUL) carrier).
[0186] The Msg 1 1311 may include one or more preamble transmissions (e.g., a preamble transmission and one or more preamble retransmissions). An RRC message may be used to configure one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and/or group B). A preamble group may comprise one or more preambles. The UE may determine the preamble group based on a pathloss measurement and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313. The UE may measure an RSRP of one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) and determine at least one reference signal having an RSRP above an RSRP threshold (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB and/or rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS). The UE may select at least one preamble associated with the one or more reference signals and/or a selected preamble group, for example, if the association between the one or more preambles and the at least one reference signal is configured by an RRC message.
[0187] The UE may determine the preamble based on the one or more RACH parameters provided in the configuration message 1310. For example, the UE may determine the preamble based on a pathloss measurement, an RSRP measurement, and/or a size of the Msg 3 1313. As another example, the one or more RACH parameters may indicate: a preamble format; a maximum number of preamble transmissions; and/or one or more thresholds for determining one or more preamble groups (e.g., group A and group B). A base station may use the one or more RACH parameters to configure the UE with an association between one or more preambles and one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs). If the association is configured, the UE may determine the preamble to include in Msg 1 1311 based on the association. The Msg 1 1311 may be transmitted to the base station via one or more PRACH occasions. The UE may use one or more reference signals (e.g., SSBs and/or CSI-RSs) for selection of the preamble and for determining of the PRACH occasion. One or more RACH parameters (e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMsklndex and/or ra-OccasionList) may indicate an association between the PRACH occasions and the one or more reference signals. [0188] The UE may perform a preamble retransmission if no response is received following a preamble transmission. The UE may increase an uplink transmit power for the preamble retransmission. The UE may select an initial preamble transmit power based on a pathloss measurement and/or a target received preamble power configured by the network. The UE may determine to retransmit a preamble and may ramp up the uplink transmit power. The UE may receive one or more RACH parameters (e.g., PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMP/NG_STEP) indicating a ramping step for the preamble retransmission. The ramping step may be an amount of incremental increase in uplink transmit power for a retransmission. The UE may ramp up the uplink transmit power if the UE determines a reference signal (e.g., SSB and/or CSI-RS) that is the same as a previous preamble transmission. The UE may count a number of preamble transmissions and/or retransmissions (e.g., PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER). The UE may determine that a random access procedure completed unsuccessfully, for example, if the number of preamble transmissions exceeds a threshold configured by the one or more RACH parameters (e.g., preambleTransMax).
[0189] The Msg 2 1312 received by the UE may include an RAR. In some scenarios, the Msg 21312 may include multiple RARs corresponding to multiple UEs. The Msg 2 1312 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 1 1311. The Msg 2 1312 may be scheduled on the DL-SCH and indicated on a PDCCH using a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI). The Msg 21312 may indicate that the Msg 1 1311 was received by the base station. The Msg 2 1312 may include a time-alignment command that may be used by the UE to adjust the UE’s transmission timing, a scheduling grant for transmission of the Msg 3 1313, and/or a Temporary Cell RNTI (TC-RNTI). After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the Msg 2 1312. The UE may determine when to start the time window based on a PRACH occasion that the UE uses to transmit the preamble. For example, the UE may start the time window one or more symbols after a last symbol of the preamble (e.g., at a first PDCCH occasion from an end of a preamble transmission). The one or more symbols may be determined based on a numerology. The PDCCH may be in a common search space (e.g., a Typel -PDCCH common search space) configured by an RRC message. The UE may identify the RAR based on a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI). RNTIs may be used depending on one or more events initiating the random access procedure. The UE may use random access RNTI (RA-RNTI). The RA-RNTI may be associated with PRACH occasions in which the UE transmits a preamble. For example, the UE may determine the RA-RNTI based on: an OFDM symbol index; a slot index; a frequency domain index; and/or a UL carrier indicator of the PRACH occasions. An example of RA-RNTI may be as follows:
RA-RNTI= 1 +s_id + 14 x t_id + 14 x 80 x fjd + 14 x 80 x 8 x ul_carrier_id, where s_id may be an index of a first OFDM symbol of the PRACH occasion (e.g., 0 < s_id < 14), t_id may be an index of a first slot of the PRACH occasion in a system frame (e.g., 0 < t_id < 80), f_id may be an index of the PRACH occasion in the frequency domain (e.g., 0 < f_id < 8), and ul_carrier_id may be a UL carrier used for a preamble transmission (e.g., 0 for an NUL carrier, and 1 for an SUL carrier).
[0190] The UE may transmit the Msg 3 1313 in response to a successful reception of the Msg 21312 (e.g., using resources identified in the Msg 21312). The Msg 3 1313 may be used for contention resolution in, for example, the contention-based random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A. In some scenarios, a plurality of UEs may transmit a same preamble to a base station and the base station may provide an RAR that corresponds to a UE. Collisions may occur if the plurality of UEs interpret the RAR as corresponding to themselves. Contention resolution (e.g., using the Msg 3 1313 and the Msg 41314) may be used to increase the likelihood that the UE does not incorrectly use an identity of another the UE. To perform contention resolution, the UE may include a device identifier in the Msg 3 1313 (e.g., a C-RNTI if assigned, a TC-RNTI included in the Msg 2 1312, and/or any other suitable identifier).
[0191] The Msg 41314 may be received after or in response to the transmitting of the Msg 3 1313. If a C-RNTI was included in the Msg 3 1313, the base station will address the UE on the PDCCH using the C-RNTI. If the UE's unique C-RNTI is detected on the PDCCH, the random access procedure is determined to be successfully completed. If a TC-RNTI is included in the Msg 31313 (e.g., if the UE is in an RRC_IDLE state or not otherwise connected to the base station), Msg 41314 will be received using a DL-SCH associated with the TC-RNTI. If a MAC PDU is successfully decoded and a MAC PDU comprises the UE contention resolution identity MAC CE that matches or otherwise corresponds with the CCCH SDU sent (e.g., transmitted) in Msg 3 1313, the UE may determine that the contention resolution is successful and/or the UE may determine that the random access procedure is successfully completed. [0192] The UE may be configured with a supplementary uplink (SUL) carrier and a normal uplink (NUL) carrier. An initial access (e.g., random access procedure) may be supported in an uplink carrier. For example, a base station may configure the UE with two separate RACH configurations: one for an SUL carrier and the other for an NUL carrier. For random access in a cell configured with an SUL carrier, the network may indicate which carrier to use (NUL or SUL). The UE may determine the SUL carrier, for example, if a measured quality of one or more reference signals is lower than a broadcast threshold. Uplink transmissions of the random access procedure (e.g., the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313) may remain on the selected carrier. The UE may switch an uplink carrier during the random access procedure (e.g., between the Msg 1 1311 and the Msg 3 1313) in one or more cases. For example, the UE may determine and/or switch an uplink carrier for the Msg 1 1311 and/or the Msg 31313 based on a channel clear assessment (e.g., a listen- before-talk).
[0193] FIG. 13B illustrates a two-step contention-free random access procedure. Similar to the four-step contentionbased random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13A, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1320 to the UE. The configuration message 1320 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg 1 1321 and a Msg 21322. The Msg 1 1321 and the Msg 21322 may be analogous in some respects to the Msg 1 1311 and a Msg 21312 illustrated in FIG. 13A, respectively. As will be understood from FIGS. 13A and 13B, the contention- free random access procedure may not include messages analogous to the Msg 3 1313 and/or the Msg 41314.
[0194] The contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B may be initiated for a beam failure recovery, other SI request, SCell addition, and/or handover. For example, a base station may indicate or assign to the UE the preamble to be used for the Msg 1 1321. The UE may receive, from the base station via PDCCH and/or RRC, an indication of a preamble (e.g., ra-Preamblelndex). [0195] After transmitting a preamble, the UE may start a time window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a PDCCH for the RAR. In the event of a beam failure recovery request, the base station may configure the UE with a separate time window and/or a separate PDCCH in a search space indicated by an RRC message (e.g., recoverySearchSpaceld). The UE may monitor for a PDCCH transmission addressed to a Cell RNTI (C-RNTI) on the search space. In the contention-free random access procedure illustrated in FIG. 13B, the UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes after or in response to transmission of Msg 1 1321 and reception of a corresponding Msg 2 1322. The UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if a PDCCH transmission is addressed to a C-RNTI. The UE may determine that a random access procedure successfully completes, for example, if the UE receives an RAR comprising a preamble identifier corresponding to a preamble transmitted by the UE and/or the RAR comprises a MAC sub-PDU with the preamble identifier. The UE may determine the response as an indication of an acknowledgement for an SI request.
[0196] FIG. 13C illustrates another two-step random access procedure. Similar to the random access procedures illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a base station may, prior to initiation of the procedure, transmit a configuration message 1330 to the UE. The configuration message 1330 may be analogous in some respects to the configuration message 1310 and/or the configuration message 1320. The procedure illustrated in FIG. 13C comprises transmission of two messages: a Msg A 1331 and a Msg B 1332.
[0197] Msg A 1331 may be transmitted in an uplink transmission by the UE. Msg A 1331 may comprise one or more transmissions of a preamble 1341 and/or one or more transmissions of a transport block 1342. The transport block 1342 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A. The transport block 1342 may comprise UCI (e.g., an SR, a HARQ ACK/NACK, and/or the like). The UE may receive the Msg B 1332 after or in response to transmitting the Msg A 1331. The Msg B 1332 may comprise contents that are similar and/or equivalent to the contents of the Msg 2 1312 (e.g., an RAR) illustrated in FIGS. 13A and 13B and/or the Msg 41314 illustrated in FIG. 13A.
[0198] The UE may initiate the two-step random access procedure in FIG. 130 for licensed spectrum and/or unlicensed spectrum. The UE may determine, based on one or more factors, whether to initiate the two-step random access procedure. The one or more factors may be: a radio access technology in use (e.g., LTE, NR, and/or the like); whether the UE has valid TA or not; a cell size; the UE’s RRC state; a type of spectrum (e.g., licensed vs. unlicensed); and/or any other suitable factors.
[0199] The UE may determine, based on two-step RACH parameters included in the configuration message 1330, a radio resource and/or an uplink transmit power for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342 included in the Msg A 1331. The RACH parameters may indicate a modulation and coding schemes (MCS), a time-frequency resource, and/or a power control for the preamble 1341 and/or the transport block 1342. A time-frequency resource for transmission of the preamble 1341 (e.g., a PRACH) and a time-frequency resource for transmission of the transport block 1342 (e.g., a PUSCH) may be multiplexed using FDM, TDM, and/or CDM. The RACH parameters may enable the UE to determine a reception timing and a downlink channel for monitoring for and/or receiving Msg B 1332. [0200] The transport block 1342 may comprise data (e.g., delay-sensitive data), an identifier of the UE, security information, and/or device information (e.g., an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (I MSI)). The base station may transmit the Msg B 1332 as a response to the Msg A 1331. The Msg B 1332 may comprise at least one of following: a preamble identifier; a timing advance command; a power control command; an uplink grant (e.g., a radio resource assignment and/or an MOS); a UE identifier for contention resolution; and/or an RNTI (e.g., a C-RNTI or a TC-RNTI). The UE may determine that the two-step random access procedure is successfully completed if: a preamble identifier in the Msg B 1332 is matched to a preamble transmitted by the UE; and/or the identifier of the UE in Msg B 1332 is matched to the identifier of the UE in the Msg A 1331 (e.g., the transport block 1342).
[0201] A UE and a base station may exchange control signaling. The control signaling may be referred to as L1/L2 control signaling and may originate from the PHY layer (e.g., layer 1) and/or the MAC layer (e.g., layer 2). The control signaling may comprise downlink control signaling transmitted from the base station to the UE and/or uplink control signaling transmitted from the UE to the base station.
[0202] The downlink control signaling may comprise: a downlink scheduling assignment; an uplink scheduling grant indicating uplink radio resources and/or a transport format; a slot format information; a preemption indication; a power control command; and/or any other suitable signaling. The UE may receive the downlink control signaling in a payload transmitted by the base station on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH). The payload transmitted on the PDCCH may be referred to as downlink control information (DOI). In some scenarios, the PDCCH may be a group common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) that is common to a group of UEs.
[0203] A base station may attach one or more cyclic redundancy check (CRC) parity bits to a DCI in order to facilitate detection of transmission errors. When the DCI is intended for a UE (or a group of the UEs), the base station may scramble the CRC parity bits with an identifier of the UE (or an identifier of the group of the UEs). Scrambling the CRC parity bits with the identifier may comprise Modulo-2 addition (or an exclusive OR operation) of the identifier value and the CRC parity bits. The identifier may comprise a 16-bit value of a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI).
[0204] DCIs may be used for different purposes. A purpose may be indicated by the type of RNTI used to scramble the CRC parity bits. For example, a DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a paging RNTI (P-RNTI) may indicate paging information and/or a system information change notification. The P-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFE” in hexadecimal. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a system information RNTI (SI-RNTI) may indicate a broadcast transmission of the system information. The SI-RNTI may be predefined as “FFFF” in hexadecimal. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a random access RNTI (RA-RNTI) may indicate a random access response (RAR). A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a cell RNTI (C-RNTI) may indicate a dynamically scheduled unicast transmission and/or a triggering of PDCCH-ordered random access. A DCI having CRC parity bits scrambled with a temporary cell RNTI (TC-RNTI) may indicate a contention resolution (e.g., a Msg 3 analogous to the Msg 3 1313 illustrated in FIG. 13A). Other RNTIs configured to the UE by a base station may comprise a Configured Scheduling RNTI (CS-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUCCH RNTI (TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-PUSCH RNTI (TPC-PUSCH-RNTI), a Transmit Power Control-SRS RNTI (TPC-SRS-RNTI), an Interruption RNTI (INT-RNTI), a Slot Format Indication RNTI (SFI-RNTI), a Semi-Persistent CSI RNTI (SP-CSI-RNTI), a Modulation and Coding Scheme Cell RNTI (MCS-C-RNTI), and/or the like.
[0205] Depending on the purpose and/or content of a DCI, the base station may transmit the DCIs with one or more DCI formats. For example, DCI format 0_0 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell. DCI format 0_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g. , with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 0_1 may be used for scheduling of PUSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 0_0). DCI format 1_0 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell. DCI format 1_0 may be a fallback DCI format (e.g., with compact DCI payloads). DCI format 1_1 may be used for scheduling of PDSCH in a cell (e.g., with more DCI payloads than DCI format 1_0). DCI format 2_0 may be used for providing a slot format indication to a group of UEs. DCI format 2_1 may be used for notifying a group of UEs of a physical resource block and/or OFDM symbol where the UE may assume no transmission is intended to the UE. DCI format 2_2 may be used for transmission of a transmit power control (TPC) command for PUCCH or PUSCH. DCI format 2_3 may be used for transmission of a group of TPC commands for SRS transmissions by one or more UEs. DCI format(s) for new functions may be defined in future releases. DCI formats may have different DCI sizes, or may share the same DCI size.
[0206] After scrambling a DCI with a RNTI, the base station may process the DCI with channel coding (e.g., polar coding), rate matching, scrambling and/or QPSK modulation. A base station may map the coded and modulated DCI on resource elements used and/or configured for a PDCCH. Based on a payload size of the DCI and/or a coverage of the base station, the base station may transmit the DCI via a PDCCH occupying a number of contiguous control channel elements (CCEs). The number of the contiguous CCEs (referred to as aggregation level) may be 1 , 2, 4, 8, 16, and/or any other suitable number. A CCE may comprise a number (e.g., 6) of resource-element groups (REGs). A REG may comprise a resource block in an OFDM symbol. The mapping of the coded and modulated DCI on the resource elements may be based on mapping of CCEs and REGs (e.g., CCE-to-REG mapping).
[0207] FIG. 14A illustrates an example of CORESET configurations for a bandwidth part. The base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH on one or more control resource sets (CORESETs). A CORESET may comprise a timefrequency resource in which the UE tries to decode a DCI using one or more search spaces. The base station may configure a CORESET in the time-frequency domain. In the example of FIG. 14A, a first CORESET 1401 and a second CORESET 1402 occur at the first symbol in a slot. The first CORESET 1401 overlaps with the second CORESET 1402 in the frequency domain. A third CORESET 1403 occurs at a third symbol in the slot. A fourth CORESET 1404 occurs at the seventh symbol in the slot. CORESETs may have a different number of resource blocks in frequency domain. [0208] FIG. 14B illustrates an example of a CCE-to-REG mapping for DCI transmission on a CORESET and PDCCH processing. The CCE-to-REG mapping may be an interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purpose of providing frequency diversity) or a non-interleaved mapping (e.g., for the purposes of facilitating interference coordination and/or frequency- selective transmission of control channels). The base station may perform different or same CCE-to-REG mapping on different CORESETs. A CORESET may be associated with a CCE-to-REG mapping by RRC configuration. A CORESET may be configured with an antenna port quasi co-location (QCL) parameter. The antenna port QCL parameter may indicate QCL information of a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) for PDCCH reception in the CORESET.
[0209] The base station may transmit, to the UE, RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of one or more CORESETs and one or more search space sets. The configuration parameters may indicate an association between a search space set and a CORESET. A search space set may comprise a set of PDCCH candidates formed by CCEs at a given aggregation level. The configuration parameters may indicate: a number of PDCCH candidates to be monitored per aggregation level; a PDCCH monitoring periodicity and a PDCCH monitoring pattern; one or more DCI formats to be monitored by the UE; and/or whether a search space set is a common search space set or a UE- specific search space set. A set of CCEs in the common search space set may be predefined and known to the UE. A set of CCEs in the UE-specific search space set may be configured based on the UE’s identity (e.g., C-RNTI).
[0210] As shown in FIG. 14B, the UE may determine a time-frequency resource for a CORESET based on RRC messages. The UE may determine a CCE-to-REG mapping (e.g., interleaved or non-interleaved, and/or mapping parameters) for the CORESET based on configuration parameters of the CORESET. The UE may determine a number (e.g., at most 10) of search space sets configured on the CORESET based on the RRC messages. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates according to configuration parameters of a search space set. The UE may monitor a set of PDCCH candidates in one or more CORESETs for detecting one or more DCIs. Monitoring may comprise decoding one or more PDCCH candidates of the set of the PDCCH candidates according to the monitored DCI formats. Monitoring may comprise decoding a DCI content of one or more PDCCH candidates with possible (or configured) PDCCH locations, possible (or configured) PDCCH formats (e.g., number of CCEs, number of PDCCH candidates in common search spaces, and/or number of PDCCH candidates in the UE-specific search spaces) and possible (or configured) DCI formats. The decoding may be referred to as blind decoding. The UE may determine a DCI as valid for the UE, in response to CRC checking (e.g., scrambled bits for CRC parity bits of the DCI matching a RNTI value). The UE may process information contained in the DCI (e.g., a scheduling assignment, an uplink grant, power control, a slot format indication, a downlink preemption, and/or the like).
[0211] The UE may transmit uplink control signaling (e.g., uplink control information (UCI)) to a base station. The uplink control signaling may comprise hybrid automatic repeat request (HARO) acknowledgements for received DL- SCH transport blocks. The UE may transmit the HARO acknowledgements after receiving a DL-SCH transport block. Uplink control signaling may comprise channel state information (CSI) indicating channel quality of a physical downlink channel. The UE may transmit the CSI to the base station. The base station, based on the received CSI, may determine transmission format parameters (e.g., comprising multi-antenna and beamforming schemes) for a downlink transmission. Uplink control signaling may comprise scheduling requests (SR). The UE may transmit an SR indicating that uplink data is available for transmission to the base station. The UE may transmit a UCI (e.g., HARO acknowledgements (HARG-ACK), CSI report, SR, and the like) via a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) or a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). The UE may transmit the uplink control signaling via a PUCCH using one of several PUCCH formats. [0212] There may be five PUCCH formats and the UE may determine a PUCCH format based on a size of the UCI (e.g., a number of uplink symbols of UCI transmission and a number of UCI bits). PUCCH format 0 may have a length of one or two OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may transmit UCI in a PUCCH resource using PUCCH format 0 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK information bits with positive or negative SR (HARQ-ACK/SR bits) is one or two. PUCCH format 1 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include two or fewer bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 1 if the transmission is four or more symbols and the number of HARQ-ACK/SR bits is one or two. PUCCH format 2 may occupy one or two OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 2 if the transmission is over one or two symbols and the number of UCI bits is two or more. PUCCH format 3 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 3 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and PUCCH resource does not include an orthogonal cover code. PUCCH format 4 may occupy a number between four and fourteen OFDM symbols and may include more than two bits. The UE may use PUCCH format 4 if the transmission is four or more symbols, the number of UCI bits is two or more and the PUCCH resource includes an orthogonal cover code.
[0213] The base station may transmit configuration parameters to the UE for a plurality of PUCCH resource sets using, for example, an RRC message. The plurality of PUCCH resource sets (e.g., up to four sets) may be configured on an uplink BWP of a cell. A PUCCH resource set may be configured with a PUCCH resource set index, a plurality of PUCCH resources with a PUCCH resource being identified by a PUCCH resource identifier (e.g., pucch-Resourceid), and/or a number (e.g. a maximum number) of UCI information bits the UE may transmit using one of the plurality of PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. When configured with a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may select one of the plurality of PUCCH resource sets based on a total bit length of the UCI information bits (e.g., HARQ- ACK, SR, and/or CSI). If the total bit length of UCI information bits is two or fewer, the UE may select a first PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “0”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than two and less than or equal to a first configured value, the UE may select a second PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “1”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the first configured value and less than or equal to a second configured value, the UE may select a third PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “2”. If the total bit length of UCI information bits is greater than the second configured value and less than or equal to a third value (e.g., 1406), the UE may select a fourth PUCCH resource set having a PUCCH resource set index equal to “3”.
[0214] After determining a PUCCH resource set from a plurality of PUCCH resource sets, the UE may determine a PUCCH resource from the PUCCH resource set for UCI (HARQ-ACK, CSI, and/or SR) transmission. The UE may determine the PUCCH resource based on a PUCCH resource indicator in a DCI (e.g., with a DCI format 1_0 or DCI for 1_1) received on a PDCCH. A three-bit PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI may indicate one of eight PUCCH resources in the PUCCH resource set. Based on the PUCCH resource indicator, the UE may transmit the UCI (HARQ- ACK, CSI and/or SR) using a PUCCH resource indicated by the PUCCH resource indicator in the DCI. [0215] FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a wireless device 1502 in communication with a base station 1504 in accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure. The wireless device 1502 and base station 1504 may be part of a mobile communication network, such as the mobile communication network 100 illustrated in FIG. 1 A, the mobile communication network 150 illustrated in FIG. 1 B, or any other communication network. Only one wireless device 1502 and one base station 1504 are illustrated in FIG. 15, but it will be understood that a mobile communication network may include more than one UE and/or more than one base station, with the same or similar configuration as those shown in FIG. 15.
[0216] The base station 1504 may connect the wireless device 1502 to a core network (not shown) through radio communications over the air interface (or radio interface) 1506. The communication direction from the base station 1504 to the wireless device 1502 over the air interface 1506 is known as the downlink, and the communication direction from the wireless device 1502 to the base station 1504 over the air interface is known as the uplink. Downlink transmissions may be separated from uplink transmissions using FDD, TDD, and/or some combination of the two duplexing techniques.
[0217] In the downlink, data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 from the base station 1504 may be provided to the processing system 1508 of the base station 1504. The data may be provided to the processing system 1508 by, for example, a core network. In the uplink, data to be sent to the base station 1504 from the wireless device 1502 may be provided to the processing system 1518 of the wireless device 1502. The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 may implement layer 3 and layer 2 OSI functionality to process the data for transmission. Layer 2 may include an SDAP layer, a PDCP layer, an RLC layer, and a MAC layer, for example, with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. Layer 3 may include an RRC layer as with respect to FIG. 2B.
[0218] After being processed by processing system 1508, the data to be sent to the wireless device 1502 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1510 of base station 1504. Similarly, after being processed by the processing system 1518, the data to be sent to base station 1504 may be provided to a transmission processing system 1520 of the wireless device 1502. The transmission processing system 1510 and the transmission processing system 1520 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For transmit processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, forward error correction coding of transport channels, interleaving, rate matching, mapping of transport channels to physical channels, modulation of physical channel, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like. [0219] At the base station 1504, a reception processing system 1512 may receive the uplink transmission from the wireless device 1502. At the wireless device 1502, a reception processing system 1522 may receive the downlink transmission from base station 1504. The reception processing system 1512 and the reception processing system 1522 may implement layer 1 OSI functionality. Layer 1 may include a PHY layer with respect to FIG. 2A, FIG. 2B, FIG. 3, and FIG. 4A. For receive processing, the PHY layer may perform, for example, error detection, forward error correction decoding, deinterleaving, demapping of transport channels to physical channels, demodulation of physical channels, MIMO or multi-antenna processing, and/or the like. [0220] As shown in FIG. 15, a wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 may include multiple antennas. The multiple antennas may be used to perform one or more Ml MO or multi-antenna techniques, such as spatial multiplexing (e.g., single-user MIMO or multi-user MIMO), transmit/receive diversity, and/or beamforming. In other examples, the wireless device 1502 and/or the base station 1504 may have a single antenna.
[0221] The processing system 1508 and the processing system 1518 maybe associated with a memory 1514 and a memory 1524, respectively. Memory 1514 and memory 1524 (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) may store computer program instructions or code that may be executed by the processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 to carry out one or more of the functionalities discussed in the present application. Although not shown in FIG. 15, the transmission processing system 1510, the transmission processing system 1520, the reception processing system 1512, and/or the reception processing system 1522 may be coupled to a memory (e.g., one or more non-transitory computer readable mediums) storing computer program instructions or code that may be executed to carry out one or more of their respective functionalities.
[0222] The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may comprise one or more controllers and/or one or more processors. The one or more controllers and/or one or more processors may comprise, for example, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), a microcontroller, an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, an on-board unit, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may perform at least one of signal coding/processing, data processing, power control, input/output processing, and/or any other functionality that may enable the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504 to operate in a wireless environment.
[0223] The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to one or more peripherals 1516 and one or more peripherals 1526, respectively. The one or more peripherals 1516 and the one or more peripherals 1526 may include software and/or hardware that provide features and/or functionalities, for example, a speaker, a microphone, a keypad, a display, a touchpad, a power source, a satellite transceiver, a universal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequency modulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, an electronic control unit (e.g., for a motor vehicle), and/or one or more sensors (e.g., an accelerometer, a gyroscope, a temperature sensor, a radar sensor, a lidar sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a camera, and/or the like). The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may receive user input data from and/or provide user output data to the one or more peripherals 1516 and/or the one or more peripherals 1526. The processing system 1518 in the wireless device 1502 may receive power from a power source and/or may be configured to distribute the power to the other components in the wireless device 1502. The power source may comprise one or more sources of power, for example, a battery, a solar cell, a fuel cell, or any combination thereof. The processing system 1508 and/or the processing system 1518 may be connected to a GPS chipset 1517 and a GPS chipset 1527, respectively. The GPS chipset 1517 and the GPS chipset 1527 may be configured to provide geographic location information of the wireless device 1502 and the base station 1504, respectively. [0224] FIG. 16A illustrates an example structure for uplink transmission. A baseband signal representing a physical uplink shared channel may perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols; precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation of complex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) or CP- OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like. In an example, when transform precoding is enabled, a SC-FDMA signal for uplink transmission may be generated. In an example, when transform precoding is not enabled, an CP- OFDM signal for uplink transmission may be generated by FIG. 16A. These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments.
[0225] FIG. 16B illustrates an example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port and/or a complex-valued Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) baseband signal. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
[0226] FIG. 16C illustrates an example structure for downlink transmissions. A baseband signal representing a physical downlink channel may perform one or more functions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling of coded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel; modulation of scrambled bits to generate complexvalued modulation symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resource elements; generation of complex-valued timedomain OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like. These functions are illustrated as examples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in various embodiments.
[0227] FIG. 16D illustrates another example structure for modulation and up-conversion of a baseband signal to a carrier frequency. The baseband signal may be a complex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.
[0228] A wireless device may receive from a base station one or more messages (e.g. RRC messages) comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells (e.g. primary cell, secondary cell). The wireless device may communicate with at least one base station (e.g. two or more base stations in dual-connectivity) via the plurality of cells. The one or more messages (e.g. as a part of the configuration parameters) may comprise parameters of physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers for configuring the wireless device. For example, the configuration parameters may comprise parameters for configuring physical and MAC layer channels, bearers, etc. For example, the configuration parameters may comprise parameters indicating values of timers for physical, MAC, RLC, PCDP, SDAP, RRC layers, and/or communication channels.
[0229] A timer may begin running once it is started and continue running until it is stopped or until it expires. A timer may be started if it is not running or restarted if it is running. A timer may be associated with a value (e.g. the timer may be started or restarted from a value or may be started from zero and expire once it reaches the value). The duration of a timer may not be updated until the timer is stopped or expires (e.g., due to BWP switching). A timer may be used to measure a time period/window for a process. When the specification refers to an implementation and procedure related to one or more timers, it will be understood that there are multiple ways to implement the one or more timers. For example, it will be understood that one or more of the multiple ways to implement a timer may be used to measure a time period/window for the procedure. For example, a random access response window timer may be used for measuring a window of time for receiving a random access response. In an example, instead of starting and expiry of a random access response window timer, the time difference between two time stamps may be used. When a timer is restarted, a process for measurement of time window may be restarted. Other example implementations may be provided to restart a measurement of a time window.
[0230] A UE may access a cell, as part of the frequency spectrum, for wireless communications. The UE may receive broadcast signals comprising access information of the cell, e.g., synchronization signal block(s) (SSB) and/or system information block (SIB, e.g., SIB1). A cell, e.g., a serving cell, may be associated with one or more SSBs. The SIB1 (e.g., transmitted by one or more SSBs) may indicate the frequency information of the serving cell (e.g., via servingCellConfigOommon and/or servingCellConfigOommonSIB). A serving cell may comprise a downlink (DL) carrier and one or more uplink (UL) carriers (e.g., (normal) UL and/or supplementary UL). The serving cell configuration comprises downlink configuration of the DL carrier (e.g., via downlinkConfigOommon and/or downlinkConfigOommonSIB) and/or uplink configuration of the one or more UL carriers (e.g., uplinkConfigOommon and/or uplinkConfigOommonSIB) of the cell. A carrier may be referred to as a component carrier.
[0231] Throughout this disclosure, uplink (UL) may refer to communication directed from mobile/wireless device to base station/network, and downlink (DL) may refer to communication directed from base station/network to mobile/wireless device/UE.
[0232] The downlink configuration may indicate basic parameters of a DL carrier and transmission thereon, comprising frequency information of the DL carrier. The frequency information of the DL carrier may indicate a list one or more frequency bands to which the DL carrier belongs (e.g., via frequencyBandList); an offset of the DL carrier to Point A (offsetToPointA); and/or a set of carriers for different subcarrier spacings (SOS, numerologies) that are used in the DL BWPs in the serving cell. Multiple bands may be defined, e.g., for 5G and/or 6G, each with a respective center frequency. Each band (e.g., n1, n2, .... n25, n26, ... ,n99 in FR1, and n257, n258, .... n262 in FR2) may be defined with a duplex mode (TDD and/or FDD), a range of frequencies for uplink and downlink, and a allowed channels bandwidths (e.g., 5MHz, 10 MHz, .... 50 MHz, 200 MHz, 400 MHz).
[0233] A frequency band may be/comprise a range of frequencies in a spectrum between two limits used in telecommunications. A frequency band may be a range of frequencies defined and dedicated to a particular type of service or radio technology. Frequency bands for 5G New Radio (5G NR) may be separated into two different frequency ranges. First there is Frequency Range 1 (FR1 ), which includes sub-6 GHz frequency bands, some of which are traditionally used by previous standards, but have been extended to cover potential new spectrum offerings (e.g., from 410 MHz to 7125 MHz). The other is Frequency Range 2 (FR2), which includes frequency bands from 24.25 GHz to 52.6 GHz. In an example, frequency bands may be defined for FR3 (e.g., above 72 GHz).
[0234] The DL carrier may comprise one or more DL bandwidth parts (BWPs). Each DL BWP may comprise a part of the frequency resources of the DL carrier. A DL BWP configuration may indicate a frequency domain location and bandwidth of this BWP; and a SOS to be used in the BWP for (all) channels and (reference) signals.
[0235] The uplink configuration may indicate basic parameters of an UL carrier (e.g., NUL carrier and/or SUL carrier) and transmission thereon, comprising frequency information of the UL carrier. The frequency information of the UL carrier may indicate a list one or more frequency bands to which the UL carrier belongs (e.g., via frequencyBandList); an absolute frequency of the reference resource block (common RB 0, e.g., via absoluteFreq uencyPointA, its lowest subcarrier may be referred to as Point A); and/or a set of carriers for different subcarrier spacings (SOS, numerologies) that are used in the UL BWPs in the serving cell and/or UL carrier.
[0236] An UL carrier (e.g., NUL carrier and/or SUL carrier) may comprise one or more UL bandwidth parts (BWPs). Each UL BWP may comprise a part of the frequency resources of the UL carrier. An UL BWP configuration may indicate a frequency domain location and bandwidth of this BWP; and a SOS to be used in the BWP for (all) channels and (reference) signals.
[0237] An architectural consideration is the dual connectivity (DC) operation involving a first RAT (e.g., enhanced Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)) and a second RAT (e.g., NR). In one example of Dual Connectivity (DC) operation involving E-UTRA and NR, the E-UTRA is the master. In another example of the DC operation involving E- UTRA and NR, NR is the master. The dual connectivity operation involving only NR serving cells (e.g., NR primary cell (PCell) and NR PSCells) is also envisaged.
[0238] A standalone deployments of a first RAT (e.g., NR) may be single or multi-carrier (e.g.,
NR carrier aggregation, CA, or dual connectivity with NR PCell and NR PSCell). The non-standalone (NSA) deployment of a first RAT (e.g., NR) refers to a dual connectivity (DC) deployment involving a second RAT (e.g., E-UTRA), e.g., where there is Long Term Evolution (LTE) PCell and NR PSCell (there may also be one or more LTE SCells and one or more NR SCell). LTE PCell and NR PSCell are configured in master cell group (MCG) and secondary cell group (SCG) respectively. The MSG and SCG are more generally called cell groups (CG). The MCG and SCG may be configured with one or more additional serving cells, e.g., one or more LTE secondary cells (SCells) in MCG and one or more SCells in SCG.
[0239] Carrier Aggregation (CA) is generally used in an RAT (e.g., NR and LTE systems) to improve communication device transmit/receive data rates. With CA, the UE typically operates initially on a single serving cell called a primary cell (Pcell). The Pcell is operated on a component carrier in a frequency band. The UE is then configured by the network with one or more secondary serving cells (Scell(s)). Each Scell can correspond to a component carrier (CC) in the same frequency band (intra-band CA) or different frequency band (inter- band CA) from the frequency band of the CC corresponding to the Pcell. For the UE to transmit/receive data on the Scell(s) (e.g., by receiving DownLink Shared Channel (DL- SCH) information on a Physical DownLink Shared Channel (PDSCH) or by transmitting UpLink Shared Channel (UL-SCH) on a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH)), the Scell(s) may need to be activated by the network. The Scell(s) can also be deactivated and later reactivated as needed via activation/deactivation signaling. UE can be configured with carrier aggregation to aggregate Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) carriers, Time Division Duplex (TDD) carriers or both FDD and TDD carriers. UE can indicate via capability its carrier aggregation capability, including whether it supports CA on the downlink and whether it supports CA on the uplink.
[0240] A wireless system may incorporate multiple uplink enhancement technologies. For example, there are three multiple uplink enhancement technologies in 3GPP 5G NR Rel. 15: EUTRA-NR Dual Connectivity (EN-DC); Uplink carrier aggregation (CA); and Supplementary uplink (SUL).
[0241] The above mechanisms are designed to address the coverage enhancement issue for NR. In all above scenarios, a UE may be configured with a first carrier (e.g., LTE carrier, and/or SUL carrier) in a lower frequency band (e.g., FDD band), and a second carrier (e.g., NR carrier, and/or NUL carrier) in a higher frequency band (e.g., TDD band). The carrier in the lower frequency band may have a larger coverage area. The carrier in the higher frequency may have a smaller coverage area. The UE can transmit data either under the first carrier coverage (i.e., the carrier in the lower frequency band with larger coverage), or under both the first carrier and the second carrier coverage (i.e., the carrier in the higher frequency with smaller coverage). Therefore, the coverage problem of users at the edge of the cell can be resolved.
[0242] Commercial UEs, limited by the complexity of antenna design and low transmission power, generally support 2 transmission channels (2Tx). In the above uplink enhancement scenarios, one Tx of the UE’s transmitter can be used for the first carrier (e.g., LTE carrier, and/or the first NR carrier, and/or the SUL carrier), and the other Tx of the UE’s transmitter can be used for the second carrier (e.g., the 5G NR carrier, and/or the second NR carrier, and/or the NUL carrier).
[0243] FIG. 17A shows an example application scenario of EN-DC deployment. The difference between 4G coverage and 5G coverage is shown in the figure. In area A, because there are both 4G and 5G coverage, UE capable of EN-DC may transmit data by 4G and/or 5G network. As the commercial terminal generally supports 2 transmission channels (2Tx), one Tx may be used for 4G and the other for 5G NR. In area B, because there is 4G coverage, UE may transmit data via 4G network, e.g., not via 5G network.
[0244] FIG. 17B shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in Area A and Area B according to FIG. 17A. Mobile devices supporting EN-DC will have two concurrent radio connections to the Evolved Packet Core (EPC), one of which is via 5G NR and the other via LTE. However, because UE uses one Tx for 5G NR, the uplink dual-stream capability of 5G NR is limited, which means peak uplink data throughput is, for example, 74% of what can be achieved in 5G SA. In general, with non-stand-alone (NSA) architecture, 5G uplink throughput is improved compared to 4G, yet still lower than 5G stand-alone (SA). The coverage of 5G NR is not improved, but in areas without 5G coverage where both signaling and traffic can be transmitted over 4G, user experience is not significantly deteriorated compared to that of 4G network. [0245] FIG. 18A shows an example application scenario of UL inter-band GA. In area A, with coverage of NR Carrier 1 and NR Carrier 2, UL CA can be activated. In area B, with the coverage of one carrier, UE uses one carrier to transmit data. Inter-band carrier aggregation aggregates the carriers of different operating bands. For example, 3GPP may be compatible with 13 Inter-band CA operating bands involving FR1, such as CA_n3-n78, CA_n28-n78, etc. At the area where the two aggregating carriers’ coverage is good, uplink CA can be used to improve spectrum utilization. However, as most mobile devices support two transmission channels (2Tx), two transmission channels are to support two carriers respectively, so UL CA will restrain the uplink dual-stream capability on TDD-NR which may result in capacity loss.
[0246] FIG. 18B shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in area A and area B according to FIG. 18A. FDD-NR usually adopts medium- or low-range bands offering better uplink coverage than TDD-NR. Therefore, FDD-NR can be used to provide 5G services beyond the TDD-NR coverage area to improve user experience. For example, when the uplink data rate at cell edge is 2Mbps, if FDD-NR 2.1 GHz (20 MHz bandwidth) and TDD-NR 3.5 GHz (100 MHz bandwidth) are aggregated, the coverage can be improved by 17.8% compared with SA-based TDD-NR single carrier. Since UL inter-band CA cannot use uplink dual streams, it may have a negative impact on capacity. For example, when 2.1 GHz (20 MHz bandwidth) and 3.5 GHz (100 MHz bandwidth) are aggregated, the uplink peak data rate of a single user drops to 80% of that with 3.5 GHz in SA mode. In this case, g N B will NOT activate uplink CA but single-carrier mode to maximize the resource utilization. It may be clarified that NOT in all scenarios will UL CA have the negative impact on capacity. The single user’s uplink throughput of CA is directly related to the bandwidth and uplink duty ratio (of TDD-NR carrier) of the two aggregated component carriers (CC1 and CC2). For example, when CC1 is a TDD-NR carrier (bandwidth of 50 MHz and 2.5 ms dual-period frame structure), and CC2 is an FDD-NR carrier (bandwidth of 20 MHz). The uplink peak throughput of UL CA is increased by about 8% compared to that of TDD-NR single-carrier of dual-stream. CA technology was introduced from the 4G era and has been successfully deployed and commercialized worldwide. NR CA has been included since 3GPP Rel-15. Intra-band CA can aggregate multiple frequency carriers of the same band and improve user experience. However, the throughput of inter-band CA can be limited in some cases by the number of transmission channels of terminals.
[0247] FIG. 19A shows an example of supplementary uplink coverage. Supplementary uplink (SUL) is introduced to extend the uplink coverage by providing a supplementary uplink (usually in sub-3 GHz band). With SUL, a DL frequency band (NR frequency band) and two uplink frequency bands (one NR frequency band and one SUL frequency band) are configured in the same cell. When the uplink coverage of the NR carrier is good, UE uses the NR carrier to send and receive data. When the UE is moving beyond the uplink coverage of the NR carrier, UE uses the SUL carrier for transmitting data. UE can dynamically select the UL NR or SUL for data transmission, but cannot use the two carriers at the same time. The uplink operating bands of SULs are defined similarly to those of the corresponding FDD- LTE/FDD-NR operating bands, and need to be shared with the existing network (4G or 5G). The SUL bands may involve uplink, so it cannot be used alone. For example, 3GPP is compatible with the 8 combinations of SUL and NR bands, including the combined definition of n78, n79 and SUL bands. [0248] FIG. 19B shows an example application scenario of SUL. In Area A, with the good coverage of TDD-NR, UE uses TDD-NR for data transmitting. In Area B, beyond the uplink coverage of TDD-NR, UE switches to the SUL band for data sending.
[0249] FIG. 190 shows an example of uplink operation modes of a UE in Area A and Area B according to FIG. 19B. SUL may be implemented at sub-3 GHz bands with better uplink coverage than TDD-NR bands, therefore may improve user experience. For example, in dense urban areas where cell edge uplink data rate is 2Mbps, if SUL 2.1 GHz (bandwidth of 20 MHz) and TDD-NR 3.5 GHz (bandwidth of 100 MHz) are deployed for networking, the network coverage can be increase by 17.8% compared to that of TDD-NR single-carrier and SA architecture. In TDD-NR coverage areas, TDD-NR will be used to send and receive data, so SUL will NOT influence the single user’s peak throughput. The downside of SUL is that it makes general 5G NR bands and SUL bands more dependent on one another since they have to be in the same cell, which limits its applicability. SUL technology improves the uplink coverage by using sub-3 GHz bands for uplink transmission. SUL defines new paired spectrum between TDD-NR and SUL and SUL is obtained by sharing the spectrum with 4G network. Therefore, 5G may be co-sited with 4G which limits the flexibility of 5G deployment and brings new problems to network deployment.
[0250] As seen in above UL scenarios, for the commercial UE that uses one Tx for a 5G NR, the uplink dual stream capability of 5G NR cannot be used, and so the peak UL data throughput is much lower than the achievable throughout. In 3GPP Rel. 16, UL Tx Switching was introduced as a new feature to enhance EN-DC, UL GA, and SUL performance. UL Tx switching can maximize uplink resource utilization with respect to UE’s capability. It uses one Tx channel either for carrier 1 or carrier 2, and uses the other Tx channel exclusively for carrier 2.
[0251] A transmitter (Tx) of a wireless device may have/comprise one or multiple (e.g., two) antennas/Tx chains. Throughout this disclosure, the terms “antenna” and/or “Tx chain” may be interchangeable and/or may be used to refer to a physical antenna connector (e.g., of a respective antenna unit) of the UE that can integrate hardware and software to transmit/radiate/propagate a radio signal in the air directed as a particular beam. Here, an antenna may comprise an array/group of multiple antenna elements that generate a signal based on beamforming and/or MIMO/massive Ml MO. Throughout this disclosure, the following terms may be used interchangeably: Tx; antenna; transmit antenna; transmitter antenna; transmission antenna; Tx antenna; Tx antenna connector; transmit channel; Tx channel; transmission channel; transmit chain; Tx chain; Tx RF chain; transmission chain; antenna port; physical antenna port; uplink Tx; UL Tx chain; UL Tx antenna connector. In some embodiments, “Tx” may be used for short to refer to the above concept.
[0252] Antenna may comprise one or more RF components and/or antenna arrays, configured to send and/or receive wireless signals. Antenna may be coupled to radio front end circuitry and may be any type of antenna capable of transmitting and/or receiving data and/or signals wirelessly. In some embodiments, antenna may comprise one or more omni-directional, sector or panel antennas operable to transmit/receive radio signals between, for example, 2 GHz and 66 GHz. An omni directional antenna may be used to transmit/receive radio signals in any direction, a sector antenna may be used to transmit/receive radio signals from devices within a particular area, and a panel antenna may be a line of sight antenna used to transm it/receive radio signals in a relatively straight line. In some instances, the use of more than one antenna may be referred to as MIMO. In certain embodiments, antenna may be separate from network node and may be connectable to network node through an interface or port. RF interface may be configured to provide a communication interface to RF components such as a transmitter, a receiver, and an antenna.
[0253] For example, advanced antenna system (AAS) is a combination of an AAS radio and a set of AAS features. An AAS radio consists of an antenna array closely integrated with the hardware and software required for transmission and reception of radio signals, and signal processing algorithms to support the execution of the AAS features. Compared to conventional systems, this solution provides much greater adaptivity and steerability, in terms of adapting the antenna radiation patterns to rapidly time-varying traffic and multi-path radio propagation conditions. In addition, multiple signals may be simultaneously received or transmitted with different radiation patterns. Multi-antenna techniques, here referred to as AAS features, include beamforming and MIMO. Applying AAS features to an AAS radio results in significant performance gains because of the higher degrees of freedom provided by the larger number of radio chains, also referred to as Massive MIMO.
[0254] For beamforming, the UE may use multiple antennas to control the direction of a wave-front by appropriately weighting the magnitude and phase of individual antenna signals in an array of multiple antenna elements. That is, the same signal is sent from multiple antennas that have sufficient space between them (at least ! wavelength). In any given location, the receiver will thus receive multiple copies of the same signal. Depending on the location of the receiver, the signals may be in opposite phases, destructively averaging each other out, or constructively sum up if the different copies are in the same phase, or anything in between. By adjusting the phase and amplitude of the transmitted signals, constructive addition of the corresponding signals at the base station receiver can be achieved, which increases the received signal strength and thus the UE’s uplink throughput. The more antenna elements there are, the higher the gain.
[0255] In digital beamforming (also known as baseband beamforming or precoding), the signal is pre-coded (amplitude and phase modifications) in baseband processing before RF transmission. Multiple beams (one per each user) can be formed simultaneously from the same set of antenna elements. In analog beamforming, the signal phases of individual antenna signals are adjusted in RF domain. Analog beamforming impacts the radiation pattern and gain of the antenna array, thus improves coverage. Unlike in digital beamforming, one beam per set of antenna elements can be formed.
[0256] Spatial multiplexing, here referred to as MIMO, is the ability to transmit multiple data streams, called layers, using the same time and frequency resource, where each data stream can be beamformed. The purpose of MIMO is to increase throughput. MIMO builds on the basic principle that when the received signal quality is high, it is better to receive multiple streams of data with reduced power per stream, than one stream with full power. The potential is large when the received signal quality is high and the streams do not interfere with each other. The potential diminishes when the mutual interference between streams increases. A number of layers/data streams that can be supported may be called “rank”. To distinguish between UL layers, a UE needs to have at least as many Tx antennas as there are layers, e.g., 2Tx to support 2-layer (or 2-port) transmissions.
[0257] An antenna port may be generally used as a generic term for signal transmission under identical channel conditions. For each operating mode for which an independent channel is assumed (e.g., S I SO vs. MIMO), a separate logical antenna port may be defined. Signals transmitted from different antennas ports may experience different “radio channels” even if the set of antennas are located at the same site. In some cases, it is important that transmissions share the same antenna port (e.g., quasi-collocated). OFDM symbols that are transmitted via identical antenna ports are subject to the same channel conditions. This helps the base station to estimate the channel using reference signals (e.g., DMRS) and use that information in decoding information content on physical channels (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH). According to 3GPP specification definition, an antenna port is defined such that the channel over which a symbol on the antenna port is conveyed can be inferred from the channel over which another symbol on the same antenna port is conveyed. MIMO takes advantage of this property (different radio channel) across different antenna ports to transmit multiple parallel streams of data. It is important to understand that antenna port is an abstract concept. There is a difference in logical 'antenna port’ and physical 'antenna element’. Specific transmissions use specific antenna ports and then those antenna ports are mapped onto one or more physical antenna elements.
[0258] FIG. 20 shows an example of wireless device transmitter antenna. Logical antenna ports are mapped to physical antenna ports as shown in the figure. The mapping of antenna port to physical antenna is controlled by beam forming, as a certain beam needs to transmit the signal on certain antenna ports to form a desired beam. There is a possibility that two antenna ports are mapped to one physical antenna port, and/or a single antenna port is mapped to multiple physical antenna ports.
[0259] In order to determine the characteristic channel for an antenna port, a UE may carry out a separate channel estimation for each antenna port. Separate reference signals that are suitable for estimating the respective channel may be defined for each antenna port. The way in which these logical antenna ports are assigned to the physical transmit antennas of a UE may be up to the UE, and may vary between UEs of the same type (because of different operating conditions) and also between UEs from different manufacturers. The UE may not explicitly notify the base station of the mapping that has been carried out, rather the base station may take this into account automatically during demodulation.
[0260] For the case of UL channel estimation, there are differences depending on whether time division duplex (TDD) or frequency division duplex (FDD) is used. For TDD, the same frequency is used for both UL and DL transmission. Since the radio channel is reciprocal (the same in UL and DL), detailed short-term channel estimates from UL transmission of known signals can be used to determine the DL transmission beams. This is referred to as reciprocitybased beamforming. For full channel estimation, signals should be sent from each UE antenna and across all frequencies. For FDD, where different frequencies are used for UL and DL, the channel is not fully reciprocal.
[0261] Characteristics of a UE transmitter may be specified at the antenna connector of the UE with a single or multiple transmit antenna(s). For UE with integral antenna, a reference antenna with a gain of 0 d Bi may be assumed. Transmitter requirements for UL Ml MO operation may apply when the UE transmits on 2 ports on the same CDM group. The UE may use higher MPR (Allowed maximum power reduction) values outside this limitation.
[0262] For inter-band carrier aggregation with one uplink carrier assigned to one NR band, transmitter power requirements may apply. For inter-band carrier aggregation with uplink assigned to two NR bands, UE maximum output power shall be measured over all component carriers from different bands. If each band has separate antenna connectors, maximum output power is measured as the sum of maximum output power at each UE antenna connector. The period of measurement shall be at least one sub frame (1 ms).
[0263] For uplink transmissions, a UE may reconfigure/retune some radio frequency (RF) hardware (and/or a Tx chain, e.g. , filters and/or duplexers) between two carriers, e.g., from a first carrier to a second carrier or vice versa. This reconfiguration/retuning may be referred to as moving/switching a Tx chain between carriers. In fact, UL Tx switching between two carriers comprises reconfiguring/retuning of an UL Tx chain/antenna from a center frequency of a first carrier to a center frequency of a second carrier (or vice versa). Same UL Tx chain/antenna/antenna connector may be used for uplink transmissions via the first carrier (e.g., before switching) and the second carrier (e.g., after switching). The UL Tx switching may be in response to receiving scheduling commands and/or TDD UL symbols/slots/subframes, thus, also called “dynamic UL Tx switching”.
[0264] Throughout this disclosure, the following terms may be used interchangeably: Tx switching; uplink switching; carrier switching; UL carrier switching; UL Tx switching; UL transmission switching; UL transmit channel switching; UL Tx chain switching; UL Tx antenna switching; Tx antenna switching; Dynamic UL Tx switching; transmit antenna switching; Tx antenna switching.
[0265] Throughout this disclosure, the following terms may be used interchangeably: Switching period, switching gap, uplink switching period, UL switching gap, UL Tx switching period, UL Tx switching gap, Tx switching period, Tx switching gap.
[0266] FIG. 21A shows an example of uplink Tx switching for a UE with 2Tx. As shown in the figure, UL Tx switching may enable two operation modes: Mode 1 , where one Tx channel is used for 2.1 GHz carrier, and the other is used for 3.5 GHz carrier; and Mode 2, where one Tx channel is switched to 3.5 GHz, and the other is still used for 3.5 GHZ, which enables TDD-NR Dual-Stream transmission. Uplink Tx Switching is used when switching between mode 1 and mode 2.
[0267] FIG. 21 B shows an example of transmission options for UL Tx switching as shown in FIG. 21 A. As UE capabilities vary from terminal to terminal, Option 1 and Option 2 are further defined, as shown in the figure. In option 1 , a UE may send data over carrier 1 and carrier 2 in time division mode (TDM), but not at the same time. This option may be referred to as “switched uplink”. In option 2, in the terminal side, carrier 1 and carrier 2 may be flexibly aggregated, either in TDM mode or simultaneous transmission mode. This option may be referred to as “dual uplink”.
[0268] FIG. 22A shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in EN-DC scenario. With Uplink Tx Switching (EN-DC), in the uplink time slots for TDD-NR, the Tx channels that originally supported LTE are switched to the TDD-NR frequency band, so that UE can use dual-stream in uplink, and in other time slots, the Tx are switched back to LTE. With regard to factors of the UE’ capabilities and wireless environment, UE can work in different modes as shown in FIG. 22A. Uplink Tx Switching is used to enhance the uplink capacity. With Uplink Tx Switching, in the uplink time slots for TDD-NR, dual-stream is maintained, and in other time slots UE uses the traditional EN-DC mode, resulting the uplink peak throughput increased by about 17% of that of TDD-NR in SA architecture.
[0269] FIG. 22B shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in inter-band GA scenario. With Uplink Tx switching activated for inter-band GA, in TDD-NR UL time slots UE can transmit data with dual-stream. For example, when close to cell tower, UE can use inter-band GA with uplink Tx switching to further improve capacity and reduce latency. At cell edge, UE uses FDD frequency band to send data, while maintaining FDD and TDD carrier aggregation in downlink, improving user experience. Inter-band GA can flexibly support Option 1 and Option 2 of uplink Tx switching. UE can work in one of the modes shown in FIG. 22B depending on the UE capabilities and the radio environment. In addition, 3GPP Rel-16 has expanded the frequency band combinations of carrier aggregation to 78, and by integrating with Uplink Tx Switching, GA can boost 5G performance in coverage, capacity and latency.
[0270] With Uplink Tx Switching, UE can connect to both FDD and TDD carriers at the same time, even at cell edge, which solves the issue of no 5G access due to limited uplink. For example, in case of TDD-NR with 3.5 GHz and a bandwidth of 100 MHz, and FDD-NR frequency band of 2.1 GHz utilized for carrier aggregation, when cell edge uplink data rate is 2Mbps, adopting GA with Uplink Tx Switching can increase network capacity by 17.8%, compared to the network with single-carrier TDD-NR. In the case of TDD-NR with 3.5 GHz (bandwidth of 100 MHz) aggregates FDD- NR of 2.1 GHz (bandwidth is 20 MHz) with Uplink Tx Switching, uplink peak throughput capacity is improved by 20%. Uplink Tx Switching can increase uplink time slot availability to 100%, therefore HARQ RTT can be reduced by 25% without uplink data having to waiting for TDD-NR uplink timeslots. 3GPP Rel-15 introduces inter-band GA with concurrent transmission on two carriers which may result in capacity loss without TDD-NR’s dual-stream transmission on uplink. While with Uplink Tx Switching, this limitation has been eliminated by sending data on FDD-NR and TDD-NR carriers with TDM mode. GA with Uplink Tx Switching maximizes spectrum utilization in both time domain and frequency domain, and by integrating with the feature of power boosting on TDD-NR carrier to achieve better user experiences.
[0271] FIG. 22C shows an example of uplink operating modes of UE with Uplink Tx Switching in SUL scenario. With Uplink Tx Switching, SUL can integrate both TDD-NR and SUL’s time-frequency resources within TDD-NR’s coverage area, thereby increasing uplink capacity. SUL supports Option 1 (TDM mode) with uplink Tx switching. Depending on the wireless environments, UE operates in the modes shown in FIG. 22C. When close to cell tower, UE switches between TDD-NR and SUL frequency bands for data transmission. At cell edge, SUL carrier is used to provide uplink coverage. Therefore, SUL with Uplink Tx Switching improves uplink throughput and reduces latency, and cannot improve the coverage compared with SUL without Uplink Tx Switching. With Uplink Tx Switching, uplink time-frequency resources of SUL can be allocated for UE, and single user’s uplink capacity can be increased by 20%. Up to 100% of the uplink time slots can be available, and HARQ RTT can be reduced by nearly 20%.
[0272] Some LTE-NR aggregation combinations of channels across two bands may be considered difficult to achieve, because the simultaneous uplink transmissions on these bands give rise to inter-modulation (IM) products in a downlink (DL), e.g. , from base station to wireless device, band. For example, this may happen for inter-band frequency division duplex (FDD)-FDD and time division duplex (TDD)-TDD combinations. This means that there will be combinations of channels across the said two bands that are not difficult to achieve, which means that the wireless device may support dual simultaneous uplink for the band combination. Here, a channel may be a part of the spectrum. [0273] For the aggregation combinations where IM products due to simultaneous multiple uplink (UL), e.g., from wireless device to base station, transmitters to DL receivers in the wireless device are caused, any problems with IM depend on the actual output power of the UL, the power balance, the allocations, the wanted signal levels and other interference. Then, the different wireless device implementations will have varying performance. In an ideal scenario, the BS will get channel state information (CSI) reports and PHR and may perhaps be able to take action for a notorious band combination, if the IM can be distinguished from other external interference.
[0274] A UE supporting uplink GA across two (or more) carriers can be assumed to have dedicated Transmit (Tx) chains for each carrier, and hence is able to support GA without any restrictions. On the other hand, there may be UEs that may share some hardware (e.g., a Tx antenna, a power amplifier, phase locked loops, a transmitter chain circuit, etc.) across the two carriers (or more), and hence may need special handling (e.g., via scheduling) to ensure proper operation. For example, a UE may have 2 Tx chains, and it can transmit on the uplink on two carriers, but with some restrictions. Such a UE is not able to transmit 1 Tx on carrier 1 and 2 Tx on carrier 2 (e.g., to support 2-layer multiple- input-multiple- output (MIMO) on carrier 2) since it has 2 Tx chains, and hence the UE can support either case 1 or case 2 for transmitting on the uplink.
[0275] Implementation of dual-UL is certainly possible at higher expense in terms of additional RF components, e.g., two TX digital front end, additional TX phase locked loop (PLL), additional TX measurement receiver, power management between two ULs (of different stacks), multiplexer filters needed after PA (duplexers replaced by multiplexers), isolation between the TX paths, etc.
[0276] FIG. 23 shows an example of transmission options for UL Tx switching. As UE capabilities vary from terminal to terminal, Option 1 and Option 2 are further defined, as shown in the figure. In option 1, a UE may send data over carrier 1 and carrier 2 in time division mode (TDM), but not at the same time. This option may be referred to as “switched uplink”. In option 2, in the terminal side, carrier 1 and carrier 2 may be flexibly aggregated, either in TDM mode or simultaneous transmission mode. This option may be referred to as “dual uplink”.
[0277] In this example and for both switched/TDM uplink (Option 1) and dual uplink (Option 2), UL Tx switching may enable three operation modes: Mode 1, where one Tx chain is used in a first frequency band (e.g., for 2.1 GHz carrier), and the other Tx chain is used in a second frequency band (e.g., for 3.5 GHz carrier); Mode 2, where one Tx chain is switched to the second frequency band, and the other is still used in the second frequency band, which enables TDD- NR Dual-Stream transmission in the second band, and Mode 3, where both Tx chains are switched to the first frequency band, which enables TDD-NR Dual-Stream transmission in the first band.
[0278] Two types of uplink Tx Switching may be used when switching between two operation modes. For example, a 1T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 1 and mode 2, or between mode 1 and mode 3. In case of 1T uplink switching, only one Tx chain (antenna connector) is switched between the two bands/carriers. In another example, a 2T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 2 and mode 3. In case of 2T uplink switching, both/two Tx chains (antenna connectors) are switched between the two bands/carriers at the same time.
[0279] A switching gap may be needed to allow the UE enough time to switch (e.g., to move/reconfigure some hardware (or a Tx chain) from carrier 1 to carrier 2 or vice versa) between the two carriers/bands. The network (NW) needs to provide switching gaps on one of the carriers/bands and would also need to provide enough additional relaxation in UE Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) processing time, which is time typically between an end of an Uplink (UL) grant and start of the PUSCH.
[0280] When configuring serving cells with uplink carriers, e.g., for dual connectivity and/or carrier aggregation, the network may send an enquiry (e.g., UECapabilityEnquiry) for the UE radio access capability information. The network initiates the procedure to a UE in RRC_CONNECTED when it needs (additional) UE radio access capability information. The UE may receive the enquiry from the base station, e.g., via an RRC message. The UE may set the contents of the capability information (e.g., UECapabilitylnformation) message based on the request fields in the enquiry message. For example, if the ue-CapabilityRAT-RequestList contains a UE-CapabilityRAT-Request with rat- Type set to nr, the UE shall include in the ue-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList a UE-CapabilityRAT-Containerot the type UE-NR-Capability and with the rat-Type set to nr. The UE may include the list of supported band combinations, feature sets, and/or feature set combinations (e.g., supportedBandCombinationList, featureSets and featureSetCombinations). [0281] The UE may send an RRC message comprising the UE capability information (UE capability information message). The UE capability information may comprise a list of band combinations supported by the UE (e.g., supportedBandCombinationList, BandCombinationList). The list of band combinations may contain a list of NR CA, NR non-CA and/or MR-DC band combinations (also including DL only or UL only band).
[0282] The UE capability information may comprise the feature set combinations referenced from the supported band combinations (e.g., as included in supportedBandCombinationList).
[0283] The feature set combination (FeatureSetCombination) may comprise a list of feature sets per band (FeatureSetsPerBand). Each feature set per band may comprise a list of feature sets applicable to the carrier(s) of one band entry of the associated band combination. Each feature set (FeatureSets) may provide pools of downlink feature sets and/or uplink feature sets. Each feature set (FeatureSets) may provide pools of downlink feature sets per component carrier (CC) (FeatureSetDownlinkPerCC) and/or uplink feature sets per CC (FeatureSetUplinkPerCC). [0284] The uplink feature sets per CC (FeatureSetUplinkPerCC) may indicate a set of features that the UE supports on the corresponding carrier of one band entry of a band combination. The set of features may comprise: supported subcarrier spacing for UL (e.g., supportedSubcarrierSpacingUL); supported bandwidth for UL (e.g., supportedBandwidthUL); a (maximum) number of MIMO layers for UL/PUSCH (e.g., maxNumberMIMO-LayersCB- PUSCH, maxNumberMIMO-LayersNonCB-PUSCH, or MIMO-LayersUL); a (maximum) number of SRS resource per set (e.g., maxNumberSRS-ResourcePerSet); a (maximum) number of ports per set for PUSCH (e.g., maxNumberNZP- PUSCH-PortsPerSet); a (maximum) number of SRS antenna ports per set (e.g., maxNumberSRS- AntennaPortsPerSet); etc.
[0285] In an example, the enquiry may comprise a request for UL Tx switching (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchRequest). In response, the UE may send the list of band combinations that the UE can (is capable to) support for UL Tx switching (e.g., BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch). For example, the UE may include into the list of supported band combinations for UL Tx switching (e.g., supportedBandCombinationList-UplinkTxSwitch) as many NR-only/ E-UTRA- NR band combinations that support UL TX switching as possible from a list of candidate band combinations, starting from a first entry.
[0286] The list of (one or more) supported band combinations for UL Tx switching may comprise a list of (one or more) supported band pairs (e.g., supportedBandPairListNR), and/or the support option for the uplink Tx switching (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-OptionSupport and/or uplinkTxSwitchingOptionForBandPair). For example, support option may indicate a “switched UL” mode (e.g., TDM transmission), or “dual UL” mode (concurrent transmission), or both modes. For example, support option may indicate whether power boosting for UL Tx switching is supported or not (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-PowerBoosting).
[0287] Each band pair of the supported band pairs for UL Tx switching comprises a first frequency band and a second frequency band. The capability information indicates, for each band pair (e.g., ULTxSwitchingBandPair), an index of a first frequency band (e.g., band IndexULI ) and an index of a second frequency band (e.g., bandlndexUL2) for simultaneous transmission. The capability information may also indicate for each band pair, a switching option (uplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair) and/or a switching gap/period associated with the two frequency bands of the band pair (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod, or uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodForBandPair). For example, the switching gap/period may be a duration in microseconds (e.g., 35us, 140us, or 21 Ous).
[0288] The capability information may indicate for each band pair, one or more switching gaps/periods associated with the two frequency bands of the band pair. For example, the capability information may comprise a first parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod and/or switchingPeriodForlT) indicating a first switching gap/period for switching one Tx chain between the first band and the second band of the band pair (e.g., 1 Tx-1 Tx uplink switching, and/or 1T1T switching). For example, the capability information may comprise a second parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T and/or switchingPeriod For2T) indicating a second switching gap/period for switching two Tx chains between the first band and the second band of the band pair (e.g., 2Tx-2Tx uplink switching, and/or 2T2T switching and/or 2T switching mode).
[0289] In an example, the capability information may not comprise the second parameter. For example, the capability information may indicate absence of the second parameter. For example, the field of the second parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2Ti in the corresponding entry in the capability message may be absent, e.g. , if the UE does not support 2Tx-2Tx switching for a given band pair.
[0290] The capability information may indicate for each band pair, an index of an unaffected band (e.g., bandlndexUnaffected) in case of dual UL transmission. For example, the UE may support dual UL transmission on band X and Z, also, on band Y and Z. the UE may report band Z as the unaffected band for band pair (X,Y). In this case, when switching between band X and band Y, uplink transmission on band Z may be unaffected/uninterrupted/maintained. For example, the UE may omit uplink transmissions on band X and band Y during the corresponding switching period, and/or may not omit the uplink transmission on band Z during the corresponding switching period.
[0291] In an example, the capability information may indicate for the unaffected band of a band pair, a switching period. For example, the capability information may comprise a third parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodUnaffectedBandDualUL, SwitchingPeriodUnaffectedBandDualUL, periodOnULBands, or switchingAdditionalPeriod DualUL), indicating the switching period corresponding to the band pair and the unaffected/impacted band in case of dual UL transmission. For example, the UE may support dual UL transmission on band X and Z, also, on band Y and Z. the UE may report the third switching period for band Z as and band pair (X,Y). In this case, when switching between band X and band Y, the UE may omit uplink transmissions on band X and band Y and band Z during the corresponding switching period indicated by the third parameter.
[0292] The network may configure one or more cells for the UE. For example, the network may transmit RRC message(s) indicating one or more cell groups (e.g., CellGroupConfig). The RRC message(s) may comprise, for a cell group (MCG and/or SCG), configuration parameters of one or more serving cells, e.g., Pcell and/or SPcell and/or Scell(s). Each of the one or more serving cells may comprise one or more uplink carriers (e.g., UL (NUL) and/or SUL). [0293] The RRC message(s) may comprise SRS configurations (e.g., SRS-Config) of one or more serving cells. The SRS configurations may comprise one or more parameters indicating a number of SRS ports (e.g., number of SRS antenna ports, or number of ports for SRS transmission). For example, the one or more configurations parameters (e.g., nrofSRS-Ports) may indicate 1 or 2 or 4 or 8 ports for SRS transmission (e.g., {portl , ports2, ports4, ports8, ports8tdm}).
[0294] The RRC message(s) may comprise PUSCH configurations (e.g., PUSCH-Config) of the one or more serving cells. The UE configured/scheduled with a PUSCH transmission may receive indication of precoding information (e.g., SRI and/or TPMI) to determine a transmission precoder to apply to the PUSCH transmission. The UE may apply the precoding information to one or more PUSCH transmissions based on an SRS resource set. The SRI may indicate the SRS resource set. The UE may select the transmission precoder from the uplink codebook that has a number of antenna ports equal to the number of SRS ports (e.g., configured by higher layer parameter nrofSRS-Ports in SRS- Config). [0295] The UE may transmit the PUSCH transmission using the same antenna ports that it uses for SRS transmission. For example, the UE may transmit the PUSCH transmission using the same number of antenna ports that it uses for SRS transmission.
[0296] For codebook based PUSCH transmission with a number of (e.g., two or four or eight) antenna ports, the UE may determine a codebook subsets based on TPMI(s), based on the UE capability for the number of (e.g., two or four or eight) antenna ports.
[0297] The UE may transmit PUSCH using the same antenna port(s) as the SRS port(s) in the SRS resource(s) indicated by a scheduling DCI (e.g., DCI format 0_1 , 0_2 or 0_3) and/or by an RRC parameter (e.g., configuredGrantConfig).
[0298] For non-codebook based PSUCH transmission, the UE may determine the PUSCH precoder(s) and/or transmission rank based on the SRI(s) when multiple SRS resources are configured. For example, the SRI(s) may be given by one or two SRS resource indicator(s) in DCI and/or by an RRC parameter (e.g., srs-Resourcelndicator). One or more SRS resource sets (e.g., SRS-ResourceSet(s)) applicable for PUSCH scheduled by a DCI may be defined/configured by the entries of a higher layer parameter (e.g., srs-ResourceSetToAddModList and/or srs- ResourceSetToAddModListDCI-0-2 in SRS-config, respectively). The UE may use one or multiple SRS resources for SRS transmission. In a SRS resource set, a maximum number of SRS resources which can be configured to the UE for simultaneous transmission in the same symbol and/or a maximum number of SRS resources may be based on UE capabilities. The SRS resources transmitted simultaneously occupy the same RBs. The UE may be configured with one SRS port for each SRS resource.
[0299] The UE may receive configuration parameter, of a carrier, indicating a number of antenna ports (or uplink Tx antennas or UL Tx chains) for transmission of uplink signals and channels (e.g., SRS and/or PUSCH/PUCCH) via the carrier.
[0300] The UE may transmit the PUSCH transmission using the same antenna ports as the SRS port(s) in the SRS resource(s) indicated by SRI(s). the SRI(s) may be given by DCI (e.g., format 0_1 or 0_2) or by an RRC parameter (e.g., configuredGrantConfig).
[0301] The RRC message(s) may comprise a parameter that indicates an option, e.g., switched UL or dual UL, for UL Tx switching within the cell group (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption), e.g., based on the UE capability information. The RRC message(s) may comprise a parameter that indicates whether power boosting is enabled for UL Tx switching within the cell group (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPowerBoosting).
[0302] The network may configure one or more serving cells for the UE, which may be the SpCell or an SCell of an MCG or SCG. The UE may receive one or more RRC messages comprising configuration parameters of the one or more serving cells. The configuration parameters of a serving cell may indicate downlink configurations and/or uplink configurations. For example, the configuration parameters of the serving cell may indicate one or more downlink BWPs of the serving cell. For example, the configuration parameters of the serving cell may indicate at least one uplink carrier of the serving cell, e.g., UL (NUL) and/or SUL. For an uplink carrier, the configuration parameters may indicate one or more UL BWPs. For an uplink carrier, the configuration parameters may indicate that UL Tx switching is configured (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching).
[0303] The configuration parameters of one or more cells (e.g., CellGroupConfig of a cell group) may indicate that uplink Tx switching is configured for a plurality of bands (e.g., more than two band, via UplinkTxSwitchingMoreBands). The configuration parameters may indicate a list of one or more band pairs configured with uplink Tx switching (e.g., for inter-band GA via uplinkTxSwitchingBandPairList). Each band pair in the list may comprise a first band and a second band. For example, the configuration parameters may indicate a first index of the first band (bandlnfoULI) and a second index of a second band (band lnfoUL2).
[0304] The configuration parameters of the one or more cells may comprise configuration parameters of UL Tx switching for each band pair of the list (e.g., UplinkTxSwitchingBandPairConfig). The configuration parameters of UL Tx switching for each band pair may indicate a switching option for the band pair (e.g., switched/TDM UL or dual UL switching via switchingOptionConfigForBandPair).
[0305] The configuration parameters of UL Tx switching for each band pair may indicate whether UL Tx switching between the two bands of the band pair is configured or not (e.g., 1 Tx-1 Tx switching, or switching of one or at least one Tx antenna chain). The configuration parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a parameter indicating whether 2 UL Tx switching between the two bands of the band pair is configured or not (e.g., 2Tx-2Tx switching, or switching of two Tx antenna chains, via uplinkTxSwitching-2T-Mode or switching2T-Mode). The parameter may indicate 2Tx-2Tx switching mode is configured for inter-band UL GA and/or SUL. The switching gap duration for a triggered uplink switching based on 2Tx-2Tx switching mode may be equal to the switching time capability value reported for the 2T switching mode. If this field is absent (e.g., the configuration parameters of UL Tx switching do not comprise this parameter) and/or uplink Tx switching (via uplinkTxSwitching) is configured, the UE determines/interprets that 1 Tx-2Tx UL Tx switching is configured. In this case, there may be one uplink (or one uplink band in case of intra-band) configured with uplink Tx switching (uplinkTxSwitching), on which the maximum number of antenna ports (e.g., among all configured P-SRS/A-SRS and activated SP-SRS resources) is 1 and/or non-codebook based UL Ml MO is not configured.
[0306] The configuration parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a parameter (UplinkTxSwitchingAssociatedBandDualUL) indicating an associated band (associated Band) for each transmitting band (transmitBand), in case of dual UL. For example, the network ensures that each band pair of a transmitting band and an associated band supports the dualUL switching option.
[0307] The configuration parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-Dual UL- TxState) indicating a state of one or more Tx chains if the state of Tx chains after the UL Tx switching is not unique, e.g., in case of 2Tx-2Tx switching is configured and/or dual uplink is configured (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption is set to dualUL). A first value of the parameter (e.g., value oneT) may indicate 1 Tx is assumed to be supported on the carriers on each band, and a second value of the parameter (value twoT) may indicate 2Tx is assumed to be supported on that carrier. This parameter/field may apply for all band pairs, e.g., if uplink Tx switching for more than two bands (via uplinkTxSwitchingMoreBands) is configured.
[0308] The UL Tx switching configuration associated with an uplink carrier of a cell may indicate whether the configured uplink carrier is “carrierl” or “carried” for dynamic UL Tx switching (e.g., via uplinkTxSwitchingCarrier) in a band pair (e.g., carrier 1 in band 1 and carrier 2 in band 2). For example, the UL “carrierl” may be capable of one transmit antenna connector and UL “carried” may be capable of two transmit antenna connectors. For example, in case of inter-band UL GA or SUL, network configures one of the two uplink carriers involved in dynamic UL TX switching as carrierl and the other as carried. In case of (NG)EN-DC, network always configures the NR carrier as carrier 2.
[0309] The UL Tx switching configuration associated with an uplink carrier of a cell may indicate a location of UL Tx switching period (e.g., via uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod Location) in a band pair (e.g., carrier 1 in band 1 and carrier 2 in band 2). For example, a Boolean parameter/field may indicate whether the location of the UL Tx switching period is configured in this respective UL carrier or not. In case of inter-band UL GA or SUL, network configures this field to TRUE for one of the uplink carriers involved in dynamic UL TX switching and configures this field in the other carrier to FALSE. In case of (NG)EN-DC, network always configures this field to TRUE for NR carrier (i.e. with (NG)EN-DC, the UL switching period always occurs on the NR carrier).
[0310] FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B show examples of UL Tx switching period location for UL Tx switching between pair of carriers/bands. Time mask for switching between two uplink carriers is shown in FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B. A switching time mask may be applicable for an uplink band pair (or an uplink carrier pair, each carrier being in a corresponding band). For example, the uplink band pair may be associated with an inter-band UL GA configuration and/or SUL configuration and/or dual connectivity (e.g., NR-DC and/or EN/DC and/or NE-DC and/or MR-DC). The two uplink carriers may be in different bands with different carrier frequencies. A capability information indicating UL Tx switching period/gap (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod, A/Tx1.Tx2) may be present for the respective band pair/combination associated with the two uplink carriers and/or sent to the network. For example, NR UL carrier 1 is capable of one transmit antenna connector and NR UL carrier 2 is capable of two transmit antenna connectors, e.g., with 3d B boosting on the maximum output power when the capability uplinkTxSwitchingPowerBoosting is present and the IE powerboostingTxSwitching is set to 1. The UE may support the switch between single layer transmission with one antenna port and two-layer transmission with two antenna ports on the two uplink carriers following the scheduling commands and/or rank adaptation. In an example, both single layer and two-layer transmission with 2 antenna ports, and single layer transmission with 1 antenna port may be supported on NR UL carrier 2.
[0311] The switching periods described in FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B are located in either NR carrier 1 or carrier 2 as indicated in RRC signaling (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodLocation). FIG. 24A shows an example time mask for switching between UL carrier 1 and UL Carrier 2, where the switching period is located in carrier 1. FIG. 24B shows an example time mask for switching between UL carrier 1 and UL Carrier 2, where the switching period is located in carrier 2. The length of uplink switching period may be less than the value indicated by UE capability uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod. The requirements may apply for the case of co-located and synchronized network deployment for the two uplink carriers. The requirements may apply for the case of single TAG for the two uplink carriers, e.g. , the same uplink timing for the two carriers.
[0312] The switching time mask/period may be applicable for an uplink band pair of an inter-band UL GA configuration when a capability of 2T switching (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T) is present. Referring to FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B, NR UL carrier 1 in a first band may be capable of two transmit antenna connectors and NR UL carrier 2 in a second band may be capable of two transmit antenna connectors, and/or the two uplink carriers may be in different bands with different carrier frequencies. The UE may support the switch between two-layer transmission with two antenna ports and two-layer transmission with two antenna ports (2Tx-2Tx switching) on the two uplink carriers following the scheduling commands and rank adaptation. Both single layer and two-layer transmission with 2 antenna ports, and single layer transmission with 1 antenna port may be supported on NR UL carrier 1 and carrier 2.
[0313] The UE may determine the switching period location to be in either NR carrier 1 or carrier 2 as indicated in RRC signaling (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodLocation'). The length of uplink switching period may be less than the value indicated by UE capability for 2Tx switching (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T).
[0314] When switching from one carrier to another, if there is no uplink transmission scheduled or configured on the switch-from carrier for at least the duration of the switching period before the point in time the UE is scheduled or configured to start the transmission on the switch-to carrier, the switching period may be fully contained in the time period between the end of the transmission on the switch-from carrier and the start of the transmission on the switch-to carrier. The UE may ignore the RRC signaling (uplinkTxSwitchingPeriodLocation) and may not take effect in this case. [0315] In the NR inter-band CA configuration, the number of NR uplink bands may be three or four or more, e.g., when the capability (BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch-r18) is present. NR UL carrier(s) in each of the three or four or more uplink bands are capable of one or two transmit antenna connector(s), according to the UE capability ( Feature SetUplinkPerCC) .
[0316] Referring to FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B, carrier 1 may be in band X and carrier 2 may be in band Y. The uplink transmission on either band X or band Y may be with one or two transmit antenna connector(s).
[0317] In an example, if NR UL carriers in both bands in one band pair are capable of one transmit antenna connector, 1Tx-1Tx switching is supported for the band pair. 1Tx-1Tx switching may comprise switching of one Tx chain from a first band to a second band of the band pair, wherein both bands of the band pair support one Tx chain. [0318] In an example, if NR UL at least one carrier in one band of one band pair is capable of one transmit antenna connector, and at least one NR UL carrier in the other band of the band pair is capable of two transmit antenna connectors, 1 Tx-2Tx switching is supported for the band pair. 1 Tx-2Tx switching may comprise switching of one Tx chain from a first band to a second band of the band pair, wherein the first band of the band pair supports one Tx chain, and the second band of the band pair supports two Tx chains. [0319] In an example, if NR UL carriers in both bands of one band pair are capable of two transmit antenna connectors, 2Tx-2Tx switching is supported for the band pair. 2Tx-2Tx switching may comprise switching of two Tx chains from a first band to a second band of the band pair, wherein both bands of the band pair support two Tx chains. [0320] Referring to FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B, for each band pair, the switching periods are located in either NR band X or band Y as indicated in RRC signaling (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingBandList-r18). For each band pair, the length of uplink switching period X is indicated by a first UE capability (e.g., switchingPeriodFor1T-r18) when 1 Tx-1 Tx switching and/or 1 Tx-2Tx switching between the two bands in the band pair is supported and/or configured. For each band pair, the length of uplink switching period X is indicated by a second UE capability (e.g., switchingPeriodFor2T-r18) when 2Tx- 2Tx switching between the two bands in the band pair is supported and/or configured. UE may be capable to transmit until the beginning of the switching period and after the end of switching period with the exception of transient periods. [0321] The UE may support dual UL (dualUL) for at least two uplink band pairs in the GA configuration. The two band pairs supporting dual UL may be denoted as band pairs of {band X and band Z} and {band Y and band Z}. The UE may switch one transmitter (e.g., Tx chain) between band X and band Y. In an example, if the UE indicates the band Z is a non-affected band in the capability information (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingMaintainedUL-Trans-r18 or maintained U L-Trans indicating “1”) for band pair [X, Y], the UE may be capable of uplink transmission on band Z during the switching period that is located on band X or Y, and/or the UE may not transmit on band X and/or Y during a time period T 1 located on band X or Y, where the time period T 1 is the length of switching period (reported) for the band pair of band X and band Y. In an example, if the UE does not indicate the band Z is a non-affected band in the capability information (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingMaintainedUL-Trans-r18 or maintainedUL-Trans not indicate “1”), UE is not required to transmit on any of the three bands during the switching period during a time period T 1 located on band X or Y, where T 1 is the length of switching period for the band pair of band X and band Y. In an example, if the UE does not indicate the band Z is a non-affected band in the capability information (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingMaintainedUL-Trans-r18 or maintainedUL- Trans not indicate “1”), and/or if the UE reports a switching period capability (e.g., ULTxSAdditionalPeriod-on- unaffected-band-invovled, or periodOn ULBands), the UE may not transmit on any of the three bands during the switching period indicated by the switching period capability located on band X or Y.
[0322] The UE may support dual UL (dualUL) for at least one uplink band pair including band X and band Y, and two transmit antenna connectors on at least one uplink band of band Z. the UE may switch one transmitter (e.g., Tx chain) between band X and band Z, and across the same time, the UE may switch the other transmitter (e.g., Tx chain) between Y and band Z. The UE may not transmit on any of the three bands during time period with the larger one of switching period T2 and T3, where T2 is the length of switching period for the band pair of band X and band Z, and T3 is the length of switching period for the band pair of band Y and band Z. The UE may report the additional switching period capability (e.g., UplinkTxSwitchingAdditionalPeriodDualUL-r18). The UE may not transmit on any of the three bands during time period indicated by the additional switching period capability.
[0323] In an example, the uplink transmission on band X and band Y may be with one transmit antenna connector and one antenna port, and the uplink transmission on band Z may be with two transmit antenna connectors and two antenna ports. The switching period location may be configured by an RRC parameter, and/or band Z may be with the highest priority according to the RRC configuration.
[0324] The UE may omit uplink transmission during the uplink switching gap WTx1.Tx2 if one or more conditions are met and/or the UE is configured with UL Tx switching (uplinkTxSwitching). The switching gap/period WTx1.Tx2 may be indicated by one or more UE capability (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod for 1 Tx switching and uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T for 2Tx switching) for the respective band combination/pair associated with the two uplink carriers. The UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching with a parameter (e.g., BandCombination- UplinkTxSwitch) for a band combination/pair. For that band combination/pair, the UE may be configured with a MCG using E-UTRA radio access and with a SCG using NR radio access (EN-DC). For that band combination/pair, the UE may be configured with uplink carrier aggregation. For that band combination/pair, the UE may be configured in a serving cell with two uplink carriers with higher layer parameter for SUL supplementaryUplink). The one or more conditions under which the switching gap/period may be present and the location of the switching gap may be defined as follows.
[0325] If an uplink switching is triggered for an uplink transmission starting at To, after To-T0ffeet, the UE may not be expected to cancel the uplink switching, and/or to trigger any other new uplink switching occurring before To for any other uplink transmission that is scheduled after To-T0ffeet, where Toffset is the UE processing procedure time defined for the uplink transmission triggering the switch.
[0326] The UE may not expect to perform more than one uplink switching in a slot with PUL = max p L, 1, UL, 2), where the puu 1 corresponds to the subcarrier spacing of the active UL BWP of one uplink carrier before the switching gap and the puu 2 corresponds to the subcarrier spacing of the active UL BWP of the other uplink carrier after the switching gap.
[0327] A UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching (e.g., with BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch) for a band combination. For that band combination, the UE may be configured with a MCG using E-UTRA radio access and with a SCG using NR radio access (EN-DC). The UE may be configured with uplink switching (e.g., with parameter uplinkTxSwitching).
[0328] The UE may be configured with switched UL transmission mode (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'switchedUL’). The UE may be to transmit in the uplink based on DCI(s) received before To - TOffSet or based on a higher layer configuration(s). The UE may be to transmit an NR uplink that takes place after an E-UTRA uplink on another uplink carrier. The UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap WTx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers. The UE may be to transmit an E-UTRA uplink that takes place after an NR uplink on another uplink carrier. The UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap WTx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers. The UE may not be expected to transmit simultaneously on the NR uplink and the E-UTRA uplink. If the UE is scheduled or configured to transmit any NR uplink transmission overlapping with an E-UTRA uplink transmission, the NR uplink transmission may be dropped. [0329] The UE may be configured with dual UL transmission mode (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'dualUL'). The UE may be to transmit in the uplink based on DCI(s) received before To - TOffSet or based on a higher layer configuration(s). The UE may be to transmit an NR two-port uplink that takes place after an E-UTRA uplink on another uplink carrier. The UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap AfTx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers. The UE may be to transmit an E-UTRA uplink that takes place after an NR two-port uplink on another uplink carrier. The UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap AfTx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers. The UE may not be expected to transmit simultaneously a two- port transmission on the NR uplink and the E-UTRA uplink. In other cases the UE may be expected to transmit normally all uplink transmissions without interruptions. The UE may be configured with tdm-PattemConfig or by tdm-PattemConfig2. For the E-UTRA subframes designated as uplink by the configuration, the UE may assume the operation state in which one-port E-UTRA uplink can be transmitted. For the E-UTRA subframes other than the ones designated as uplink by the configuration (e.g., downlink and/or special and/or flexible subframes/slots/symbols), the UE may assume the operation state in which two- port NR uplink can be transmitted.
[0330] A UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching (e.g., with BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch) for a band combination/pair. For that band combination/pair, the UE may be configured with uplink carrier aggregation. The UE may be configured with uplink switching (e.g., with parameter uplinkTxSwitching). The UE may be to transmit in the uplink based on DCI(s) received before To - TOffSet or based on a higher layer configuration(s). The UE may be to transmit a 2-port transmission on one uplink carrier and the preceding uplink transmission may be a 1 -port transmission on another uplink carrier. The UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap /Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers. The UE may be to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier and the preceding uplink transmission may be a 2-port transmission on another uplink carrier. The UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap A/Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers.
[0331] For the UE configured with switched UL transmission mode (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'switched UL'), when the UE is to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port transmission on another uplink carrier, then the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap A/Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers. For the UE configured with dual UL transmission mode (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'dualUL'), when the UE is to transmit a 2-port transmission on one uplink carrier and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port transmission on the same uplink carrier and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 2-port transmission cannot be supported in the same uplink carrier, then the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap A/Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers. For the UE configured with dual UL transmission mode (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'dualUL'), when the UE is to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port transmission on another uplink carrier and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 2-port transmission can be supported on the same uplink carrier, then the UE may not be expected to transmit for the duration of switching period/gap A/Tx1.Tx2 on any of the two carriers. [0332] For the UE configured with dual UL transmission mode (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOption set to 'dualUL'), if the UE is configured with a transmitter state indicating a first value (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL-TxState set to 'oneT'), when the UE is under the operation state in which 2-port transmission can be supported on one carrier on one band followed by no transmission on any carrier on the same band and 1 -port transmission on the other carrier on another band, the UE may consider this as if 1 -port transmission was transmitted on both uplinks. Otherwise, if the UE is configured with the transmitter state indicating a second value (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL-TxState set to 'twoT'), the UE may consider this as if 2-port transmission took place on the transmitting carrier.
[0333] If 2T switching mode (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-2T-Mode) is configured, when the UE is to transmit a 2-port transmission on one uplink carrier on one band and if the preceding uplink transmission is a 2-port transmission on another uplink carrier on another band, then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching period/gap WTx1.Tx2 on any of the carriers.
[0334] The UE may not be scheduled or configured with uplink transmissions that result in simultaneous transmission on two antenna ports on one uplink carrier on one band, and any transmission on another uplink carrier on another band. In other cases, the UE may be expected to transmit normally all uplink transmissions without interruptions.
[0335] A UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching (e.g., via BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch) for a band combination/pair. For that band combination/pair configured with uplink carrier aggregation with 3 or 4 bands, the two bands involved in the uplink switching may belong to different uplink serving cells, and/or the two bands involved in the uplink switching may belong to one uplink serving cell.
[0336] More than two bands may be involved in the determination of one uplink switching. The UE may be configured on any two of the bands with dual UL (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair set to 'dualUL').
[0337] When the UE is to transmit a 2-port transmission on one uplink carrier on the 1 st band and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port transmission on a carrier on the 2nd and/or 3rd band, and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 1 -port transmission can be supported in the 2nd and 3rd band, then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers.
[0338] When the UE is to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier on the 1 st band and the 2nd band, and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port or 2-port transmission on a carrier on the 3rd band, and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 2-port transmission can be supported on the 3rd band, then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers.
[0339] When the UE is to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier on the 1 st band and the 2nd band, and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port transmission on a carrier on the 1st band and/or the 3rd band, and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 1 -port transmission can be supported in the 1 st and 3rd band, and/or if the UE indicates maintained/unaffected UL transmission (maintainedUL-Trans) on/for the 1st band for band pair{the 2nd band, the 3rd band}, then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers on the 2nd band and the 3rd band. Otherwise the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers. [0340] When the UE is to transmit a 1 -port transmission on one uplink carrier on the 1 st band and the 2nd band, and if the preceding uplink transmission was a 1 -port transmission on a carrier on the 3rd band and/or the 4th band, and/or the UE is under the operation state in which 1 -port transmission can be supported in the 3rd and 4th band, then the UE may not transmit for the duration of switching gap NTX1-TX2 on any of the carriers.
[0341] The UE may not be scheduled or configured to transmit on more than two uplink bands at any given time. [0342] If the UE indicated a capability of dual UL for a band pair (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOptionForBandPair set to 'Dual UL’, or ‘Both’ for a band pair) in the band combination, the UE may be configured with dual UL (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair set to 'dualUL') for that band pair. If the UE indicated a capability of switched UL for a band pair (e.g., uplinkTxSwitchingOptionForBandPair set to ‘Switched UL’, or ‘Both’ for a band pair) in the band combination, the UE may be configured with switched UL (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair set to 'switchedUL') for that band pair.
[0343] If the UE is configured with a first value of a Tx chain state parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL- TxState set to 'oneT'), when the UE is under the operation state in which 1 -port transmission can be supported on one carrier on the 1st band and the 2nd band followed by no transmission on any carrier on these two bands and 1 -port transmission on the other carrier on the 3rd band, the UE may consider this as if 1 -port transmission was transmitted on the 3rd band and the band associated with the 3rd band (as configured by associatedBand). Otherwise, if the UE is configured with a second value of the Tx chain state parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL-TxState set to 'twoT'), the UE may consider this as if 2-port transmission took place on the transmitting carrier. Even if all cells in a band are deactivated, that does not invalidate the associated band configuration that is indicating the band as associated band for the other band(s).
[0344] If the UE is configured with a first value of a Tx chain state parameter (e.g., uplinkTxSwitching-DualUL- TxState set to 'oneT'), and/or if a band in the band combination is not configured as dualUL for any band pair it belongs to, when the UE is to transmit a 1 -port transmission on a carrier on the band, the UE may consider this as if 2-port transmission took place on the transmitting carrier.
[0345] A UE may indicate a capability for uplink switching (e.g., with BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch or uplinkTxSwitchingPeriod2T2T) for a band combination/pair. For that band combination/pair, the UE may be configured in a serving cell with two uplink carriers, e.g., configured with SUL with higher layer parameter supplementaryUplink. The UE may be configured with uplink switching (e.g., with parameter uplinkTxSwitching). If the UE is to transmit any uplink channel or signal on a different uplink from the preceding transmission occasion based on DCI(s) received before To - TOffSet or based on a higher layer configuration(s), then the UE may assume that an uplink switching is triggered in a duration of switching gap VTx1.Tx2, where To is the start time of the first symbol of the transmission occasion of the uplink channel or signal and TOffSet is the preparation procedure time of the transmission occasion of the uplink channel or signal. During the switching gap VTx1.Tx2, the UE may not be expected to transmit on any of the two uplinks. In other cases, the UE may be expected to transmit normally all uplink transmissions without interruptions. [0346] There are a variety of emerging and new consumer services which require high uplink date rate, e.g. , HD video calls, online webcast/sales, augmented reality (AR), etc., which require about ~ 10s Mbps uplink data rate. In order to boost the uplink throughput and capacity for such widely applicable scenarios, it is necessary to efficiently utilize all uplink resources in multi-carrier scenarios (>2 frequency bands). In practical deployments scenarios, networks will support more than 2 bands. Therefore, efficient utilization of these UL resources may be prioritized.
[0347] However, it is difficult to implement more than 2Tx for smartphones due to increasing cost, complexity, heat generation, power consumption and intermodulation interference. Smartphones today are not capable of simultaneously transmitting on more than 2 bands, since current commercial smartphones support up to 2Tx RF chains. More Tx RF chains are difficult to be implemented for smartphone due to the following reasons: the cost and complexity is increasing because of more Tx RF chains, power supply modules and so on; the size, heat generation and power consumption will also increase dramatically if more than 2 power supply modules work at the same time; more Tx RF chains also increase the number of PLLs (phase locked loops) and LOs (local oscillators) which cause intermodulation interference and degrade the downlink performance for some band combination; and, some Tx RF resources may be under-utilized due to power limitation or restrictions of less available UL slots on TDD band. This makes it very difficult for networks to fully exploit all of available uplink resources/bands, and for smartphones to increase their uplink data rates.
[0348] Enhancements for operation with more than 4 Tx antenna may be considered targeting devices such as OPEs or loT devices without size and cost constraints. Enhancements for frequency-selective precoding may be considered to provide most gains when the transmission includes 4 MIMO layers, so, such gains would not be applicable for 2Tx smartphones. Enhancements for mTRP (multi Transmit Receive Point) uplink are in principle applicable to all device types, and provide gains mostly for cell-edge performance in macro-cell mTRP deployments, however, uplink performance may be improved for smartphones not in coverage-limited conditions.
[0349] There is commercial interest expressed for developing standard support for 3Tx UL MIMO for enabling the market introduction of UEs with 3 Tx antennas. Compared to most current mobile UE equipped with 2Tx, 3Tx will be beneficial for UL throughput. Boosting UL throughput and improving UL coverage (for cell-edge UE) is demanding for NR-UL-enhancement, and the UL 3-Tx operation (introducing one extra Tx) is to provide good tradeoff between UL performance and UE-implementation complexity (e.g., for an advanced smartphone). UL enhancements are required for heavy UL transmission.
[0350] 2Tx chain was the basic handheld UE assumption in NR FR1 high bands, for example n41 , n77, n78 and n79. This made UL MIMO for single CO enabled in the beginning of 5G NR in these bands. To enhance the UL throughput, UL GA was introduced in Rel-17, however, it was found that both UL CA and UL MIMO have big impacton UE architecture due to limitation of max 200MHz commercial power amplifier (PA) CBW. This led to support of UL CA+UL MIMO only in 200MHz contiguous UL GA case with the 2Tx chain assumption. For intra-band non-contiguous UL GA or inter-band UL GA, only a single layer can be supported with the 2Tx chain assumption. The reason behind is that in Rel-17 FR1 enhancement, though one PA to cover the non-contiguous UL GA was considered to be a potential implementation, there would be large MPR which makes UE implement two PAs with each PA covering 1CC to support the non-contiguous UL CA in the end. That’s why two PAs with each supporting one CO of non-contiguous UL CA is the baseline architecture for non-contiguous UL CA without UL Ml MO. Therefore, inter-band UL CA cannot support UL MIMO with 2Tx chain restriction. That means UE cannot benefit from UL CA and UL MIMO simultaneously, especially in non-contiguous and inter-band cases to improve UL performance. UL MIMO for non-contiguous UL CA most likely will not be supported due to large MPR in 2Tx chain assumption.
[0351] The max capability that 2Tx UE can achieve is max power is 26+26, max MIMO-K3A is 2layer+200MHz contiguous CA, no MIMO in non-contiguous CA, inter-band CA, and EN-DC, and max concurrent Bands is two. 3Tx UE can bring potential enhancements, e.g. , power enhancement, MIMO enhancement, 3 bands Tx, and Tx switching transmission enhancement. For example, MIMO can be enhanced by 2 layer in one band and 1 layer in the other band for non-contiguous UL CA, inter-band UL CA, and EN-DC. With 3Tx chain architecture, the 1 Tx low band and 2Tx high band concurrent transmission can be achieved. For these UEs, Ous Tx switching may be supported, for example switch from the low band to high band to save power, etc.
[0352] FIG. 25A illustrates a 2Tx UE architecture. This example shows a UE architecture with 2 Tx chains and 2 LOs that can generate two frequency points for up conversion. Two PAs may be activated in the RFFE.
[0353] FIG. 25B illustrates a 3Tx UE architecture with 2 LOs. This example shows a UE architecture with 3 Tx chains and 2 LOs and/or 3 PAs. In this example, two of the three Tx chains share one LO and the other Tx chain has a dedicated LO.
[0354] FIG. 25C illustrates a 3Tx UE architecture with 3 LOs. This example shows a UE architecture with 3 Tx chains and 3 LOs and/or 3 PAs. In this example, each Tx chains has a dedicated LO.
[0355] Compared with current 2Tx UE architecture (e.g., as in the example of FIG. 25A), some UEs currently already have 3Tx chain with 2LO (e.g., as in the example of FIG. 25B). For these UEs, the update is mainly in the radio frequency front end (RFFE). Besides, current UE is typically implemented with 2PAs in high bands like n41 , n78 and n79, and another PA module to support the low and mid bands. Therefore, if the 3Tx happens on the same high band, then another high band PA needs to be implemented. However, if the 3Tx happens between two bands with one in the low band and another in the high band, then the only update is activating the three PAs simultaneously (e.g., in FIG. 25B only two PAs may be activated). For the UE architecture with 3 dedicated LOs (e.g., as in the example of FIG. 25C), one additional LO is needed, and the impact to RFFE is similar. This UE can support three different bands transmissions simultaneously, e.g., 2 LTE + 1 NR band, or 2 low frequency NR bands + 1 high frequency NR band, or 1 LTE band + 2 NR bands, or 1 low frequency NR bands +2 high frequency NR bands.
[0356] 3 -antenna-port (3Tx) codebook-based transmissions may be supported by wireless devices and configured by the network. 3Tx simultaneous transmissions for two bands (e.g., inter-band CA/EN-DC) with 1 Tx on one uplink operating band and 2Tx on the other uplink operating band (1 Tx at band A +2Tx at band B) may be configured. 3Tx simultaneous transmission for three bands (e.g., inter-band UL CA/EN-DC) with 1Txon each uplink operating band (1Tx at band A + 1Tx at band B + 1Tx at band C) may be configured. [0357] For example, a wireless device may be capable of concurrently transmitting multiple wireless transmissions using the multiple Tx antenna chains. For example, inter-band UL CA and/or EN-DC may be enhanced for 3Tx UEs for operation on band combinations with two bands. For example, 3Tx band combinations may be defined/configured with 1 CO in each band. Tx capability may be 1 Tx in one band and 2Tx in the other band.
[0358] To support 3Tx and/or transmission with 3Tx chains, 3 SRS ports are needed. 3 SRS ports may be enabled by muting one SRS port in a 4-port SRS resource and/or by combining ports from multiple SRS resources (e.g., three 1 -port SRS resources and/or one 2-port SRS resource and one 1 -port SRS resource). It can enable dynamic switching among PUSCH transmissions with 1 port and/or 2 ports and/or 3 ports. By allowing indicating one or more SRS resources, it can switch between PUSCH transmissions with 1 port, 2 ports and 3 ports.
[0359] In existing technologies, UL Tx switching is an important feature that enables high throughput multi-stream data transmission as well as UL coverage enhancement at the same time for inter-band CA. In fact, dual UL transmissions are only possible through (based on) UL Tx switching. However, the existing technology does not support uplink Tx switching for a UE with more than 2Tx antenna connectors (2Tx ports or 2Tx chains). For advanced UEs with 3 or more Tx antenna connectors (e.g., 3Tx ports or 3Tx chains) it will be a great performance loss not to support UL Tx switching in inter-band CA or EN-DC, considering that even a less advanced UE with 2Tx can benefit from high throughput multi-layer transmission in one band, and simultaneous/dual UL transmissions in two different bands. It is desired to enable UL Tx switching for the UEs with 3 or more Tx chains or antenna connectors/ports (or 3 or more active Tx chains or antenna connectors/ports).
[0360] The implementation of the existing technologies enables uplink Tx switching based on two options: switched uplink (option 1, switchedUL) and/or dual uplink (option 2, dualUL) on two carriers in two different bands with a maximum of two Tx chains/antennas/ports (or two active Tx chains/antennas/ports) (referring to FIG. 21 A and FIG. 21 B and FIG. 23). The implementation of the existing technologies cannot enable dual (simultaneous/concurrent) and/or switched (TDMed) uplink transmissions, on two carriers in two different bands with 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports (or 3 or more active Tx chains/antennas/ports). For example, to support dual (e.g., concurrent or simultaneous) transmission of 2-layer UL transmission using 2 antenna ports in one band (a.k.a., 2-port transmission) and 1 -layer UL transmission using 1 antenna port in another band (a.k.a., 1 -port transmission), the UE capability and configurations need to be enhanced. Embodiments enable support of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports operating in two bands based on switched UL and/or dual UL mode (UL Tx switching option). [0361] The implementation of the existing technologies may fall short in conveying the UE capability for the UL Tx switching option (e.g., switched UL and/or dual UL) based on three or more Tx chains/antennas/ports. For example, the existing capability information may indicate that the UE supports switched UL and/or dual UL on a band pair or a band combination, and/or that the UE supports 1 or 2 or 3 transmit antenna connectors on each band of a band pair/combination, however, none of these capabilities nor any combination thereof can indicate or guarantee that the UE can support 3 active Tx antenna connectors on the band pair/combination at the same time, e.g., to perform dual (simultaneous/concurrent) uplink transmissions using three or more Tx chains/antennas/ports (or three or more active Tx chains/antennas/ports) for operation on the band pair (e.g., 1 Tx ©band A +2Tx ©band B). The existing technology fails to provide the network with adequate information to determine UL configurations and/or schedule UL transmissions.
[0362] For example, in the existing technologies, a UE may be capable of dual UL on a band pair based on 2 Tx chains (or 2 active Tx chains), e.g., a 1 -port transmission using 1Tx chain on band A and 1 -port transmission using 1Tx on band B. For example, in the existing technologies, a UE may be capable of configuring (e.g., tuning its hardware) 2 Tx antenna connectors in band A and 1 Tx antenna connector in band B. However, in these example, the UE may not have enough power supply to support dual UL on the band pair (A,B) based on 3 Tx chains (or 3 active Tx chains), e.g., a 2-port transmission using 2Tx chains on band A and 1 -port transmission using 1 Tx on band B. For example, dual (concurrent) UL (transmissions) using 3 active Tx antennas may require additional capabilities of the wireless device (e.g., power supply). The existing technologies fail to convey this level of capability information to the network, and thus, the network may fail to determine whether a UE supports dual (concurrent or simultaneous) UL transmissions using three Tx chains (or three active Tx chains) in two bands at the same time or not (if not, switched/TDMed UL may be used). For example, even though a UE can configure its hardware to support 1Tx chain in a first band and 2Tx chains in a second band, it may not be able to transmit si mu Itaneously/concu rrently using these three Tx chains in the first band and the second band, e.g., due to power supply constraints.
[0363] The implementation of the existing technologies may result in misalignment between the UE and the base station about the UE capabilities associated with UL Tx switching based on 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports. For example, the implementation of the existing technologies may result in the network assuming such advanced capability for a UE, and configuring/scheduling the UE with UL transmissions across UL carriers that it cannot effectively fulfill, which may yield to failure of UL transmissions and/or waste of UL resources. Additionally, or alternatively, the implementation of the existing technologies may result in the network assuming the legacy capability for a UE (e.g., in a conservative approach), and not efficiently configuring/scheduling the UE with high throughput dual UL transmissions using MIMO in inter-band GA based on simultaneous/concurrent use of the three or more Tx chains (or three or more active Tx chains). Therefore, the implementation of the existing technologies cannot enable 2-layer UL MIMO in interband CA/EN-DC, and additional capability signaling is needed for the network to efficiently configure UL carriers in an inter-band GA and/or EN-DC with MIMO based on UL Tx switching.
[0364] The support of UL Tx switching may be very scenario/implementation-specific, depending highly on the UE RF architecture as well as the band combination (i.e., band-pair-specific). For example, a UE may support dual UL on a first band pair, but not on a second band pair. For example, a UE may support dual UL on a band pair using 2 active antenna ports, but not 3 or more active antenna ports.
[0365] Embodiments enable indication of whether a UE supports dual UL on a band pair/combination using 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports (or 3 or more active Tx chains/antennas/ports), e.g., for simultaneous/concurrent transmission of a first 1 -port transmission on a first band (e.g., 1 -layer PUSCH or 1-port UL using 1Tx chain ©band A) and a second 2-port transmission on a second band (e.g., 2-layer PUSCH or 2-port UL using 2Tx chains ©band B), and/or for simultaneous/concurrent transmission of three 1 -port transmissions on three bands. Embodiments enable the network to configure UL carriers with a 1 -port (1 -layer) transmission on a first band and a simultaneous 2-port (2-layer) transmission on a second band, based on UL Tx switching across the first band and the second band for a UE with 3 or more Tx chains/antennas/ports (or 3 or more active Tx chains/antennas/ports).
[0366] Embodiments of the present disclosure are related to an approach for UL Tx switching option for UEs with 3 or more (e.g., M, M=3, 4, 5,...) Tx chains/antenna ports. Embodiments enable the network to determine whether a UE supports UL Tx switching based on switched UL (e.g., no simultaneous/concurrent/dual UL transmissions, or option 1 orswitchedUL), 2T dual UL (e.g., only 1 -port + 1 -port simultaneous/concurrent/dual UL transmissions, or option 2 or 2TdualUL), and/or 3T dual UL (e.g., 1 -port + 2-port simultaneous/concurrent/dual UL transmissions, or option 3 or 3TdualUL), and/or MT dual UL (e.g., 1 -port + (M-1)-port simultaneous/concurrent/dual UL transmissions, or option M or MTdualUL).
[0367] In an example embodiment, a UE may transmit a capability information message indicating whether/that the UE supports (is capable of) UL Tx switching on/in/across a band pair/combination based on MT dual UL (M>=3). M may be the number of Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports of the UE. For example, the capability information message may indicate whether/that the UE is capable of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL using M Tx chains/antennas/ports (or M active Tx chains/antennas/ports) on the two bands of the band pair. In an embodiment, the capability information message may indicate whether/that the UE supports dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions on the two bands of the band pair.
[0368] The dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions may comprise a first 1 -port UL transmission on a first band of the band pair and a second 2-port (or (M-l)-port) UL transmission on a second band of the band pair. For example, the first 1 -port UL transmission may be a 1 -layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with a 1 Tx antenna connector (chain or port) on the first band. For example, the second 2-port UL transmission may be a 2-layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with 2 Tx antenna connectors (chains or ports) on the second band.
[0369] The dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions may comprise a first 2-port UL transmission on a first band of the band pair and a second (M-2)-port UL transmission on a second band of the band pair (e.g., M>=4). For example, the first 2-port UL transmission may be a 2-layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with 2 Tx antenna connectors (chains or ports) on the first band. For example, the second (M-2)-port UL transmission may be a (M-2)- layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with M-2 Tx antenna connectors (chains or ports) on the second band.
[0370] In an example embodiment, additionally or alternatively, the UE may transmit a capability information message indicating whether/that the UE supports (is capable of) UL Tx switching on/in/across a band pair/combination based on 2T dual UL. For example, the capability information message may indicate whether/that the UE is capable of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL using 2 Tx chains/antennas/ports (or 2 active Tx chains/antennas/ports) on the two bands of the band pair. In an embodiment, the capability information message may indicate whether/that the UE supports dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions on the two bands of the band pair, comprising a first 1 -port UL transmission on a first band of the band pair and a second 1 -port UL transmission on a second band of the band pair. For example, the first 1 -port UL transmission may be a 1 -layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with a 1 Tx antenna connector (chain or port) on the first band. For example, the second 1 -port UL transmission may be a 1 -layer uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) with 1 Tx antenna connector (chain or port) on the second band.
[0371] In an embodiment, the UE may support 2 or more Tx chains on a first band and/or second band in a band pair. The band pair may comprise the first band and the second band. However, the UE may not support 2T dual UL (concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmission using 2Tx chains) and/or 3T dual UL (concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmission using 3Tx chains) on the first band and the second band. For example, the capability information message may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching (option) based on switched UL (TDMed, e.g., switchedUL) on the band pair.
[0372] In an embodiment, the capability information message may indicate that the UE does not support 3T dual UL on the band pair, e.g., the UE may not be capable of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions on the two bands of the band pair, comprising a 2-port UL transmission on a first band of the band pair and a 1 -port UL transmission on a second band of the band pair. For example, the UE may support 2 or more Tx chains on the first band and/or the second band. However, the UE may not be capable of using 2 (or more) Tx chains on the first band at the same time (simultaneously, concurrently) with the 1 (or more) Tx chain on the second band. For example, the UE may not have enough power supply for the concurrent transmissions using total of 3 (or more) antenna ports. For example, the capability information message may indicate that the UE supports 2T dual UL on the band pair, e.g., the UE may be capable of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) UL transmissions on the two bands of the band pair, comprising a 1 -port UL transmission on the first band of the band pair and a 1 -port UL transmission on the second band of the band pair. For example, the UE may have enough power supply for the concurrent transmissions using total of 2 antenna ports. For example, the UE may have 2Tx chains on the first band, and for dual UL with the second band, may be capable of using only one Tx chain of the 2Tx chains on the first band (2T dual: 1Tx ©firsthand + 1Tx ©second band). For example, the UE may not allocate/generate any power for the second Tx chain on the first band, e.g., during the dual UL transmissions.
[0373] Example embodiments of the present disclosure may provide enhancement for inter-band UL GA with Ml MO. Embodiment enable the network to plan for configuration of UL carriers for du al/concurrent/simu Itaneou s UL transmissions using three or more Tx chains (or three or more active Tx chains), such that maximal UE capability can be exploited towards concurrent transmission of high-throughput UL and reliable UL on two or more bands.
[0374] Based on the embodiments, the network may be able to schedule uplink grants and/or transmissions more efficiently for a UE in case of inter-band UL GA and/or EN-DC based on the UE capabilities.
[0375] For example, if the UE indicates that it can support 3(or more)T dual uplinks on a first band and a second band, the network may schedule a first 2(or more)-port uplink transmission on the first band and a concurrent/simultaneous second 1 -port uplink transmission on the second band, wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission overlap at least partially in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols), and thus, increase the UL throughput. For example, the network may determine/set the parameter(s) for UL Tx switching configuration (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair and/or switching2T-Mode and/or switching3T-Mode, etc.) for a band pair and/or a plurality of cells based on this capability. For example, the network may enable/configure 2T switching (switching2T-Mode) and/or 3T switching (switching3T-Mode) and/or 3-port/3T dual UL (3TdualUL) for the band pair, e.g., if the UE indicates support of 3(or more)T dual uplink capability on the band pair.
[0376] For example, the UE may have one Tx chain/antenna in band A. The network may schedule/configure the UE with a 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n. The UE may have 2 Tx chains/antennas in band C in time slot/symbol n-1. The UE may indicate 3T dual UL capability in band A and band B. The network may configure UL Tx switching for the band pair (A,B) and/or band pair (B,C), such that 3T dual UL (transmission(s)) on band A and band B is enabled/configured and/or 2T (antenna) switching between band C and band B is enabled/configured. Based on this configuration, the UE may be able to switch 2 Tx chains from band C to band B and perform a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 2-port UL transmission on band B with the 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n (e.g., instead of waiting until after the 1 -port transmission on band AforTDMed transmission based on switched UL (switchedUL) in time slot/symbol n+1), and concurrently achieve low-latency high-throughput uplink transmissions.
[0377] For example, if the UE indicates that it cannot support 3(or more)T dual uplinks on a first band and a second band, but it supports 2T dual UL on the first band and the second band, the network may not schedule a first 2(or more)-port uplink transmission on the first band and a concurrent/simultaneous second 1 -port uplink transmission on the second band, wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission overlap at least partially in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols). The network may instead schedule a first 1 -port uplink transmission on the first band and a concurrent/simultaneous second 1 -port uplink transmission on the second band, wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission overlap at least partially in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols). Thus, the UE can successfully perform the scheduled UL transmissions and avoid interference and/or waste of UL resources. For example, the network may determine/set the parameter(s) for UL Tx switching configuration (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair and/or switching2T-Mode and/or switching3T-Mode, etc.) for a band pair and/or a plurality of cells based on this capability. For example, the network may not enable/configure 2T switching (switching2T-Mode) and/or 3-port/3T dual UL (3Tdual UL) for the band pair if the UE does not support the 3(or more)T dual uplinks capability.
[0378] For example, the UE may have one Tx chain/antenna in band A. The network may schedule/configure the UE with a 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n. The UE may have 2 Tx chains/antennas in band C in time slot/symbol n-1. The UE may indicate no support of 3T dual UL capability in band A and band B. But the UE may indicate support of 2T dual UL capability in band A and band B. The network may configure UL Tx switching for the band pair (A,B) and/or band pair (B,C), such that 3T dual UL (transmission(s)) on band A and band B is disabled (e.g., notconfigured/enabled) and/or 2T switching between band C and band B is disabled (e.g., not configured/enabled), and/or 2T dual ULon band A and band B is enabled/configured and/or 1T switching between band C and band B is enabled/configured. Based on this configuration, the UE may be able to switch 1Tx chains from band C to band B and perform a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port UL transmission on band B with the 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n (e.g., instead of waiting until after the 1 -port transmission on band A for TDMed transmission based on switched UL (switchedUL) in time slot/symbol n+1), and concurrently achieve low-latency high-throughput uplink transmissions. Additionally, the UE may not need to waste power and time to switch the other UL Tx chain from band C to band B, when it’s not going to be used for the dual UL transmissions.
[0379] For example, the UE may indicate that it cannot support 3(or more)T dual uplinks and 2T dual UL on a first band and a second band. The network may not schedule a first uplink transmission on the first band and a concurrent/simultaneous second uplink transmission on the second band, wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission overlap at least partially in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols). The network may instead schedule a first uplink transmission on the first band in a first time slot/symbol (e.g., time slot/symbol n) and a second uplink transmission on the second band in a second time slot/symbol (e.g., time slot/symbol n+1), wherein the first UL transmission and the second UL transmission do not overlap in time domain (e.g., in one or more symbols). Thus, the UE can successfully perform the scheduled UL transmissions in a TDMed/switched way and avoid interference and/or waste of UL resources. For example, the network may determine/set the parameter(s) for UL Tx switching configuration (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair and/or switching2T-Mode and/or switching3T-Mode, etc.) for a band pair and/or a plurality of cells based on this capability. For example, the network may disable (e.g., not configure/enable) 2T switching (switching2T-Mode) and/or 3-port/3T dual UL (3Tdual UL) for the band pair, if the UE does not support the 3(or more)T dual uplinks capability.
[0380] For example, the UE may have one Tx chain/antenna in band A. The network may schedule/configure the UE with a 1 -port transmission on band A in time slot/symbol n. The UE may have 2 Tx chains/antennas in band C in time slot/symbol n-1. The UE may indicate no support of 3T dual UL and/or 2T dual UL capability in band A and band B. The network may configure UL Tx switching for the band pair (A,B) and/or band pair (B,C), such that switched UL on band A and band B is enabled/configured, and/or 3T dual UL on band A and band B is disabled (e.g., not configured/enabled), and/or 2T dual ULon band A and band B is disabled (e.g., not configured/enabled), and/or 2T switching between band C and band B is disabled (e.g., not configured/enabled). Based on this configuration, the UE may be able to switch 1 Tx chain at a time from band C to band B and perform a switched/TDMed UL transmissions on band A in time slot/symbol n and on band B in time slot/symbol n+1. Therefore, UE does not need to waste power and time to switch the other UL Tx chain from band C to band B, when it’s not going to be used for the dual UL transmissions.
[0381] FIG. 26 illustrates an example of signaling of uplink transmit antenna switching capability as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. The uplink transmit antenna switching capability may indicate support of UL Tx switching based on 3T (e.g., 2T+1T) dual UL.
[0382] As shown in FIG. 26, a UE may receive from a base station, a message (e.g., RRC message) comprising enquiry for UL Tx switching capability of the UE. For example, the UE may receive a capability enquiry message comprising one or more parameters indicating a request for the UE’s capability of UL Tx (transmit antenna) switching. In response to the UE capability enquiry and/or the request for the UL Tx switching capability, the UE may transmit one or more capability information messages. The one or more capability information messages may comprise configuration(s) (information elements) of UL Tx switching capability of the UE across one or more band combinations comprising a band pair (A,B). The band pair may comprise a first band (band A) and a second band (band B).
[0383] The configuration(s) of UL Tx switching capability may comprise one or more parameters indicating whether the UE supports uplink Tx (transmit antenna) switching based on MT (e.g., (M-1 )Tx ©band A + 1 Tx ©band B) dual uplink or not. MT dual uplink may refer to dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmission(s) using (a total number of) M Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports across two or more bands. MT dual uplink may refer to UL Tx switching (option) based on (a total number of) M Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports across two or more bands.
[0384] In an example embodiment, M may be 3. For example, the one or more capability information messages may messages may comprise one or more parameters indicating support of UL Tx switching based on 2T+1T (3T) dual UL on band pair (A, B) . For example, the one or more capability information messages may messages may comprise one or more parameters indicating support of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmission(s) using (a total number of) 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports across the band pair (A, B). The band pair may comprise a first band (band A) and a second band (band B).
[0385] In an embodiment, the one or more capability information messages may indicate support of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmissions comprising a first 2-port uplink transmission (using 2 transmit antenna connectors/ports) on band A, and a second 1 -port uplink transmission (using 1 transmit antenna connector/port) on band B. In an embodiment, the one or more capability information messages may indicate support of dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmissions comprising a first 2-port uplink transmission (using 2 transmit antenna connectors/ports) on band B, and a second 1 -port uplink transmission (using 1 transmit antenna connector/port) on band B. The embodiments enable dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmission on band A and band B using three (or more) active antenna chains and/or transmit antenna connectors/ports.
[0386] Throughout this disclosure, the following terms may be used interchangeably to refer to transmit antenna connectors or ports: transmit chain, transmit antenna, transmit antenna port, transmit antenna connector, Tx chain, Tx antenna, Tx antenna port, Tx antenna connector, port, antenna, antenna port, antenna connector.
[0387] Throughout this disclosure, the following terms may be used interchangeably to refer to uplink carrier/channels and/or transmissions one two or more frequency bands that at least partially overlap in time domain (e.g., at least in one symbol): dual uplink, dual uplink transmission(s), concurrent uplink, concurrent uplink transmission(s), simultaneous uplink, simultaneous uplink transmission(s).
[0388] Throughout this disclosure, the following terms may be used interchangeably to refer to dual/concurrent uplink transmissions with (e.g., using) a total number of M Tx antenna connectors/ports on/across two or more bands (e.g., M>=3): MT dual UL, 3Tdual, 3T dual, 1T+2T dual, 2T+1T dual, 1T+2T concurrent, 2T+1T concurrent, 2-port+1 port dual/concurrent UL, 1 -port+2-port concurrent UL.
[0389] FIG. 27 illustrates an example of dual uplink transmission based on uplink transmit antenna switching capability as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. [0390] As shown in FGI. 27, the UE may receive a UE capability enquiry message comprising/indicating a request for UL Tx switching capability of the UE for a band combination (e.g., one or more band pairs). In an embodiment, the UE capability enquiry message may comprise/indicate a request for dual/concurrent UL capability of the UE for/across two or more bands of a band combination (e.g., one or more band pairs).
[0391] The UE may transmit a UE capability information message to the base station, e.g., in response to the UE capability inquiry. The UE may include UL Tx switching capability information in the UE capability information message, e.g., in response to the request for UL Tx switching capability. The UE may include UL Tx switching capability information of a band pair in the UE capability information message, e.g., in response to the request for UL Tx switching capability for a band combination comprising the two bands of the band pair.
[0392] In an embodiment, the UE may include one or more parameters in the capability information message. The one or more parameters may indicate MT dual UL capability on/for a band pair. MT dual capability may refer to a capability of the UE to support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using a total of M Tx antenna ports on the band pair. For example, the UE may include the one or more parameters in the capability information message in response to the request for UL Tx switching capability on a band combination comprising the two bands of the band pair. For example, the one or more parameters may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching across the two bands of the band pair for switching scenarios that enable or result in dual/concurrent UL transmissions using a total of M Tx antenna ports (or M active Tx antenna ports) on the band pair.
[0393] In the example of FIG. 27, the UE may indicate 3T (e.g., 2Tx@band A + 1 Tx@band B and/or 1 Tx@band A + 2Tx@band B) dual UL capability on/for a band pair (A,B). 3T dual capability may refer to a capability of the UE to support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using a total of 3 Tx antenna ports on the band pair. For example, the UE may include the one or more parameters in the capability information message in response to the request for UL Tx switching capability on a band combination comprising the two bands of the band pair. For example, the one or more parameters may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching across the two bands of the band pair for switching scenarios that enable or result in dual/concurrent UL transmissions using a total of 3 Tx antenna ports (or 3 active Tx antenna ports) on the band pair.
[0394] In an embodiment, the UE capability information message may comprise configurations or information elements of band combinations (e.g., a plurality of bands) and/or feature sets that the UE supports on the band combinations. The configurations or information elements of band combinations and/or feature sets may comprise parameters of UL Tx switching across the bands in the band combination. For example, the UE capability information message may comprise parameters of uplink Tx switching for a band pair comprising a first band (e.g., band A) and a second band (e.g., band B) of the band combination.
[0395] In an embodiment, the parameters of uplink Tx switching of a band pair may indicate the UE capability in supporting UL Tx switching for/across the band pair (A,B) based on MT dual UL (e.g., M=3,4, ... ). The parameters of UL Tx switching may indicate the UE capability of UL Tx switching for/across the band pair (A,B) such as to support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using M (M>=3) Tx chains on the band pair. [0396] In an embodiment, the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a first parameter indicating whether the UE supports switching of 2 Tx chains (e.g., 2T switching mode) on the bands pair (A,B). For example, the first parameter may indicate a first UL Tx switching gap/period as a duration that the UE requires for switching the 2 Tx chains between the first band (band A) and the second band (band B). For example, the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a second parameter indicating whether the UE supports switching of 3 Tx chains (e.g., 3T switching mode) on the bands pair (A,B). For example, the second parameter may indicate a second UL Tx switching gap/period as a duration that the UE requires for switching the 3 Tx chains between the first band (band A) and the second band (band B). For example, the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a third parameter indicating whether the UE supports switching of M Tx chains (e.g., MT switching mode) on the bands pair (A,B). For example, the third parameter may indicate a third UL Tx switching gap/period as a duration that the UE requires for switching the M Tx chains between the first band (band A) and the second band (band B).
[0397] In an embodiment, the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise (MT) dual UL capability parameters indicating whether the UE supports dual/concurrent UL transmissions using M (M>=3) Tx chains on the band pair. [0398] In an embodiment, the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a first parameter indicating whether the UE supports 2T dual uplink on the band pair (A,B) or not. For example, a first value of the first parameter may indicate that the UE supports dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 2 Tx chains on the band pair. For example, a second value of the first parameter may indicate that the UE does not support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 2 Tx chains on the band pair. 2T dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
[0399] In an embodiment, the parameters of UL Tx switching may not comprise the first parameter indicating that the UE does not support 2T dual uplink on the band pair (A, B) .
[0400] In an embodiment, the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a second parameter indicating whether the UE supports 3T dual uplink on the band pair (A, B) or not. For example, a first value of the second parameter may indicate that the UE supports dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 3 Tx chains on the band pair. For example, a second value of the second parameter may indicate that the UE does not support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 3 Tx chains on the band pair. 3T dual uplink may comprise a 2-port (e.g., 2-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B. 3T dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 2-port (e.g., 2-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
[0401] In an embodiment the parameters of UL Tx switching may not comprise the second parameter indicating that the UE does not support 3T dual uplink on the band pair (A,B).
[0402] In an embodiment, the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a third parameter indicating whether the UE supports MT dual uplink (M>=3) on the band pair (A, B) or not. For example, a first value of the third parameter may indicate that the UE supports dual/concurrent UL transmissions using M (M>=3) Tx chains on the band pair. For example, a second value of the third parameter may indicate that the UE does not support dual/concurrent UL transmissions using M (M>=3) Tx chains on the band pair. MT dual uplink may comprise a (M-l)-port (e.g., (M-l)-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B. MT dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous (M-l)-port (e.g., (M-l)-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
[0403] In an embodiment the parameters of UL Tx switching may not comprise the third parameter indicating that the UE does not support MT dual uplink on the band pair (A, B).
[0404] In an embodiment, the parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a fourth parameter. For example, the parameters may comprise the fourth parameter if the parameters comprise the third parameter. For example, the parameters may comprise the fourth parameter if the third parameter indicates that the UE supports MT dual UL on the band pair. The fourth parameter may indicate, in case of MT dual UL, which band of the band pair supports 1 T and which one supports (M-1)T. For example, during an MT dual UL transmission on the band pair (A, B), a first value of the fourth parameter may indicate that the first band (e.g., band A indicated by a first band index) supports (M-l)-port transmission and/or the second band (e.g., band B indicated by a second band index) supports 1 -port transmission. For example, during an MT dual UL transmission on the band pair (A, B), a second value of the fourth parameter may indicate that the first band (e.g., band A indicated by a first band index) supports 1 -port transmission and/or the second band (e.g., band B indicated by a second band index) supports (M-l)-port transmission. For example, during an MT dual UL transmission on the band pair (A,B), a third value of the fourth parameter may indicate that either of the first band (e.g., band A indicated by a first band index) and the second band (e.g., band B indicated by a second band index) supports (M-l)-port transmission.
[0405] In an embodiment, the capability information message may comprise two or more of the above parameters, e.g., the first parameter and/or the second parameter and/or the third parameter.
[0406] In an embodiment, the parameters of UL Tx switching capability may comprise a switching parameter indicating one or more supported switching options for the band pair (e.g., 3TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair). [0407] In an embodiment, a first value of the switching parameter (e.g., switchedUL) may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on switched/TDMed UL for the band pair. For example, the UE may not be able to transmit concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions on the two bands of the band pair.
[0408] In an embodiment, a second value of the switching parameter (e.g., 2Tdual UL) may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on 2T dual UL for the band pair. For example, the UE may be able to transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of 2 Tx chains (or 2 active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair. For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the second value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports 1 -port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously. [0409] In an embodiment, if the UE has 1 Tx chain in band A for a 1 -port uplink transmission on band A in slot n, and the other 2Tx chains are in band B, based on the switching parameter indicating the second value, the UE may indicate that it can only use one of the 2Tx chains in band B for uplink transmission in slot n.
[0410] In an embodiment, a third value of the switching parameter (e.g., 3TdualUL) may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on 3T dual UL for the band pair. For example, the UE may be able to transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of 3 Tx chains (or 3 active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair. For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 2-port uplink transmission (e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 2-port uplink transmission (e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports 1 -port transmission on band A and 2-port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously. For example, the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports 2-port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously.
[0411] In an embodiment, a fourth value of the switching parameter (e.g., MTdualUL) may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on MT dual UL for the band pair. For example, the UE may be able to transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of M Tx chains (or M active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair. For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission (e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission (e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports 1 -port transmission on band A and (M-1 )-port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously. For example, the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that the UE supports (M-1 )-port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B concurrently/simultaneously.
[0412] In an embodiment, a fifth value of the switching parameter (e.g., switched UL-and-2Tdual UL) may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on TDMed/switched UL and 2T dual UL for the band pair.
[0413] In an embodiment, a sixth value of the switching parameter (e.g., switched UL-and-3TdualUL) may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on TDMed/switched UL and 3T dual UL for the band pair.
[0414] In an embodiment, a seventh value of the switching parameter (e.g., 2TdualUL-and-3Tdual UL) may indicate that the UE supports UL Tx switching based on 2T dual UL and 3T dual UL for the band pair.
[0415] As shown in FIG. 27, the UE may receive one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message) comprising configurations of a cell group comprising a plurality of uplink carriers. The configurations of the cell group may comprise one or more parameters of UL Tx switching across the plurality of uplink carriers. The plurality of uplink carriers may be in a plurality of bands, e.g. , each uplink carrier of the plurality of uplink carriers may be in a respective band of the plurality of bands (e.g., inter-band UL GA and/or EN-DC). The one or more parameters may indicate that UL Tx switching is enabled/configured for/across a band pair (A,B). The band pair may comprise a first band A and a second band B.
[0416] The one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may indicate that UL Tx switching is enabled/configured for/across a band pair (A,B) based on MT dual UL (e.g., M=3,4, ... ). The one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may indicate that UL Tx switching is enabled/configured for/across the band pair (A,B) such as to enable dual/con current UL transmissions using M (M>=3) Tx chains on the band pair.
[0417] In an embodiment, the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a first parameter indicating switching of 2 Tx chains (e.g., 2T switching mode) is enabled/configured for the bands pair (A,B). For example, based on the first parameter, the UE may switch 2 Tx chains at the same time (e.g., together or back to back) between band A and band B. For example, the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a second parameter indicating switching of 3 Tx chains (e.g., 3T switching mode) is enabled/configured for the bands pair (A,B). For example, based on the second parameter, the UE may switch 3 Tx chains at the same time (e.g., together or back to back) between band A and band B. For example, the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a third parameter indicating switching of M Tx chains (e.g., MT switching mode) is enabled/configured for the bands pair (A,B). For example, based on the third parameter, the UE may switch M Tx chains at the same time (e.g., together or back to back) between band A and band B.
[0418] In an embodiment, the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise (MT) dual UL configuration parameter(s) indicating that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using M (M>=3) Tx chains on the band pair is enabled. [0419] In an embodiment, the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a first parameter indicating whether 2T dual uplink is enabled on the band pair (A,B) or not. For example, a first value of the first parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 2 Tx chains on the band pair is enabled. For example, a second value of the first parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 2 Tx chains on the band pair is disabled. 2T dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B.
[0420] In an embodiment, the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a second parameter indicating whether 3T dual uplink is enabled on the band pair (A,B) or not. For example, a first value of the second parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 3 Tx chains on the band pair is enabled. For example, a second value of the second parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using 3 Tx chains on the band pair is disabled. 3T dual uplink may comprise a 2-port (e.g., 2-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B. 3T dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 2-port (e.g., 2-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B. [0421] In an embodiment, the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a third parameter indicating whether MT dual uplink (M>=3) is enabled on the band pair (A, B) or not. For example, a first value of the third parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using M (M>=3) Tx chains on the band pair is enabled. For example, a second value of the third parameter may indicate that dual/concurrent UL transmissions using M (M>=3) Tx chains on the band pair is disabled. MT dual uplink may comprise a (M-l)-port (e.g., (M-l)-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous 1 -port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B. MT dual uplink may comprise a 1 -port (e.g., 1-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band A and a dual/concurrent/simultaneous (M-l)-port (e.g., (M-l)-layer) uplink (e.g., PUSCH) transmission on band B. [0422] In an embodiment, the one or more parameters of UL Tx switching may comprise a switching parameter indicating the switching option configuration for the band pair (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair).
[0423] In an embodiment, a first value of the switching parameter (e.g., switchedUL) may indicate that UL Tx switching based on switched/TD Med UL is configured for the band pair. For example, the UE may not (expect to) transmit concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions on the two bands of the band pair.
[0424] In an embodiment, a second value of the switching parameter (e.g., 2Tdual UL) may indicate that UL Tx switching based on 2T dual UL is configured for the band pair. For example, the UE may transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of 2 Tx chains (or 2 active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair. For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the second value of the switching parameter may indicate that 1 -port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously.
[0425] In an embodiment, if the UE has 1 Tx chain in band A for a 1 -port uplink transmission on band A in slot n, and the other 2Tx chains are in band B, based on the switching parameter indicating the second value, the UE may only use one of the 2Tx chains in band B for uplink transmission in slot n.
[0426] In an embodiment, a third value of the switching parameter (e.g., 3TdualUL) may indicate that UL Tx switching based on 3T dual UL is configured for the band pair. For example, the UE may transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of 3 Tx chains (or 3 active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair. For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 2-port uplink transmission (e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 2-port uplink transmission (e.g., a 2-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 - port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that 1 -port transmission on band A and 2-port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously. For example, the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that 2-port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously.
[0427] In an embodiment, a fourth value of the switching parameter (e.g., MTdualUL) may indicate that UL Tx switching based on MT dual UL is configured for the band pair. For example, the UE may transmit dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions using a total of M Tx chains (or M active Tx chains) on the two bands of the band pair. For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission (e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the dual/concurrent/simultaneous uplink transmissions may comprise a (M-1 )-port uplink transmission (e.g., a (M-1 )-layer PUSCH) on a first band of the band pair (e.g., band A), and a 1 -port uplink transmission (e.g., a 1 -layer PUSCH) on a second band of the band pair (e.g., band B). For example, the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that 1 -port transmission on band A and (M-1 )-port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously. For example, the third value of the switching parameter may indicate that (M-1 )-port transmission on band A and 1 -port transmission on band B may be scheduled/configured concurrently/simultaneously. [0428] As shown in FIG. 27, the UE may transmit dual UL transmissions simultaneously. The dual UL transmissions may comprise a (M-1 )-port (e.g., 2-port for M=3, M>=3) UL transmission on band A and a 1-port UL transmission on band B. For example, based on the RRC configuration of UL Tx switching indicating that MT (e.g., (M-1)T+1T) dual UL is enabled/configured for band pair (A,B), the UE may receive one or more signals (e.g., RRC messages and/or MAC- CEs and/or DCIs) comprising uplink grants. For example, the UE may receive a first uplink grant indicating a first resource for a first uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) on a first carrier in the first band (e.g., band A). The first uplink transmission may be a (M-1 )-port (e.g., 2-port or 2-layer for M=3) uplink transmission. For example, the UE may receive a second uplink grant indicating a second resource for a second uplink transmission (e.g., PUSCH) on a second carrier in the second band (e.g., band B). The second uplink transmission may be a 1-port (e.g., 1 -layer) uplink transmission. For example, the first resource and the second resource may overlap, at least partially or completely, in time domain. For example, one or more symbols of the first resource may overlap with one or more symbols of the second resource. The UE may transmit the first uplink transmission with (M-1) (e.g., 2) Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports on the first band (band A) and the second uplink transmission with 1 Tx chain/antenna connector/port on the second band (band B), e.g., in response to the MT (e.g., (M-1 )T+1 T) dual UL being enabled/configured for band pair (A,B).
[0429] FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B show examples of transmission options for UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports. As UE capabilities vary from terminal to terminal, switched UL and Dual UL are further defined, as shown in the figure. As shown in FIG. 28A, in switched UL, a UE may send data over a first carrier/band and a second carrier/band and/or a third carrier/band in time division mode (TDM), but not at the same time. As shown in FIG. 28B, in Dual UL, in the terminal side, the first carrier/band and the second carrier/band or the third carrier/band may be flexibly aggregated, e.g., for a simultaneous/concurrent transmission. [0430] In an embodiment, a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports (e.g. , 3T) may be capable of supporting and/or configured with UL Tx switching across two or more bands based on switched UL. As shown in FIG. 28A, the UE may be capable of supporting and/or configured with UL Tx switching based on switched UL across 3 bands. For example, in a first mode of switched UL operation (Mode 1 in FIG. 28A), the UE may have a first Tx chain in a first carrier/band, a second Tx chain in a second carrier/band and a third Tx chain in a third carrier/band. In Mode 1, the UE may transmit using either of the 3 Tx chains in one of the three carriers/bands at a given time. In a second mode of switched UL operation (Mode 2 in FIG. 28A), the UE may have a first Tx chain in a first carrier/band, a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in a second carrier/band. In Mode 2, the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port transmission on the second carrier/band, or a 1 -port transmission on the first band. In a third mode of switched UL operation (Mode 3 in FIG. 28A), the UE may have a first Tx chain in the second carrier/band, a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in the first carrier/band. In Mode 3, the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port transmission on the first carrier/band, or a 1 -port transmission on the second band. In a fourth mode of switched UL operation (Mode 4 in FIG. 28A), the UE may have a first Tx chain and a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in a first carrier/band. In Mode 4, the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port or 3-port transmission on the first carrier/band. In a fifth mode of switched UL operation (Mode 5 in FIG. 28A), the UE may have a first Tx chain and a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in the second carrier/band. In Mode 5, the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port or 3-port transmission on the second carrier/band.
[0431] In an embodiment, a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports (e.g., 3T) may be capable of supporting and/or configured with UL Tx switching across two or more bands based on switched UL. As shown in FIG. 28B, the UE may be capable of supporting and/or configured with UL Tx switching based on dual UL across 3 bands. For example, in a first mode of dual UL operation (Mode 1 in FIG. 28B), the UE may have a first Tx chain in a first carrier/band, a second Tx chain in a second carrier/band and a third Tx chain in a third carrier/band. In Mode 1, the UE may transmit using the 3 Tx chains in the three carriers/bands at the same time (simultaneously/concurrently), e.g., this mode may be referred to as triple UL. In Mode 1 , the UE may transmit using 2 Tx chains on two carriers/bands of the three carriers/bands at the same time (simultaneously/concurrently). In a second mode of dual UL operation (Mode 2 in FIG. 28A), the UE may have a first Tx chain in a first carrier/band, a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in a second carrier/band. In Mode 2, the UE may transmit a 2-port uplink transmission on the second carrier/band, and a 1 -port uplink transmission on the first band, e.g., this mode may be referred to as 3T (2T+1T) dual UL. In Mode 2, the UE may transmit a 1 -port uplink transmission on the second carrier/band, and a 1-port uplink transmission on the first band, e.g., this mode may be referred to as (2T) dual UL. In a third mode of dual UL operation (Mode 3 in FIG. 28B), the UE may have a first Tx chain in the first carrier/band, a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in the second carrier/band. In Mode 3, the UE may transmit a 2-port uplink transmission on the first carrier/band, and a 1-port uplink transmission on the second band, e.g., this mode may be referred to as 3T (2T+1T) dual UL. In Mode 3, the UE may transmit a 1-port uplink transmission on the first carrier/band, and a 1-port uplink transmission on the second band, e.g., this mode may be referred to as (2T) dual UL. In a fourth mode of dual UL operation (Mode 4 in FIG. 28B), the UE may have a first Tx chain and a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in a first carrier/band. In Mode 4, the UE may transmit a 1-port or 2- port or 3-port transmission on the first carrier/band. In a fifth mode of dual UL operation (Mode 5 in FIG. 28B), the UE may have a first Tx chain and a second Tx chain and a third Tx chain in the second carrier/band. In Mode 5, the UE may transmit a 1 -port or 2-port or 3-port transmission on the second carrier/band.
[0432] In these examples and for both switched/TDM uplink and dual uplink, UL Tx switching of one or more Tx chains across the bands may enable the different operation modes (e.g., Mode 1 , Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4, and Mode 5 in FIG. 28A and/or FIG. 28B). Different types of uplink Tx Switching may be used when switching between each two operation modes. For example, a 1T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 1 and mode 2, or between mode 2 and mode 3, or between mode 3 and mode 4, or between mode 1 and mode 3, or between mode 3 and mode 5. In case of 1T uplink switching, only one Tx chain (antenna connector) is switched between the two bands/carriers. In another example, a 2T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 1 and mode 4, or mode 2 and mode 4, or between mode 1 and mode 5, or between mode 3 and mode 5. In case of 2T uplink switching, two Tx chains (antenna connectors) are switched between the two or more bands/carriers at the same time. In another example, a 3T uplink switching may be used/performed when switching between mode 4 and mode 5. In case of 3T uplink switching, three Tx chains (antenna connectors) are switched between the two or more bands/carriers at the same time.
[0433] A UE may indicate support of UL Tx switching of one or more Tx chains across a plurality of bands (e.g., two or more bands, e.g., of one or more band pairs). Based on the embodiments, the UE may indicate support of UL Tx switching that enables different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B. Based on the embodiments, the UE may indicate support of UL Tx switching based different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B. Based on the embodiments, the UE may indicate support of different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) for one or more band pairs (e.g., a plurality of bands) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B.
[0434] The UE may receive RRC message(s) comprising configuration parameters of UL Tx switching indicating UL Tx switching based on different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B. Based on the embodiments, the UE may be configured with different operation modes (e.g., triple UL and/or 3T dual UL and or 2T dual UL and/or switched UL) for one or more band pairs (e.g., a plurality of bands) shown in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B.
[0435] FIG. 29 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 2 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports. The UE may have a first Tx chain (Tx-1) on a first band (band A) and a second Tx chain (Tx-2) on a second band (band B). For example, the UE may support 1 Tx chain in band A and/or 2 Tx chains in band B. In a first slot, the UE may have/perform/transmit a (2T) dual UL using a total of 2 Tx chains on the first band and the second band: a first 1-port UL transmission with the first Tx chain on the first band and second (simultaneous/concurrent/dual) 1-port UL transmission with the second Tx chain on the second band. The UE may switch the first Tx chain from the first band to the second band. The UE may have/perform/transmit a 2-port UL transmission with the 2Tx chains on the second band, e.g. , in a next slot after switching.
[0436] FIG. 30 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports. The UE may have a first Tx chain (Tx-1) on a first band (band A) and a second Tx chain (Tx-2) and a third Tx chain (Tx-3) on a second band (band B). For example, the UE may support 1Tx chain in band A and/or 2 Tx chains in band B. In a first slot, the UE may have/perform/transmit a 3Tdual UL (2T+1T dual or 2+1 dual) using a total of 3 Tx chains on the first band and the second band: a first 1 -port UL transmission with the first Tx chain on the first band and second (simultaneous/concurrent/dual) 2-port UL transmission with the second Tx chain and the third Tx chain on the second band. The UE may switch the first Tx chain from the second band to the first band. The UE may have/perform/transmit another 3T dual UL on the first band and the second band, e.g., in a next slot after switching: a 2-port UL transmission with the first Tx chain and the third Tx chain on the first band and a (simultaneous/concurrent/dual) 1 -port UL transmission with the second Tx chain on the second band.
[0437] FIG. 31 shows an example of UL Tx switching for a UE with 3 Tx chains/antenna connectors/ports. The UE may have a first Tx chain (Tx-1) and a second Tx chain (Tx-2) and a third Tx chain (Tx-3) on a first band (band A). For example, the UE may support 3Tx chain in band A and/or 3 or 3 Tx chains in band B. In a first slot, the UE may transmit a 3-port UL transmission with the first Tx chain and the second Tx chain and the third Tx chain on the first band. The UE may switch the first Tx chain and the second Tx chain, based on 2T switching, from the first band to the second band. The UE may have/perform/transmit a 3T dual UL on the first band and the second band, e.g., in a next slot after switching: a 2-port UL transmission with the first Tx chain and the second Tx chain on the first band and a (simultaneous/concurrent/dual) 1 -port UL transmission with the third Tx chain on the second band.
[0438] A wireless device may transmit one or more capability information messages comprising one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching, for a band pair comprising a first band and a second band. The one or more parameters may indicate: whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports, and/or whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports. The dual uplink with three antenna ports may comprise uplink transmission with two antenna ports (e.g., 2-port UL transmission) on the first band and uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the second band. The dual uplink with two antenna ports may comprise uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the first band and uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the second band.
[0439] A wireless device may transmit one or more capability information messages (e.g., UECapabilitylnformation) indicating whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching (e.g., ULTxSwitchingBandPair) based on dual uplink with three antenna ports on a band pair comprising a first band and a second band (e.g., via 3TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair). The dual uplink with three antenna ports may comprise uplink transmission with two antenna ports (e.g., 2-port UL transmission) on the first band and uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the second band. [0440] The one or more capability information messages may comprise one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for the band pair (e.g. , ULTxSwitchingBandPair) . The one or more parameters may indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair. The one or more parameters may comprise a first parameter (e.g., 3TDualOptionForBandPair or 2T1TDualOptionForBandPair) with a first value (e.g., supported) indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair. The one or more parameters may comprise a first parameter (e.g., 3TDu al Option ForBandPai r or 2T1 TDualOptionForBandPair) with a second value (e.g., not supported) indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair. The one or more parameters may not comprise a first parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports. The absence of the first parameter may indicate that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
[0441] The one or more parameters may indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair. The dual uplink with two antenna ports may comprise uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the first band and uplink transmission with one antenna port (e.g., 1 -port UL transmission) on the second band. The one or more parameters may comprise a second parameter (e.g., 2TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair or
1 T1 TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair) with a first value (e.g., dualUL or “both”) indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair. The one or more parameters may comprise a second parameter (e.g., 2TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair or
1 T1 TuplinkTxSwitchingOptionForBandPair) with a second value (e.g., switchedUL) indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair. The one or more parameters may not comprise a second parameter (e.g., 2TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair or 1T1 TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair) associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports. The absence of the second parameter may indicate that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
[0442] The one or more parameters may comprise a third parameter (e.g., 3TuplinkTxSwitchingOption ForBandPair) indicating one or more support options/types for uplink transmissions on the first band and the second band based on uplink transmit antenna switching. A first value (e.g., switchedUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink on the band pair. A second value (e.g., 2TdualUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports/Tx chains on the band pair. A third value (e.g., 3TdualUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more ports/Tx chains on the band pair. The wireless device and/or the base station may determine, based on the third value of the third parameter, that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair (e.g., 2TdualUL). A fourth value (e.g., switchedUL-3TdualUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair. A fifth value (e.g., 2TdualUL-3TdualUL) of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
[0443] Dual uplink may comprise simultaneous/concurrent uplink transmissions by the wireless device on two bands. The uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first band may overlap, in time domain, with the uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
[0444] The transmitting may be based on the wireless device supporting three transmit antenna connectors in at least one of the first band or the second band.
[0445] The wireless device may receive a capability enquiry message (e.g., UECapabilityEnquiry) indicating a request for the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching (e.g., via uplinkTxSwitch Request and/or supportedBandListNR and/or supportedBandCombinationList-UplinkTxSwitch).
[0446] In an embodiment, 3TdualUL may comprise/indicate support of and/or configuration/enabling of simultaneous transmission of a 2-port UL transmission on a first band and a 1 -port UL transmission on a second band. Reciprocal capability on the first and the second band may be assumed. Another parameter may indicate for 3TdualUL, which of the first band and/or the second band of the band pair supports the 2-port transmission. If the UE supports 3Tdual UL on a band pair, it may also support 2TdualUL on the band pair. If the UE does not support legacy dualUL on the band pair, it may also not support 3TdualUL on the band pair, and/or not include/support 3TdualUL for the band pair.
[0447] In an embodiment, when the capability (e.g., BandCombination-UplinkTxSwitch-r19) is present in the UE capability information message, for each uplink band pair (e.g., in the NR inter-band GA configurations) and/or according to the 3Tdual capability (e.g., 3TuplinkTxSwitchingOptionForBandPair), the UE may do one or more of the followings: (1) if switchedUL is supported, uplink transmission on any one band of the band pair in the band combination may be supported (e.g., according to the scheduling commands, and the corresponding inter-band GA requirements) with uplink assigned to one band on band X or band Y apply; (2) if dualUL or 2Tdual UL is supported, simultaneous uplink transmission on the two NR UL bands from the band pair for which dualUL or 2TdualUL is declared in the band combination may be supported (e.g., according to the scheduling commands, and the corresponding interband GA requirements) with uplink GA between the two uplink bands apply; (3) if 3TdualUL is supported, simultaneous 1 -port and 2-port uplink transmissions on the two NR UL bands from the band pair for which 3TdualUL is declared in the band combination may be supported (e.g., according to the scheduling commands, and the corresponding interband GA requirements) with uplink GA between the two uplink bands apply.
[0448] The wireless device may receive one or more radio resource control (RRC) messages comprising configuration parameters (e.g., UplinkTxSwitchingBandPairConfig via CellGroupConfig) of uplink transmit antenna switching for a plurality of cells. The configuration parameters may comprise a first parameter (e.g., switchingOptionConfigForBandPair or 3TswitchingOptionConfigForBandPair or
2T1 TswitchingOptionConfigForBandPair) indicating that dual uplink with three or more antenna ports is configured for the band pair.
[0449] Three antenna connectors of the wireless device may be in the second band. The wireless device may receive one or more control messages indicating a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first uplink carrier on the first band. A preceding uplink transmission may be a second uplink transmission with three ports on a second uplink carrier on the second band. The wireless device may switch, in response to the one or more control messages, two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band. The wireless device may receive one or more second control messages indicating a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band. The third uplink transmission may overlap in time domain with the first uplink transmission.
[0450] The wireless device may transmit, in response to (the) switching two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band and based on the one or more capability information messages indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports on the band pair: the first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first uplink carrier on the first band; and the third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band. The first uplink transmission and the third uplink transmission may be dual (concurrent/simultaneous) uplink transmissions with (using) three antenna ports on the band pair.
[0451] A wireless device may receive a capability enquiry message to request the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna (TX) switching. A wireless device may transmit capability information indicating support for uplink TX switching, in a band combination comprising a first band and a second band based on concurrent/dual uplink transmission. The concurrent/dual uplink transmission may comprise a first UL transmission using/with a first quantity/number of ports (e.g., X ports) transmission on a first band; and a second UL transmission using/with a second quantity/number of ports (e.g., Y ports) transmission on a second band. At least one of the first quantity or the second quantity may be equal to or greater that two.
[0452] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method including: transmitting, by a wireless device, one or more capability information messages including one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair including a first band and a second band, the one or more parameters indicating support of: a first uplink transmission using two antenna ports on the first band; a second uplink transmission using one antenna port on the second band; and uplink transmit antenna switching, for the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission, based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times. [0453] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method including: transmitting, by a wireless device, one or more capability information messages indicating the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first band; and a second uplink transmission with one antenna port on a second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
[0454] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate support of: the first uplink transmission using the two antenna ports on the first band; and the second uplink transmission using the one antenna port on the second band.
[0455] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages includes one or more parameters indicating the uplink transmit antenna switching.
[0456] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages include one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair including the first band and the second band.
[0457] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with two antenna ports or switched uplink with two antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with two antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band; and the switched uplink with two antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
[0458] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include at least one of: a first parameter indicating a first switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of two transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band; or a second parameter indicating a second switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of three transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band.
[0459] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages indicate the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports.
[0460] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter indicating the first band of the band pair as a band that supports uplink transmission with two antenna ports during dual uplink.
[0461] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
[0462] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages include one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for the band pair.
[0463] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
[0464] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
[0465] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
[0466] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters do not include a first parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
[0467] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
[0468] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the dual uplink with two antenna ports includes: uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
[0469] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a second parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
[0470] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a second parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
[0471] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters do not include a second parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
[0472] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a third parameter indicating one or more support options/types for uplink transmissions on the first band and the second band based on uplink transmit antenna switching.
[0473] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a first value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink on the band pair.
[0474] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a second value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
[0475] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a third value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
[0476] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including determining, based on the third value of the third parameter, that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
[0477] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a fourth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
[0478] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a fifth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
[0479] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein dual uplink includes simultaneous orconcurrent uplink transmissions by the wireless device on two bands.
[0480] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first band overlap, in time domain, with the uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
[0481] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the transmitting is based on the wireless device supporting three transmit antenna connectors in at least one of the first band or the second band.
[0482] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving a capability enquiry message indicating a request for the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching.
[0483] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving one or more radio resource control (RRC) messages including configuration parameters of uplink transmit antenna switching for a plurality of cells, wherein the configuration parameters include a first parameter indicating that dual uplink with three or more antenna ports is configured for the band pair.
[0484] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein three antenna connectors of the wireless device are in the second band.
[0485] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving one or more control messages indicating a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first uplink carrier on the first band. [0486] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a preceding uplink transmission is a second uplink transmission with three ports on a second uplink carrier on the second band.
[0487] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including switching, in response to the one or more control messages, two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band.
[0488] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving one or more second control messages indicating a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band, wherein the third uplink transmission overlaps in time domain with the first uplink transmission.
[0489] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, in response to switching two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band and based on the one or more capability information messages indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports on the band pair: the first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first uplink carrier on the first band; and the third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band.
[0490] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the first uplink transmission and the third uplink transmission are dual uplink transmissions with three antenna ports on the band pair.
[0491] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method including: receiving, by a base station from a wireless device, one or more capability information messages including one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair including a first band and a second band, the one or more parameters indicating support of: a first uplink transmission using two antenna ports on the first band; a second uplink transmission using one antenna port on the second band; and uplink transmit antenna switching, for the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission, based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
[0492] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method including: receiving, by a base station from a wireless device, one or more capability information messages indicating the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first band; and a second uplink transmission with one antenna port on a second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
[0493] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate support of: the first uplink transmission using the two antenna ports on the first band; and the second uplink transmission using the one antenna port on the second band.
[0494] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages includes one or more parameters indicating the uplink transmit antenna switching.
[0495] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages include one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair including the first band and the second band.
[0496] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with two antenna ports or switched uplink with two antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with two antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band; and the switched uplink with two antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
[0497] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include at least one of: a first parameter indicating a first switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of two transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band; or a second parameter indicating a second switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of three transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band.
[0498] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages indicate the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports.
[0499] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter indicating the first band of the band pair as a band that supports uplink transmission with two antenna ports during dual uplink.
[0500] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
[0501] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more capability information messages include one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for the band pair.
[0502] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
[0503] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
[0504] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a first parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
[0505] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters do not include a first parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
[0506] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
[0507] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the dual uplink with two antenna ports includes: uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
[0508] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a second parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
[0509] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a second parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
[0510] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters do not include a second parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair. [0511] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the one or more parameters include a third parameter indicating one or more support options/types for uplink transmissions on the first band and the second band based on uplink transmit antenna switching.
[0512] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method 1 -21 , wherein a first value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink on the band pair.
[0513] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a second value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
[0514] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a third value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
[0515] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including determining, based on the third value of the third parameter, that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
[0516] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a fourth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
[0517] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a fifth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
[0518] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein dual uplink includes simultaneous orconcurrent uplink transmissions by the wireless device on two bands.
[0519] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first band overlap, in time domain, with the uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
[0520] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the receiving is based on the wireless device supporting three transmit antenna connectors in at least one of the first band or the second band. [0521] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, to the wireless device, a capability enquiry message indicating a request for the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching.
[0522] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, to the wireless device, one or more radio resource control (RRC) messages including configuration parameters of uplink transmit antenna switching for a plurality of cells, wherein the configuration parameters include a first parameter indicating that dual uplink with three or more antenna ports is configured for the band pair. [0523] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein three antenna connectors of the wireless device are in the second band.
[0524] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, to the wireless device, one or more control messages indicating a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first uplink carrier on the first band.
[0525] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein a preceding uplink transmission is a second uplink transmission with three ports on a second uplink carrier on the second band.
[0526] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including transmitting, to the wireless device, one or more second control messages indicating a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band, wherein the third uplink transmission overlaps in time domain with the first uplink transmission.
[0527] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, further including receiving, in response to the wireless device switching two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band and based on the one or more capability information messages indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports on the band pair: the first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first uplink carrier on the first band; and the third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band.
[0528] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a method, wherein the first uplink transmission and the third uplink transmission are dual uplink transmissions with three antenna ports on the band pair.
[0529] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to an apparatus (e.g., wireless device or base station) including: one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the apparatus to perform any of the methods and/or techniques disclosed herein.
[0530] In some aspects, the techniques described herein relate to a non-transitory computer-readable medium including instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an apparatus (e.g., wireless device or base station), cause the apparatus to perform any of the methods and/or techniques disclosed herein.

Claims

CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1. A method comprising: transmitting, by a wireless device, one or more capability information messages comprising one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair comprising a first band and a second band, the one or more parameters indicating support of: a first uplink transmission using two antenna ports on the first band; a second uplink transmission using one antenna port on the second band; and uplink transmit antenna switching, for the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission, based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
2. A method comprising: transmitting, by a wireless device, one or more capability information messages indicating the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first band; and a second uplink transmission with one antenna port on a second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate support of: the first uplink transmission using the two antenna ports on the first band; and the second uplink transmission using the one antenna port on the second band.
4. The method of any one of claims 2-3, wherein the one or more capability information messages comprises one or more parameters indicating the uplink transmit antenna switching.
5. The method of any one of claims 2-4, wherein the one or more capability information messages comprise one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair comprising the first band and the second band.
6. The method of any one of claims 1-5, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with two antenna ports or switched uplink with two antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with two antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band; and the switched uplink with two antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
7. The method of any one of claims 1-6, wherein the one or more parameters comprise at least one of: a first parameter indicating a first switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of two transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band; or a second parameter indicating a second switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of three transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band.
8. The method of any one of claims 1 -7, wherein the one or more capability information messages indicate the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports.
9. The method of any one of claims 1 -8, wherein the one or more parameters comprise a first parameter indicating the first band of the band pair as a band that supports uplink transmission with two antenna ports during dual uplink.
10. The method of any one of claims 1-9, wherein the one or more parameters further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
11. The method of any one of claims 1 -10, wherein the one or more capability information messages comprise one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for the band pair.
12. The method of any one of claims 1-11, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
13. The method of any one of claims 1-12, wherein the one or more parameters comprise a first parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
14. The method of any one of claims 1 -13, wherein the one or more parameters comprise a first parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
15. The method of any one of claims 1-14, wherein the one or more parameters do not comprise a first parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more antenna ports on the band pair.
16. The method of any one of claims 1-15, wherein the one or more parameters indicate whether the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
17. The method of any one of claims 1-16, wherein the dual uplink with two antenna ports comprises: uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
18. The method of any one of claims 1 -17, wherein the one or more parameters comprise a second parameter with a first value indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
19. The method of any one of claims 1-18, wherein the one or more parameters comprise a second parameter with a second value indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
20. The method of any one of claims 1-19, wherein the one or more parameters do not comprise a second parameter associated with uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports, indicating that the wireless device does not support uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two antenna ports on the band pair.
21. The method of any one of claims 1 -20, wherein the one or more parameters comprise a third parameter indicating one or more support options/types for uplink transmissions on the first band and the second band based on uplink transmit antenna switching.
22. The method of any one of claims 1 -21 , wherein a first value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink on the band pair.
23. The method of any one of claims 1 -22, wherein a second value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
24. The method of any one of claims 1 -23, wherein a third value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
25. The method of any one of claims 1 -24, further comprising determining, based on the third value of the third parameter, that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports on the band pair.
26. The method of any one of claims 1 -25, wherein a fourth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on switched uplink and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
27. The method of any one of claims 1 -26, wherein a fifth value of the third parameter indicates that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with two ports and dual uplink with three or more ports on the band pair.
28. The method of any one of claims 1 -27, wherein dual uplink comprises simultaneous orconcurrent uplink transmissions by the wireless device on two bands.
29. The method of any one of claims 1 -28, wherein the uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first band overlap, in time domain, with the uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band.
30. The method of any one of claims 1 -29, wherein the transmitting is based on the wireless device supporting three transmit antenna connectors in at least one of the first band or the second band.
31. The method of any one of claims 1 -30, further comprising receiving a capability enquiry message indicating a request for the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching.
32. The method of any one of claims 1 -31 , further comprising receiving one or more radio resource control (RRC) messages comprising configuration parameters of uplink transmit antenna switching for a plurality of cells, wherein the configuration parameters comprise a first parameter indicating that dual uplink with three or more antenna ports is configured for the band pair.
33. The method of any one of claims 1 -32, wherein three antenna connectors of the wireless device are in the second band.
34. The method of any one of claims 1 -33, further comprising receiving one or more control messages indicating a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first uplink carrier on the first band.
35. The method of any one of claims 1 -34, wherein a preceding uplink transmission is a second uplink transmission with three ports on a second uplink carrier on the second band.
36. The method of any one of claims 1 -35, further comprising switching, in response to the one or more control messages, two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band.
37. The method of any one of claims 1 -36, further comprising receiving one or more second control messages indicating a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band, wherein the third uplink transmission overlaps in time domain with the first uplink transmission.
38. The method of any one of claims 1 -37, further comprising transmitting, in response to switching two antenna connectors of the wireless device from the second band to the first band and based on the one or more capability information messages indicating that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports on the band pair: the first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the first uplink carrier on the first band; and the third uplink transmission with one antenna port on a third uplink carrier on the second band.
39. The method of any one of claims 1 -38, wherein the first uplink transmission and the third uplink transmission are dual uplink transmissions with three antenna ports on the band pair.
40. A method comprising: receiving, by a base station from a wireless device, one or more capability information messages comprising one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair comprising a first band and a second band, the one or more parameters indicating support of: a first uplink transmission using two antenna ports on the first band; a second uplink transmission using one antenna port on the second band; and uplink transmit antenna switching, for the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission, based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmission of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
41. A method comprising: receiving, by a base station from a wireless device, one or more capability information messages indicating the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a first uplink transmission with two antenna ports on a first band; and a second uplink transmission with one antenna port on a second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the first uplink transmission and the second uplink transmission at different times.
42. The method of claim 41 , wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate support of: the first uplink transmission using the two antenna ports on the first band; and the second uplink transmission using the one antenna port on the second band.
43. The method of any one of claims 41 -42, wherein the one or more capability information messages comprises one or more parameters indicating the uplink transmit antenna switching.
44. The method of any one of claims 41 -43, wherein the one or more capability information messages comprise one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for a band pair comprising the first band and the second band.
45. The method of any one of claims 40-44, wherein the one or more capability information messages further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with two antenna ports or switched uplink with two antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with two antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with one antenna port on the second band; and the switched uplink with two antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
46. The method of any one of claims 40-45, wherein the one or more parameters comprise at least one of: a first parameter indicating a first switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of two transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band; or a second parameter indicating a second switching period for uplink transmit antenna switching of three transmit antenna connectors between the first band and the second band.
47. The method of any one of claims 40-46, wherein the one or more capability information messages indicate the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on dual uplink with three antenna ports.
48. The method of any one of claims 40-47, wherein the one or more parameters comprise a first parameter indicating the first band of the band pair as a band that supports uplink transmission with two antenna ports during dual uplink.
49. The method of any one of claims 40-48, wherein the one or more parameters further indicate that the wireless device supports uplink transmit antenna switching based on at least one of dual uplink with three antenna ports or switched uplink with three antenna ports, wherein: the dual uplink with three antenna ports indicates simultaneous transmissions of: a third uplink transmission with one antenna port on the first band; and a fourth uplink transmission with two antenna ports on the second band; and the switched uplink with three antenna ports indicates transmissions of the third uplink transmission and the fourth uplink transmission at different times.
50. The method of any one of claims 40-49, wherein the one or more capability information messages comprise one or more parameters of the wireless device capability of uplink transmit antenna switching for the band pair.
51. An apparatus comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of claims 1-50.
52. A non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising instructions that, when executed by one or more processors of an apparatus, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of claims 1-50.
PCT/US2025/020412 2024-03-19 2025-03-18 Concurrent uplink transmission Pending WO2025199129A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202463567169P 2024-03-19 2024-03-19
US63/567,169 2024-03-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025199129A1 true WO2025199129A1 (en) 2025-09-25

Family

ID=95309873

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2025/020412 Pending WO2025199129A1 (en) 2024-03-19 2025-03-18 Concurrent uplink transmission

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025199129A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023129719A1 (en) * 2021-12-30 2023-07-06 Ofinno, Llc Uplink transmission-channels switching capability
EP4240086A1 (en) * 2020-12-02 2023-09-06 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Communication method and device

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4240086A1 (en) * 2020-12-02 2023-09-06 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Communication method and device
WO2023129719A1 (en) * 2021-12-30 2023-07-06 Ofinno, Llc Uplink transmission-channels switching capability

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20250106854A1 (en) Transmission using a plurality of wireless resources
US20240357681A1 (en) Uplink Transmission-Channels Switching Capability
US20240250799A1 (en) Dynamic Multi-Carrier Uplink Operations
CN117178621B (en) Scheduling and power saving for multicast and broadcast services
EP4184847A1 (en) Spatial relation in new radio
CN115606103A (en) Beam management procedure in wireless networks
WO2021159065A1 (en) Preemption indication with multi-beam
WO2021231811A1 (en) Initial access enhancements for multi-beam operation
US20240389129A1 (en) Uplink Transmission Switching Period Location
US20210105751A1 (en) Beam Management Procedures in Radio Systems
CN116671048A (en) Default rules in control channel repetition
CN116648874A (en) Random Access in Control Channel Repetition
CN115280855A (en) Pathloss based power control for configured uplink grants
EP4457941A1 (en) Unified transmission configuration indicator state indication
WO2021206990A1 (en) Methods and system for beam management in multiple transmission and reception points
US12477537B2 (en) Coverage enhancement with frequency selective transmission
CN116601891A (en) Radio link monitoring in control channel repetition
WO2024035631A1 (en) Network energy saving with multiple transmission and reception points
KR20260005270A (en) Candidate cell resource switching and timer operation
KR20250117794A (en) Beam management at multiple transmission and reception points
WO2023154376A1 (en) Multiple timing advance with multiple transmission reception points
KR102961610B1 (en) Dynamic multi-carrier uplink operation
WO2025199129A1 (en) Concurrent uplink transmission
WO2025175233A1 (en) Uplink transmit antenna switching
WO2025207928A1 (en) Unaffected band in uplink transmit switching

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 25717519

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1